JP2019005660A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can execute performance having the high amusement.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine 1 variably displays a performance pattern following the variable display of a special pattern in prescribed image display means when determination on whether or not to execute a special game is performed, and stop-displays the performance pattern indicating the result of the determination following the stop-display of the special pattern. Also, the performance pattern might be pseudo-stop-displayed prior to the stop-display of the performance pattern. At the time, identification information constituting the performance pattern varies in the first direction different from the variation direction where the performance pattern varies.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 102

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that produces an effect during a variable display of a symbol for notifying a determination result of whether or not to execute a special game.

  For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins at the starting port, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and when the symbol for notifying the determination result is displayed variably, Various effects are made to expect a big hit (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-163824

  By the way, the production performed in the conventional gaming machine is not necessarily a production with high interest, and there is room for improvement in terms of improvement of interest.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a highly interesting performance.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, special symbol display control means for displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination after the special symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined symbol display means, and
Production control means for controlling the execution of the production,
The production control means includes
In a predetermined image display means, the effect symbol is variably displayed along with the special symbol variation display, and the effect symbol indicating the result of the determination is stopped and displayed along with the special symbol stop display,
The effect symbol is configured to include identification information that can distinguish the effect symbol from other effect symbols,
The production control means includes
Before the effect design indicating the result of the determination is stopped and displayed, it is possible to display the effect design in a pseudo-stop manner,
When pseudo-stop-displaying the effect symbol, the identification information constituting the effect symbol can be changed in a first direction different from the changing direction in which the effect symbol was changed. Is.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the effect symbol is displayed in a pseudo stop state, the identification information constituting the effect symbol changes in the first direction different from the change direction. It is possible for a person to easily recognize, and, for example, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect using the effect symbol as compared with the case where the effect symbol is stopped by simply swinging the effect symbol.

Further, the gaming machine of the second invention is the gaming machine of the first invention,
The effect design is configured to include the identification information and a decoration image,
The production control means includes
When the effect design is displayed in a pseudo stop state, the identification information is changed in the first direction, and the decoration image is changed in a second direction different from the change direction and different from the first direction. It is what.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the effect symbol is displayed in a false stop, the identification information constituting the effect symbol and the decorative image change in different directions, so compared to the case where these change in the same direction. Thus, it is possible to improve the interest of the production using the production design.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to execute an effect with high interest.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display device shown in FIG. 3, and is a view showing display devices provided in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the game machine. It is a table | surface which shows a response | compatibility etc. with the classification of winning and the opening pattern of a big prize opening. It is a table | surface which shows the various random numbers which the microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a reach determination table, (D) is a normal symbol per determination table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. It is a pattern selection table. It is a table | surface which shows a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of an interruption process. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of starting entrance. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol success / failure determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of the process during normal symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol confirmation process. It is a flowchart of a normal electric accessory process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 1 standby process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 success / failure determination processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 changing process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 1 confirmation process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 2 standby process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of special figure 2 determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 changing process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 2 confirmation process. It is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a big hit game start process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 1. It is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 2. It is a flowchart of the number of reserved balls. It is a flowchart of a power-off monitoring process. It is a flowchart of a sub control main process. It is a flowchart of a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a change production start process. It is a table | surface which shows the design kind of effect design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect design game effect of the state A. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect design game effect of the state B. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of effect mode C, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of effect mode D. FIG. 52 shows the flow of effect symbol game effects in effect mode C. FIG. 49 shows the flow of effect symbol game effects in effect mode D. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the small hit change in effect mode D, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the small hit game in effect mode D. It is a flowchart of a small hit prefetch effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect when a specific period is started. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode selection screen during an ending period. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen from after the start of the mode selection period in jackpot game to after the start. (A) is a table | surface which shows the kind of 2nd effect pattern (battle effect pattern of effect mode C), (b) is a table | surface which shows the type of 3rd effect pattern (battle effect pattern of effect mode D). FIG. 38 shows a display example of a preview image in effect mode D. It is a display pattern determination table of a notice image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the flow of the production performed at the time of a low probability low base state. It is a screen figure (the 1) which shows the specific example of the production performed in the low probability low base state. It is a screen figure (the 2) which shows the example of the production performed in the low probability low base state. It is a screen figure (the 3) which shows the specific example of the production performed in the low probability low base state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the chance up in SPSP reach. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the flow of a rank improvement effect. It is a screen figure (the 1) which shows the specific example of a rank improvement effect. It is a screen figure (the 2) which shows the specific example of a rank improvement effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot reliability of various notice effects, such as a rank-up effect. It is a screen figure which shows the specific example of a 1st countdown effect (the 1). It is the screen figure (the 2) which shows the specific example of a 1st countdown effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the characteristic of a 1st countdown effect. It is a screen figure which shows the 1st specific example of a 2nd countdown effect. It is a screen figure which shows the 2nd specific example of a 2nd countdown effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the characteristic of various countdown effects. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode in a low probability low base state. It is a screen figure (the 1) which shows the specific example of the production | presentation which concerns on a great chance production | generation generation zone. It is a screen figure (the 2) which shows the specific example of the production | presentation which concerns on a great chance production | generation generation zone. It is a screen figure which shows the specific example of 1st group notice. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the display mode and jackpot reliability of each icon. It is a screen figure which shows the specific example of a 2nd group notice. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the jackpot reliability of each group notice. It is a screen figure which shows the 1st specific example of a button image change effect. It is a screen figure which shows the 2nd specific example of a button image change effect. It is a screen figure (the 1) which shows the specific example of special reach production. It is a screen figure (the 2) which shows the specific example of special reach production. It is a screen figure (the 3) which shows the specific example of special reach production. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the jackpot reliability of special reach production. (A) is a partial front view of the gaming machine for explaining the speaker lamp, and (B) is a partial front view of the gaming board for explaining the first start-up lamp. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the characteristic of the light emission effect. It is a time chart which shows the specific example of effect control which concerns on light emission effect. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the icon which can be acquired by a mini character battle effect. It is a screen figure (the 1) which shows the specific example of a mini character battle production. It is a screen figure (the 2) which shows the specific example of a mini character battle production. It is a screen figure (the 3) which shows the specific example of a mini character battle production. It is a screen figure (the 1) which shows the specific example of the change display of an effect design. It is a screen figure (the 2) which shows the specific example of the change display of an effect design. It is a screen figure (the 3) which shows the specific example of the change display of an effect design. It is a screen figure (the 4) which shows the specific example of the change display of an effect design.

  Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following, a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing a winning game that can give a predetermined amount of gaming profit (for example, a prize ball) to a player when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in accordance with the end of the variable display of the symbol. An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 attached in the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming board 2 is a gaming machine. It is configured to be detachable from the machine frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the gaming board 2 is removed from the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 to which the gaming board 2 and the like are attached, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the island facility of the hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island facility, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56. Further, the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side end side (left side in FIG. 1) in the vertical direction, and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one side end side as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

  In addition, the front frame 51 can supply a launching handle 60 for launching a game ball with a launch intensity corresponding to the operation amount (rotation angle) of the player and a game ball stored and stored to the launching device side. A ball hitting tray (upper pan) 61 and a surplus ball tray (lower pan) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball hitting tray 61 are provided. Further, the front frame 51 includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b that can be operated by the player during execution of a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. And simply referred to as “effect button 63”). The plurality of effect buttons can be used properly according to the type of game effect. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the aspect of the first embodiment, and any input detection means (for example, the player directly touches the button portion to input) can be used as long as the input from the player can be detected. Or non-contact type input detection means (such as a photoelectric type) that detects and inputs that a part of the player's body is close Good.

  The front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and image display devices (second image display device 71 and third image display device 72). Also, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are located in front of the front frame 51 (player side) so that the player can easily see the display screens 71a and 72a. It is installed in a slanted shape in the outward direction so as to protrude toward the outside. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are similar to the image display device 7 described later, depending on the execution / non-execution of the game, the game situation, the game effect to be executed, etc. Game production (characters, production designs, etc.), demonstration production, information related to the game (acquired game information, number of rounds, number of consecutive games, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability / explanation of game production), Information related to the setting of the gaming machine (volume setting information, luminance setting information, etc.) is displayed. In addition, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information and may display the same information. Further, the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information as when different information is displayed. There is a case to do. Further, the same information is displayed on any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72, and the remaining one is different information. May be displayed. It should be noted that any one or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as “image display device”.

  The image display device 7 is provided in an inner region of the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in an outer region of the game area 3. ing. As shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open side end) is attached to the front frame 51 via a second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). It has been. For this reason, the upper and lower second image display device hinges 75 can be pivoted in the left-right direction. More specifically, it is configured to be able to turn a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) in the right direction from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because, when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56 as axes, the second image display device 71 provided to protrude forward of the front frame 51 This is a configuration for preventing damage to the hall equipment (ball lending machine, inter-station equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (left side of FIG. 1) of the gaming machine 1. . On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the open end) is fixedly provided to the front frame 51 and cannot rotate.

  In the game board 2, a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down is surrounded by the rail member 4. The game board 2 is provided with a decorative board surface lamp 5. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding a game ball are projected. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

  Further, an image display device 7 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back side of the game board 2. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as “effect symbols”) are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, also referred to as an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as “effect symbol display section”). ), And the design symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R correspond to the gaming state according to the gaming state (low probability low base state, high probability low base state, low probability high base state, high probability high base state). The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol described later) set as the main player of the game. The effect symbol 8L is also referred to as “left symbol”, the effect symbol 8C is also referred to as “middle symbol”, and the effect symbol 8R is also referred to as “right symbol”.

  The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the gaming state is in a normal state (a low-probability low-base state described later, state A). As will be described in detail later, in this low probability low base state, the frequency of game balls entering the start port (second start port 21) is set lower than in the high base state, and whether or not a special symbol is appropriate The determination probability (first special symbol success / failure determination and second special symbol success / failure determination) is low (also referred to as “predetermined probability”), and the variation time of the second special symbol is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol. (2 times or more) is set (all deviations are 10 minutes). For this reason, in the normal state, the left game area 3A (the first game area 3A (the second game area) rather than the second special symbol is variably displayed by firing the game ball into the right game area 3B (the second game area) and entering the second start port 21. It is advantageous for a player to play a game in which a game ball is fired in one game area and entered into the first starting port 20 to display the first special symbol in a variable manner. In other words, in the normal state, it can be said that the game state is variably displayed mainly by the first special symbol (effect symbol). For this reason, in the normal state (state A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b are displayed in a variable manner and stopped in synchronization with the first special symbol.

  Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols that are stopped and displayed (derived display) in the effect symbol display area 7b, a first special symbol display 41a ("first") described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the “special symbol display unit”) and the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as “second special symbol display unit”). The result of symbol change display (result of special symbol success / failure determination) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize it. It should be noted that any one (or all) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as “symbol” or “identification information”. Further, the special symbol success / failure determination is also simply referred to as “win / failure determination” or “first success / failure determination”. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that performs the special symbol success / failure determination is also referred to as “a / failure determination execution unit” or “first determination / failure determination execution unit”.

  For example, if the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit (first specific hit), the effect design is stopped and displayed with the same three-digit symbol (such as “77”) such as “777”. Say). In addition, when it is a small hit (second specific hit), it is produced with a preset chance symbol such as “135” or a small bonus exclusive symbol such as “3 * 3” (also referred to as “small hit symbol”). Stop displaying symbols. In addition, when a small hit is made, the symbols in the same mode may be stopped and displayed for the small hits symbol and the off symbol instead of the mode for displaying the small hits dedicated symbol. In addition, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit symbols (first small hit symbol, second small hit symbol, etc.) can be distinguished from each other. ) May be stopped and the same (common) small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish them.

  Also, if the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is unacceptable, at least one of the three symbols such as “637” and “373” is stopped and displayed with a different symbol design (“out symbol” ”). Thereby, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (the result of the special symbol success / failure determination) by viewing the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed. That is, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol success / failure determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, Grasp the effect symbols displayed in the symbol display area 7b. In addition, as a variation display mode of the effect symbol, for example, a mode in which scroll display is performed in the up / down, left / right, and diagonal directions, a mode in which the effect display is performed using only the first effect symbol display unit 7b, and the first effect symbol display unit 7b. In addition, there is a mode of effect display using one or both of the second effect symbol display part 71a and the third effect symbol display part 72a. Moreover, in addition to this, you may have the aspect which produces an effect display only using the 2nd effect symbol display part 71a or the 3rd effect symbol display part 72a.

  Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game effect (effect pattern game effect) using the effect symbols as described above, the game is executed in accordance with the winning game (big hit game, small hit game). A hit game effect (a big hit game effect, a small hit game effect), a demonstration for waiting for a customer, and the like are displayed. In the effect symbol game effect, the hit game effect, and the demonstration effect, in addition to effect symbols such as numbers, effect images other than effect symbols such as background images and character images are also displayed. Although details will be described later, a game state (state A, state B or state C), a state in which a game ball is fired in the left game area 3A, or a game ball is fired in the right game area 3B. The display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b differs depending on whether or not a game is being performed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of variably displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously). Such a type of game The machine is also called “simultaneous variable machine”.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying a first effect hold 9a according to the number of first special figure hold to be described later. There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display section) for displaying the second effect hold 9b in accordance with the number of second special figure hold to be described later. The first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, depending on the display mode (the number of displays) of the first effect hold 9a or the second effect hold 9b in the effect hold display area. And the stored number of second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b can be easily shown to the player. Note that the display position of the first effect hold display unit and the display position of the second effect hold display unit may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect to be executed (reach effect or the like). In addition, only one of the first effect hold display unit and the second effect hold display unit (for example, only the effect hold display unit corresponding to the main special symbol) may be displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a center decoration body 10 is provided in the vicinity of the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which a game ball can roll is provided below the center decorative body 10. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decorative body 10. The warp unit 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet. The warp flowing down the game area 3 is received from the warp inlet, and the game ball is discharged from the warp outlet and guided to the stage unit 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage unit 11 can enter the first start port 20 described later with a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage unit 11. Further, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, there is an electric decoration member (board surface lamp 5) such as an LED, which can be turned on according to the gaming state, and a decoration member 13 that is shaped like a character or a figure is arranged. Yes.

  In addition, a movable decorative member 14 that is operable in accordance with a game effect is provided at the upper part of the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. For example, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward (predetermined with the execution of a game effect having a relatively high possibility of winning). The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. As a result, the player enhances the gaming interest and increases the expectation of winning.

  Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first start port 20 that does not change the ease of entering a game ball is provided. A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20, and if a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, whether or not the first special symbol is determined ( First special symbol success / failure determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the determination of success / failure after a predetermined time.

  Above the right area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3, a gate 28 (a normal start opening, a passing opening, an entrance, a specific start, etc.) through which a game ball can pass (can enter) (Also called mouth). A game ball entering from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down in the game area 3 in the downstream direction. The gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also referred to as a combination gate or an operation gate) for starting a big hit game. That is, this gate is the gate 28 and the start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes) the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28 a, a normal symbol success / failure random number or the like is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (fluctuation condition) is established, The symbol symbol determination (also referred to as “second symbol determination”) is executed, the normal symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol symbol determination after a predetermined time. When the winning ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 is operated (opening operation), and the second starting port 21 is opened. In addition, a control unit (main control unit 80) that performs normal symbol determination as to whether or not the movable member 23 is operated (opening operation) to open the second start port 21 is referred to as “correction determination execution unit” or “ It is also referred to as “second success / failure determination execution means”. The gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game. In other words, the sensors that detect the entry into the gate are the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, when the gate 28 (start gate 29) is passed, the function as the start gate 29 is exhibited when the conditions for executing the big hit game are satisfied (the big hit execution) Only possible state or jackpot standby state). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) when the condition (waiting state for big hit) is not satisfied, the control process for the normal symbol is performed, and the big hit start process is not executed. If the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is satisfied (in the big hit waiting state), the waiting big hit game is started and a predetermined big prize opening ( A round game in which the first grand prize opening 30) is in an open state (a state in which a player can enter a ball) starts.

  The game area 3 is a right area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 and a game area below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29) is provided with a first big prize opening 30. A big winning device 31 (also referred to as “first variable entrance”) is provided. The first grand prize winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32 and opens / closes the first grand prize winning opening 30 by the operation of the opening / closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 is a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular shape (long plate shape) on the top surface. When the opening / closing member 32 is closed, the entrance of the first big prize opening 30 is closed and the game ball is placed on the top surface of the opening / closing member 32. It is possible to pass. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the left side to the right side in the drawing). Thereby, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the first grand prize opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 without entering the first big prize opening 30. And then flow downward in the gaming area.

  Further, the opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first big prize opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 32 is retracted toward the back surface of the game board 3 to thereby form an upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 forming the game ball passage. Disappears. Thereby, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the first grand prize opening 30 enters the first big prize opening 30. As described above, the opening / closing member 32 that opens and closes the entrance of the first big prize opening 30 is a retractable opening / closing member, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game balls that have flowed down are smoothly drawn into the first large opening / closing member. While entering the winning opening 30, the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) can be guided in an arbitrary direction (second starting port 21 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. Note that the first grand prize opening 30 can enter a game ball only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. In other words, the first grand prize winning device 31 (first variable entrance) is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 32 so that the game ball cannot enter (closed state) and the game ball can enter. It is possible to change to a ball ready state (open state).

  In the game area 3, the right area (right game area 3 </ b> B) of the center ornament 10, and the game area below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30 does not change the ease of entering a game ball. A second fixed winning device 25 having a variable third start port 26 is provided. A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on the game ball entering the third start port 26, and if a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, whether or not the second special symbol is determined ( When the second special symbol is determined), the second special symbol is started to be displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the determination as to whether or not the predetermined special time has elapsed. The game ball passage is branched below (downstream) from the first grand prize winning opening 30 (upper and lower stages), the upper game ball passage where the third start opening 26 is provided, the second start opening 31 and the second start opening 31 A lower-stage game ball passage in which two major winning openings 35 are provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third start port 26 by contacting the game nail 16 provided in the vicinity of the third start port 26, for example. Alternatively, it flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. In addition, since the third starting opening 26 is a fixed winning device that can always enter the ball, the left hit game is a big hit (so-called first hit), and the first big hit game is executed by the right hit game. During the jackpot game, it is possible to place the game ball into the third start port 26 (hold) and execute the variation display of the second special symbol immediately after the jackpot game ends.

  In the game area 3, the right area (right game area 3 </ b> B) of the center decorative body 10, and the game area below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30, a variable in which the ease of entering a game ball changes. A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as “variable starter” or “variable starter”) having a second starter 21 of the type is provided. A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21. If a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, whether or not the second special symbol is determined (first 2 special symbol success / failure determination) is executed, the second special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the success / failure determination after a predetermined time.

  The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as “opening / closing member”), and opens and closes the second start port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second start port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first mode. is there. In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows the game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and prevents the game ball from entering when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. Yes. The second starting port 21 is completely open when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the open state. It may not be impossible to enter the ball.

  Similarly to the opening / closing member 32, the movable member 23 is a gaming ball passage whose upper surface is substantially rectangular (long plate shape). In the closed state, the movable member 23 closes the inlet of the second starting port 21 and A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. As shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the right side to the left side in the drawing). Thereby, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the inlet portion of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21, It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

  In addition, the movable member 23 is driven by a second start port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 is retracted in the back direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance of the second start port 21. Thereby, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the inlet portion of the second start port 21 enters the second start port 21. Thus, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening and closing member similar to the opening and closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down in the open state (when opened) The ball smoothly enters the second starting port 21 and flows down in the closed state (when closed) to allow the game ball to flow in an arbitrary direction (a second large winning port 35 to be described later) by an inclined upper surface passage. To guide.

  Further, in the game area 3, which is the right area (right game area 3 </ b> B) of the center decorative body 10, the game area below (downstream) the second start port 21 is provided with a second big prize opening 35. A big winning device 36 (also referred to as “second variable entrance”) is provided. The second grand prize winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member 37, and opens / closes the second big prize winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. Like the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 is a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular shape (long plate shape) on its upper surface. In the closed state, the opening / closing member 37 closes the entrance of the second grand prize winning opening 35 and opens / closes the opening / closing member 37. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. As shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 is formed to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the right side to the left side of the drawing). Thereby, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second grand prize opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 without entering the second big prize opening 35. And then flow downward in the gaming area.

  Further, the opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second big prize opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 37 is retracted in the back direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The open / close member 37 that has been removed disappears from the entrance of the second big prize opening 35. Thereby, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second grand prize opening 35 enters the second big prize opening 35. In this way, the opening / closing member 37 that opens and closes the entrance of the second grand prize winning opening 35 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down in the open state (when opened). Is smoothly entered into the second grand prize winning opening 35, and in the closed state (when closed), the game ball that has flowed down is guided in an arbitrary direction (out opening 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. Note that the second big winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. In other words, the second big prize winning device 36 (second variable entrance) is configured to open and close the open / close member 37 so that the game ball cannot enter and the game ball cannot enter. It is possible to change to a ball ready state (open state).

  Further, in the game area below the left area (left game area 3A) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3, a plurality (three) of general entrances 27 are provided. In this way, the game area 3 in which various entrances are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side from the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. , Can be divided into The hitting method in which the game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is referred to as left strike, and the strike method in which the game ball is fired in the right game area 3B so as to flow down is referred to as right strike. . In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) at the start of the game is aimed at entering the first starting port 20 by left-handed. In other words, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game mainly composed of a left-handed ball entering the first starting port 20 (first special symbol success / failure determination).

  On the other hand, if a win / loss determination (first special symbol success / failure determination) based on a ball entering the first starting port 20 is a big hit, after the big hit game and after the big hit game (special game) are finished (a low probability high base state or a high probability) In the low base state, the game is aimed at entering the gate 28, the first grand prize opening 30, the second start opening 21, or the second big prize opening 35 by right-handed. That is, the big hit game and the low-accuracy high base state (state B) or the high-probability low base state (state C) mainly enter the second starting port 21 (right special symbol determination). It becomes a right-handed game. When a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, the first major winning port 30, the second major winning port 35, and the general winning port 27, the respective starting ports A predetermined number of game balls (also called “prize balls” or “game profit”) are paid out (given). In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out (the amount of game profit) based on the entrance to the first big prize opening 30 is the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entrance to the second big prize opening 35. Set more than the number (amount of gaming profit). Specifically, the first grand prize opening 30 pays out 15 prize balls for one entry, and the second big prize opening 35 has 10 pieces for one entry. The prize ball is to be paid out.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is disposed at the lower right portion of the game board 2. The main display 40 has a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) that displays the first special symbol in a variable manner and stops, and a second special symbol display that displays the second special symbol in a variable manner and stopped. 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display unit 42 (normal symbol display unit) that displays the normal symbol (also referred to as “specific identification information”) in a variable manner and stops display. In addition, the main indicator 40 includes a first special figure hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored decision determination information (first special figure hold) related to the first special symbol, and the determination information (second display) related to the second special symbol. 2nd special figure hold display 43b for displaying the number of stored 2 special figure hold), and a general figure hold display 44 for displaying the number of stored operation (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42 is included. ing.

  The main display 40 also includes a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination or the second special symbol success / failure determination is successful, the first special symbol success / failure determination or the second special symbol success / failure determination. When the result is a win, the round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, the gaming state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and the shooting direction of the game ball, that is, right-handed A firing direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether it should be left-handed or left-handed. Various displays included in the main display 40 are display-controlled by a main controller described later.

  The variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the game ball entering the first start port 20. The change display of the second special symbol is performed based on the game ball entering the second start port 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. In addition, the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure hold display unit 43.

  In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time, and then is stopped and displayed, and the first starting port 20 or the second starting port is displayed depending on the special symbol (stop symbol) that has been stopped (derived). The result of the success / failure determination (special symbol success / failure determination, jackpot lottery) based on the entry to 21 is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols based on the special symbol success / failure determination. When the stop symbol is a predetermined special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), the release pattern corresponding to the type of the specific special symbol that is stopped is displayed. A special game (a big hit game, a small hit game) for opening the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35 is performed. In addition, the opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41 a is configured by eight LEDs indicated by “i to p”, and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is displayed. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is the first big hit (4R first big hit), the three LEDs “ijn” are turned on and the rest are turned off. When the second big hit (4R second big hit) is reached, the four LEDs “jnkl” are turned on and the rest are turned off. In addition, in the case of detachment, the two “lo” LEDs can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. The second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by “a to h”, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination. About the stop display mode, similarly to the first special symbol display device 41b, different display modes are set according to the result (big hit, small hit, miss) of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. In addition, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before derivation display), the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. The variation display mode is, for example, in a predetermined order from left to right. It can be set as the aspect which each LED lights so that light may flow repeatedly.

  Here, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a hit (big hit or small hit) among the stop display modes (display result of the variable display) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is referred to as a “hit mode”. ”,“ Specific mode ”,“ specific display mode ”or“ specific display result ”, and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is out of place is“ out of mode ”or“ unspecific mode ” , Also referred to as “non-specific display mode” or “non-specific display result”. In addition, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit is also referred to as “big hit mode”, and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a small hit is “small”. It is also referred to as a “winning mode”. Furthermore, it refers to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display unit), and the special symbol display unit 41. Also referred to as “variation display means” or “identification information display means”.

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various information (“acquired information”) such as a special symbol success / failure determination random number or the like based on the received ball. The acquired various types of information are temporarily stored in the special figure storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Specifically, if it is information acquired based on the entrance to the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure storage unit 85a as the first special figure reservation (also referred to as "first acquisition information"), If it is the information acquired based on the entrance to the 2nd starting port 21, it will be memorize | stored in the 2nd special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part 85b as 2nd special figure reservation (it is also called "2nd acquisition information"). An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The first special figure storage unit 85a and the second special figure storage unit 85b are also referred to as “first acquisition information storage unit” and “second acquisition information storage unit”, respectively, and are also referred to as “acquisition information storage unit”. .

  The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when it is possible to display a special symbol based on the special figure hold. The digestion of the special symbol hold means that the special symbol determination random number or the like corresponding to the special symbol hold is determined, and the special symbol variable display for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the special symbol variation display based on the game ball entering the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be executed immediately at the time of entering, During the execution of the symbol change display or during the execution of special games based on any special symbol success / failure determination, the predetermined number (4 each) is set as the upper limit, and the right of special symbol success / failure determination for the entry is reserved (reserved) ) Can be.

  The number of special figure hold is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two “uv” LEDs, and the first special figure is controlled by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure hold. The number of holds is displayed. For example, when the number of holds is 0, “u □ v □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit) is set so that both LEDs are turned off, and the number of held is 1 In this case, a display mode in which the u LED is turned off and the v LED is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”, can be used. Further, when the number of holdings is 2, a display mode in which the u LED is lit in red and the v LED is turned off, such as “u ● v □”. In addition, when the number of holds is 3, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which both LEDs are lit in red, such as “u ● v ●”. Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be lit in green as “u ▲ v ▲” to make a display mode. The second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs “wx”, and the second special figure hold is controlled by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figure hold. The number is displayed. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is to turn off both LEDs such as “w □ x □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit). 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special figure holding display 43a.

  The normal symbol variation display is performed based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time, and then the stop symbol is displayed. The result of the normal symbol success / failure determination based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 is displayed based on the stopped normal symbol (stop symbol). Inform. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols based on the normal symbol determination. If the stopped normal symbol is a predetermined specific symbol (a normal symbol), an auxiliary game (“specific game”) that opens the second start port 21 in an open pattern according to the current gaming state. Also called). Further, the means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). The opening pattern of the second start port 21 will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two “st” LEDs, and displays a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination according to the lighting mode. It is. For example, if the determination result is a win, the normal symbol that is turned on when both LEDs are lit is stopped and displayed, such as “s t” (for example, ■: lighted, □: lighted off). In addition, when the determination result is out of place, an out-of-order normal symbol in a state where only the LED of t is lit, such as “s □ t ■”, is displayed. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed over a predetermined variation time. The variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off.

  When there is a game ball passing to the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as “acquisition information”) such as a random number for normal symbol determination based on the passage, and the acquired various information Is temporarily stored as a general map hold in a general map hold storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set for the number of pending map holds that can be stored in the pending map storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The general map reservation stored in the general map storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the general map storage becomes possible. The digestion of the general symbol hold means that the normal symbol validity determination random number corresponding to the general symbol hold is determined, and the normal symbol variation display for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal symbol variation display based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the passage, that is, during the normal symbol variation display or during the execution of the auxiliary game Can reserve (hold) the right to determine whether or not to accept a normal symbol for the passage of a predetermined number as an upper limit.

  The number of the general map hold is displayed on the general map hold display 44. Specifically, the universal map hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of “qr”, and displays the number of universal map holds by turning on the LED according to the number of general map holds. For example, when the number of hold is 0, “q □ r □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit), both LEDs are turned off, and the number of held is 1 In this case, a display mode can be adopted in which the q LED is turned off and the r LED is lit in red, such as “q □ r ●”. Also, the number of holds 2 to 4 is determined in the same manner as the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

  Next, based on FIG.2 and FIG.5, the electrical structure in this pachinko game machine 1 is demonstrated. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a main control board 80 ("main control unit" and "main control unit") that performs control related to gaming profits such as special symbol success / failure determination, normal symbol success / failure determination, and game state transition. (Also referred to as “game control unit”), sub-control board 90 (also referred to as “sub-control unit”, “sub-control unit”, or “effect control unit”) for performing control related to effects executed as the game progresses, game balls A payout control board 110 (also referred to as a “payout control unit”) for performing control related to payout, an effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, a symbol displayed on the effect indicator 102, a third effect hold indicator 103a, And an image control board 100 (image control unit) that performs display control of the fourth effect hold display 103b and the like. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case storing a main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear side (back side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case, An image control board storage case storing the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided, and a sub control board storage case storing the sub control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. Is provided. Further, a payout control board case for storing the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for storing the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

  A game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from other boards via an input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. The ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure storage unit 85 (the first special figure storage unit 85a and the second special figure storage unit 85b) and the general figure storage unit 86. .

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a), a first big prize port sensor 30a, a second big prize port sensor 35a, and A general entrance sensor 27a is connected. These various sensors are also referred to as “detecting means”.

  The first start port sensor 20 a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21 a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first grand prize opening sensor 30 a is provided in the first big prize opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first big prize opening 30. The second big prize opening sensor 35a is provided in the second big prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 35. The general entrance sensor 27 a is provided in each of the general entrances 27 to detect a game ball that has entered the general entrance 27.

  Further, as the solenoids, the second start opening solenoid 24, the first big prize winning solenoid 33, and the second big prize winning solenoid 38 are connected. The second start port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first big prize winning device 31. The second big prize winning solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36. Further, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special diagram hold indicator 43a, a second special figure hold indicator 43b, A figure hold display 44, a round display 45, a game state display 46, a firing direction display 47, and a hit display 48 are connected. That is, display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected to a payout device 120 for paying out a prize ball or a rental ball and a card unit 135, and the launching device 112 via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). Is connected. The firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually the left side of FIG. 1), and the inserted prepaid card (game) when the player performs a predetermined ball lending operation. It is possible to lend a ball based on information stored in a value storage medium).

  The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) that controls the payout of the game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. Drives to pay out prize balls and pays out balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the launch device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the launch handle 60, and the launch volume 115 is the launch handle 60. Detect the amount of rotation. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

  Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 (“effect control microcomputer”) for controlling the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub-control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling a game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. Yes. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The ROM may be externally attached.

  The sub control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Based on the command received from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 is connected to the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100. Display of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, the third image display device 72, the effect display device 102, the third effect hold display device 103a, and the fourth effect hold display device 103b. Let control take place. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. In the ROM of the image control board 100, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including production symbols, hold symbols, etc.) Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads the image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

  The production indicator 102 is made up of two LEDs, one of which displays the change display and the stop display in accordance with the change display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED displays the change display of the second special symbol. In addition, the display mode shows the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (result of the special symbol success / failure determination) by lighting / extinguishing the corresponding LED or the color according to the stop display. Press to stop display. Similarly, the third effect hold indicator 103a and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b are each composed of two LEDs. Then, by turning on and off the two LEDs, or a combination of colors, the third effect on-hold display 103a is displayed on the hold number displayed on the first effect on-hold display area 9c and the first special figure hold display 43a. Display control is performed in a display mode that indicates the same number of holds as the number of holds. The fourth effect hold indicator 103b is display-controlled in a display mode that indicates the hold number displayed in the second effect hold display region 9d and the hold number displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b. The

  The character symbol is displayed on a part or substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect symbol display portion), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated in front of the display screen 7a (effect symbol display portion) to display the display screen 7a (effect symbol display). A part or almost all of the part) may be in a state where a part or all of the effect design 8, the first effect hold display unit 9c, or the second effect hold display unit 9d cannot be visually recognized. is there. Even in such a covering state, these effect indicators 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, and so on are supplementarily so that it is possible to reliably confirm the change display and stop display of the effect symbols, the number of holds, etc. And the 4th production reservation display 103b is provided. It should be noted that the display forms of the effect display device 102, the third effect hold display device 103a, and the fourth effect hold display device 103b are in a state that can be always viewed without being obstructed by the operation of the movable decorative member 14 or the like. It has become. Further, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. In addition, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute sound control. Further, in this case, acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91, based on the command received from the main control board 80, emits light pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinction, light emission color, etc.) for determining the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. , Lamp data) is determined from data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Note that the movable decorative member 14 is only partially visible in FIG. 1, but is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “driving data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and determines The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the operation pattern data. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data relating to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

  Further, the sub control board 90 has a first effect button detection switch 63c and a first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.). 2 effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

  Next, a description will be given of the control related to the special symbol success / failure determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment. As a result of the special symbol success / failure determination, it has “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out”. In the case of “hit”, the “hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. When “small hit” is selected, the “small hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. In addition, in the case of “out”, the “out of symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. When it is determined that the game is a big win or a small win, a “special game” is executed to open the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35 with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed. . A special game executed as a big hit is called a “big hit game”, and a special game executed as a small hit is called a “small hit game”.

  There are a plurality of types of hits, and the hit type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed according to the result (specific result) of the special symbol success / failure determination. That is, depending on whether the result of the special symbol success / failure determination result is the first specific result, the second specific result, the third specific result, or another specific result, etc. , Including small hits). In addition, the special game executed may differ depending on the hit type, and the amount of game profits that can be acquired by the special game differs, or the game state after the special game ends. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are “4R (round) first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, “15R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit”, “2R first big hit” "5 big hits", "2R 6 big hits", "2R 7 big hits", and "2R 8 big hits". In “15R third big hit”, the number of times of opening (number of rounds) of the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is 15 times. In addition, in “4R first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, and “4R fourth big hit”, the number of times of opening (number of rounds) of the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is four. “2R 5 big hits”, “2R 6 big hits”, “2R 7 big hits”, and “2R 8 big hits” are the number of open (number of rounds) of the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) 2 times. Thus, in the big hit, all the first big prize opening 30 is opened, and the second big prize opening 35 is not opened. Accordingly, the first big winning opening 30 is also referred to as “big winning big winning opening (big winning variable winning opening)”.

  In addition, “4R first big hit”, “15R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit”, “2R fifth big hit”, and “2R sixth big hit” are the game states after the end of the big hit game. Transition to a high probability state (activate the probability variation function). Therefore, these five types of big hits are also called “probable big hits (high probability big hits)”. This high probability state (probability changing function) continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, “4R second big hit”, “2R seventh big hit”, and “2R eighth big hit” shift the gaming state after the big hit game to the low probability state described later (the probability changing function is not activated). . Therefore, these three types of big hits are also referred to as “low probability big hits (low probability big hits, normal big hits)”.

  In addition, “4R first big hit”, “15R third big hit” and “4R fourth big hit” are set to “second special symbol short time” after the big hit game is finished, and the variation time of the second special symbol is set to a short time. "Function" is activated and the high base generation function is not activated. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a highly accurate low base state (state C). This highly accurate low base state continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, the gameability in the high probability low base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but as described above, the right special game is performed in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged. This is a period in which a symbol hit / decision is made to generate a small hit, and the number of game balls can be increased during the period between the previous big hit and the next big hit (the big hit). In addition, by frequently hitting the small hits in the high probability low base state between the big hits, it can be expected that a lot of game balls will be acquired in a short time by the small hits. In other words, it is a period that is advantageous for the player and is a period in which the gaming interest can be enhanced.

  In addition, “4R second big hit”, “2R seventh big hit”, and “2R eighth big hit” activate the “second special symbol time reduction function” and the “high base generation function” after the big hit game ends. Thereby, the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a low-accuracy base state. In the case of “4R 2nd big hit” and “2R 8th big hit”, the low-accuracy base state ends when the next big hit occurs or when the special symbol variation display is executed 100 times. . When the special symbol variation display is terminated 100 times, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). In the case of “2R seventh big hit”, the low-accuracy base state ends when the next big hit occurs or when the special symbol variation display is executed 50 times. When the special symbol variation display is completed 50 times, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the low-accuracy base state, the right-hand game is performed in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged as described above, thereby determining whether the second special symbol is successful or not. This is a period in which a game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of a big hit.

  In addition, “2R 5 big hits” and “2R 6 big hits” activate the “second special symbol time reduction function” and the “high base generation function” after the big hit game ends. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a highly accurate and high base state. In the case of “2R 5 big hits”, the “second special symbol short-time function” continues until the next big hit occurs, and the “high base generation function” indicates whether the next big hit will occur or the special symbol changes The display is terminated when the display is executed 50 times. Further, as described above, the “probability changing function” continues until the next big hit occurs. That is, in the case of “2R 5th big hit”, after the big hit game, until the special symbol fluctuation display has passed 50 times, it will be in a highly accurate base state. The gaming state is set to the high probability low base state.

  In the high-accuracy base state, as in the low-accuracy base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, the second special symbol success / failure determination is performed, and the game is expected in the next big hit. As described above, the high probability low base state is a period that is advantageous for a player who can expect to acquire many game balls in a short time by making a small hit by right hitting game as described above. is there. It should be noted that there are more game balls that can be acquired in the highly accurate and low base state than game balls that can be acquired in the highly accurate and high base state. Therefore, when the big hit does not occur until the number of times of the special symbol variation display after the big hit game is over 50 times, the gaming state changes to a more advantageous gaming state (specific gaming state) than before.

  In addition, “2R 6 big hit” is set to a highly accurate base state until the special symbol change display has passed 100 times after the big hit game ends, and if the big hit does not occur after 100 times, It is the same as “2R 5th big hit” except that the gaming state is set to the high probability low base state, that is, the period during which the gaming state changes is different. In addition, “2R fifth big hit” is set earlier than “2R sixth big hit” when the gaming state changes from the high probability high base state to the high probability low base state. Therefore, it can be said that “2R fifth big hit” is a big hit that is more advantageous to the player than “2R sixth big hit”.

  Also, a high-accuracy base state after the end of the big hit game (2R fifth big hit game) related to "2R fifth big hit game" and the low level after the big hit game (2R seventh big hit game) related to "2R seventh big hit game" By executing a common game effect (first game effect: background, game mode, character design, reach effect, etc.) in the certain base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, the variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both gaming states are set to the non-notifying state in which the gaming state (highly accurate and high base state or low probability and high base state) is not notified (is difficult to recognize).

  If the type of jackpot is “2R 5th jackpot”, after the special symbol change display has passed 50 times, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player), and “2R In the case of “7th big hit”, the game state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state unfavorable to the player) after 50 special symbol changes are displayed, so the player is not notified. Regardless of the gaming state, the game is played with the expectation that it will shift to the highly accurate and low base state, and the gaming interest will be enhanced.

  In addition, a highly accurate base state after the big hit game (2R sixth big hit game) related to “2R sixth big hit game” and a low level after the big hit game (2R eighth big hit game) related to “2R eighth big hit game” are reached. By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character design, reach effect, etc.) in the certain base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, the variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both gaming states are set to the non-notifying state in which the gaming state (highly accurate and high base state or low probability and high base state) is not notified (is difficult to recognize).

  If the type of jackpot is “2R sixth jackpot”, after the special symbol change display has passed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player), and “2R In the case of the “8th big hit”, the game state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state unfavorable to the player) after the special symbol variation display has passed 100 times. Regardless of the gaming state, the game is played with the expectation of shifting to the high-accuracy and low-base state, and the gaming interest is enhanced.

  Also, a high-accuracy base state after the end of the big hit game (2R fifth big hit game) related to "2R fifth big hit game" and the low level after the big hit game (2R seventh big hit game) related to "2R seventh big hit game" Highly accurate base state, high-accuracy base state after the end of the big hit game (2R sixth big hit game) related to “2R sixth big hit game”, and big hit game related to “2R eighth big hit game” (2R eighth big hit game) The player can recognize the game state by executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the low-accuracy base state after the end. Make it difficult. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, the variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. Thereby, these gaming states are set to a non-notifying state in which the gaming state (highly accurate high base state or low probability high base state) is not notified (recognition is difficult).

  If the type of jackpot is “2R 5th jackpot”, after the special symbol change display has passed 50 times, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player), and “2R In the case of “seventh big hit”, the game state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state unfavorable to the player) after the special symbol variation display has passed 50 times. In addition, when the type of jackpot is “2R sixth jackpot”, after the special symbol variation display has passed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a high probability low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player), In the case of “2R 8th big hit”, the game state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state unfavorable for the player) after the special symbol variation display has passed 100 times. For this reason, in the non-notification state, the player expects to shift to the high-accuracy low-base state when the special symbol variation display has elapsed 50 times, regardless of the gaming state. , Will enhance the entertainment interest.

  In addition, even in the case of not shifting to the high-accuracy low base state, the game expects that at least the high base state will continue (that is, the non-notification state will continue) without shifting to the low-accuracy low base state. I do. If the non-notification state continues after 50 special symbol variations have been displayed, it is expected that a big hit will occur, and when the special symbol variation display has passed 100 times, it shifts to a high-accuracy low-base state. Playing games with the expectation that they will do it will increase the fun of gaming. As described above, in the non-notification state, a point for increasing the player's expectation is set a plurality of times, so that it is possible to further increase the gaming interest and maintain a high gaming interest for a long period of time.

  In addition, as for the small hits that may occur as a result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination, the number of times of opening the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is six times, and once (and The total (open) time is also set short. Specifically, a total of 1.8 seconds is released with 6 times of 0.3 seconds. Therefore, the number of game balls that can be acquired in one small hit game is set in comparison with the big hit game (for example, 15R third big hit game, 4R fourth big hit game, etc.). However, by generating the small hits a plurality of times (many times), it is possible to execute a plurality of small hit games and acquire more game balls. Further, in the small hit, all the second big prize opening 35 is opened, and the first big prize opening 30 is not opened. For this reason, the second big winning opening 35 is also referred to as “small winning big winning opening (variable winning opening for small winning)”. Note that, in the small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of times of opening the big winning opening is not called the number of rounds but simply called the number of times of opening. Also, the probability variation function does not operate based on the occurrence of small hits, and if the gaming state at the time of small hit occurrence is a high probability state, it will be in a high probability state after the small hit game ends, and when a small hit occurs If the game state is a low probability state, the low probability state is set even after the small hit game is over. Similarly, the time reduction function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not operated based on the occurrence of the small hit.

  Note that the distribution probability to each big hit in the first special symbol (special drawing 1) determination is 65% for the 4R first big hit and 35% for the 4R second big hit. On the other hand, the big hit in the determination of success / failure of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is 50% for 15R third big hit, 5% for 4R fourth big hit, 5% for 2R fifth big hit, and 2R sixth big hit. 5%, 2R seventh big hit is 25%, 2R eighth big hit is 10%. In other words, if a hit / fail judgment (second special symbol success / failure determination) based on entering the second starting port 21 whose fluctuation frequency has been improved by the operation of the second special symbol short-time function described later, It becomes a big hit (15R third big hit), and it becomes possible to acquire a large amount of game balls in a short time. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game at the second start port 21 is more than a big hit in the determination of whether or not the game ball is inserted into the first start port 20 (first special symbol determination). It is set so that it is more advantageous for the player (a large amount of game balls can be obtained) to be more advantageous for the player in the determination of success / failure (second special symbol success / failure determination) performed by entering the ball. Yes. In addition, the player plays a game in anticipation of the occurrence of a highly accurate and low base state in which a game ball can be increased by a small hit along with the occurrence of the 15R third big hit.

  Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or missed is determined based on a “special symbol success / failure determination random number (also referred to as“ correction determination information ”)”. The determination of the type of jackpot is based on “a random number for determining the jackpot type (also referred to as“ design determining random number ”or“ symbol determining information ”). As shown in FIG. 7A, the special symbol success / failure random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The jackpot type determination random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random number (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 includes “variation pattern” in addition to the special symbol success / failure determination random number and the jackpot type determining random number. Random number (also referred to as “variation pattern information”). The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) including the variation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. In addition, the random numbers acquired based on the passage through the gate 28 include the normal symbol success / failure determination random numbers shown in FIG. The normal symbol success / failure determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second start port 21 (normal symbol success / failure determination). Normal design random numbers take values in the range of 0-240.

  Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 1, the probability variation function (probability variation function) for the special symbol and the normal symbol, the variation time shortening function for the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and the opening extension function of the second starting port are activated or deactivated. There are a plurality of gaming states depending on the combination of states. A state in which the probability variation function is activated for the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a “high probability state”, and a state in which the probability variation function is not activated is referred to as a “low probability state”. In the high probability state (hit probability: 1/315), the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the special symbol success / failure determination is higher than in the low probability state (hit probability: 1/63). In other words, in the low-probability state, the jackpot determination table for the low-probability state is used to determine whether or not it is hit. A determination is made using the table (see FIG. 8A). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the special symbol variation display result is a big hit (the stop symbol becomes a big hit symbol) is higher than when the special symbol probability variation function is not activated. The means (main control unit) for setting a high probability or a low probability as the probability of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct (big hit probability) is referred to as “probability setting means”.

  In addition, a state in which the variable time reduction function is activated for the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a “time-short state”, and a state in which the function is not activated is referred to as a “non-time-short state”. In the short time state, the average value of the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variation display to the time of the fixed display) is shorter than the average value of the variation time of the special symbol in the non-short time state. That is, in the short-time state, the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more than in the non-time-short state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the short-time state, the digestion of the special figure hold is accelerated, and effective entry into the starting port (entrance that can be stored as special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with smooth progress of the game.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, since the length of the variation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantage / disadvantage of the player, it is set as “second special symbol time shortening function” as shown in FIG. Yes. When the second special symbol time shortening function is not activated, that is, in the state A shown in FIG. 9, if the player plays a right-handed game and enters the game ball into the second starting port 21, the second special symbol The symbol special determination is executed, and the second special symbol is variably displayed. However, since the variation time of the second special symbol in the state A is set to a very long time (outage 10 minutes, big hit 3 minutes, small hit 2 minutes), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such state) (Also referred to as “first condition state”). Therefore, even if a right-handed game is performed in state A, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large amount of game balls. Therefore, in the state A, the game is progressed in the left-handed game aiming at the first starting port 20 in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display simultaneously (in parallel). Even if the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in the state A, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variable special symbol display to end. The first special symbol can be variably displayed.

  When the second special symbol time reduction function is operating, that is, in the state B or the state C shown in FIG. 9 (this state is also referred to as “second condition state”), as shown in FIG. 2 Since the variation time of the special symbol is short, the player can play the right-handed game without reducing the ball as compared to the left-handed game (in the state B, it is maintained or slightly reduced, the state C It is possible to smoothly execute a game (second special symbol success / failure determination, variable game of the second special symbol). In the present embodiment, the first special symbol time reduction function is also activated during the period in which the second special symbol time reduction function is activated, but the first special symbol time reduction function may not be activated.

  The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function (second special symbol time-shortening function) for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) operate simultaneously. The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the normal symbol are operated in synchronization with the high base generation function. In other words, the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of normal symbols operate in a high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) and low base state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy Does not operate in the low base state. Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol success / failure determination is higher than that in the low base state (also referred to as a “normal high probability state”). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (per hit random number) determined to be a hit is larger for the state B than the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A and C). The normal symbol hit / fail determination (ordinary symbol determination) is performed using the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 8C). In other words, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the normal symbol becomes a hit (the stop symbol becomes a normal symbol) becomes higher than when the normal symbol display 42 is not activated. .

  In the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than that in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but is 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8E). Furthermore, in the high base state, the opening time of the second start port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than that in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is activated. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination becomes a hit in the low base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds) to release The second start port is in an open state during the period of operation. In addition, when the result of the normal symbol win / reject determination becomes a win in the high base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). . Further, the closing time between the opening operations in the low base state is 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of opening operations of the opening and closing member 37 is different between the low base state and the high base state, but the opening operation number may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be opened once for 2.7 seconds, or the opening operation in the high base state may be opened three times for 2.0 seconds. Alternatively, the opening operation in the high base state may be opened six times in 1.0 second, and may be more than the number of opening times in the low base state. In such a case, it is also said that the function of increasing the number of opening times of the variable winning device 22 is activated.

  In the high base state, the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the open time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated in the high base state, compared with the low base state in which these functions are not activated. The period during which the second start port 21 is open becomes longer (the open time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second start port 21 is increased (also referred to as “high frequency state”). ). As a result, the execution frequency of the second special symbol success / failure determination increases. As described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the hand-held game balls.

  In addition, if the opening time is the same, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball passes through the second starting port 21 when the number of times of opening is small. In the present embodiment, the opening mode of the second start port 21 in the high base state is set to open once for 6.0 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Since the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol variation, the normal symbol variation time starts when the game ball starts to flow down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state. The time is set to such an extent that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 opens before passing through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is opened while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the opened state. In addition, in order to prevent a game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23, a material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is used as a game on the front side thereof. The material has a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the material is different). Thereby, the game ball flow speed on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to a speed slower than the game rapid flow or the speed of the game ball passage on the front side. In addition, as an aspect for reducing the flow-down speed, in addition, an inclination angle may be loosened, or an inhibiting member (protrusion or the like) for reducing the flow-down speed may be provided. In addition, thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 in the high base state does not enter the second starting port 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning port. The possibility of flowing down to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if the second big prize opening 35 is opened (a state in which a ball can be entered) due to a small hit, the game ball that has flowed down enters the second start port 21 and the second It is difficult to enter the big prize opening 35.

  In the high base state, not all the functions described above may operate. That is, the second start port is activated by the operation of at least one of the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 than when the function is not activated. It is only necessary that 21 is easily opened (the frequency of entering the ball is high). Further, the high base state may be independently controlled without accompanying the time-short state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state is referred to as a “high base generation function”.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, since it is more advantageous for the player to determine whether or not the second special symbol is correct than to determine whether or not the first special symbol is correct, the player uses the first special symbol. There is a possibility that the second special symbol may be variably displayed without being variably displayed. That is, even in the normal state (low probability low base state), there is a possibility of trying to play a right-handed game. However, as described above, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the variation time (average variation time) of the second special symbol is extremely long compared to the variation time (average variation time) of the first special symbol. Therefore, even if the second special symbol is variably displayed in the normal state, it cannot be variably displayed many times, and the gaming efficiency is very poor. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to display the first special symbol variably by left-handed game than to variably display the second special symbol by right-handed game. Here, “the state in which the first special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)” means that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of holds of the first special symbol is “0”. ". In addition, “the state in which the second special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)” means that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of holds of the second special symbol is “0”. It means that.

  Also, in the high base state such as the high accuracy high base state and the low accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy low base state, the second special symbol time-shortening function shortens the variation time of the second special symbol, and the right-handed game The gaming efficiency is improved. In such a case, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by performing the right-handed game and performing the second special symbol determination that is advantageous to the player. Further, in the high base state, the second start port 21 is easily opened compared to the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second start port 21 than to enter the first start port 20. Because it is. For this reason, a right-hand strike is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21 while allowing the game ball to pass through the gate 28 which is a trigger for determining whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate.

  In addition, in the high probability low base state, the frequency of entering the second start port 21 is the same as that in the low probability low base state (normal state), but is executed based on the ball entering the second start port 21. Since the variation time of the second special symbol is changed in a short time, a right-handed game in which the second special symbol success / failure determination which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol success / failure determination can be performed is performed. In addition, in the highly accurate and low base state, since the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the open time extending function of the variable winning device 22 are not activated, the entry to the second start port 21 is not performed. The sphere frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, a prize ball based on a ball entering the second start port 21 cannot be obtained as much as a high base state. However, instead of the second special symbol success / failure determination, the small hits with a high probability (small hit probability: 300/630) prevent the game balls from being reduced during the big hits, but rather make frequent hits. It is also possible to increase the holding ball by (multiple occurrences).

  In other words, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), the right-handed game frequently causes the ball to enter the second start port 21 without greatly reducing the holding ball. 2 Aim at the next big hit by special symbol determination. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the entrance to the second start opening 21 is set to one, and even if all the right-handed game balls enter the second start opening 21, The sphere does not increase (is maintained). Further, in this embodiment, about 90 to 95% of the right-handed game balls are set to enter the second start opening 21, so that the high base is set unless another entry is made. If the state is continued for a long period of time, the specification is such that the ball is reduced slightly.

  On the other hand, in the high probability low base state, a right-handed game causes a small hit to occur frequently by a second special symbol success / failure determination based on a ball entering the second starting port 21, and the pitch of the holding ball in the small hit game is increased. While aiming for an increase, the next big hit is aimed at by the second special symbol success / failure determination. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, in the highly accurate and low base state, the longer the period during which the next big hit does not occur (the longer the period of the high probability and low base state continues), the more small hits occur. There will be more opportunities (to play a small hit game), which will be advantageous to the player.

[Description of board configuration and game state]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), there are various entrances from the upstream side of the game area to the gate 28 (start gate 29), the first grand prize opening 30, and the second game area. 2. The starting port 21 and the second winning port 35 are arranged in the optimum order. In addition, since the game ball flow path in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, most of the game balls launched into the right game area 3B (90%) when these winning holes are closed. ) Passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first big prize opening 30, then flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21, and then the second second The top surface of the open / close member 37 of the winning opening 35 flows down and flows down to the out opening 34. And if there is an open winning opening in the middle of the flow, it enters the winning opening, is discharged from the winning opening to the back of the game board, and the entered gaming ball is placed in the gaming area downstream from it. It has a composition that does not exist.

  By arranging the gate 28 in the most upstream position, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball is prevented from reaching the gate 28 by the opened second starting port 21 or the like. Further, it is possible to prevent as much as possible that the normal symbol hold becomes “0” and a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbol does not change) occurs. That is, by arranging the gate 28 in the uppermost stream in the right game area, almost all game balls hit right can be passed through the gate 28 regardless of whether or not other winning holes are opened. In addition, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows down the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not hinder the entry to other winning holes.

  When a right-handed game is performed in a high base state (low-accuracy base state, high-accuracy base state), it is first determined whether or not the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the second start port 21 is opened. Is done. In the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability per normal symbol is set to a high probability (239/240) that is almost a hit, so the game ball is gated Immediately after passing through (after 1 second), the movable member 23 operates to open the second start port 21. That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol success / failure determination is executed and the normal symbol is variably displayed, the game ball that has passed the gate reaches the entrance of the second start port 21 before the game ball reaches the entrance. 2 The start port 21 is opened. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also opened once for 6.0 seconds, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second as long as the right-handed game is continued. Then, the cycle of opening once for 6.0 seconds, closing during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, and then opening once for 6.0 seconds (1 second closing → 6 .. Opening for 0 seconds-> Closing for 1 second-> Opening for about 6.0 seconds->)).

  Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in a high base state, the second start port 21 is almost open, and most of the game balls flowing down the right game region 3B (about 80 to 90%) are in the second start port 21. You will enter the ball. When the game ball enters the second start port 21, the second special symbol determination is performed. In the second special symbol success / failure determination, in the high-accuracy and high-base state, a big hit is made with a probability of 1/63, a small win is made with a probability of 30/63, and a probability is lost with a probability of 32/63.

  First, when the result of determining whether or not the second special symbol is right, the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B pass through the gate 28, and most (about 80 to 90%) of the game balls are in the open state. And the other game balls flow downstream from the game ball passage branching before the second start port 21 and flow down to the second start port 21 without flowing down to the third start port 21. 26 enters the ball or flows into the outlet 34. Thereby, the second special symbol success / failure determination is continuously executed. In addition, since one winning ball is discharged by entering one ball into the second starting port 21, the second special symbol success / failure determination is executed and the next big hit is aimed at without almost reducing the holding ball. It becomes possible. In addition, one prize ball is also discharged by entering one ball into the third starting port 26.

  Next, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit, the first big winning port 30 on the upstream side of the second start port 21 is opened in a manner corresponding to the big hit type shown in FIG. . Further, the second big prize winning port 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is not opened in the big hit game. As a result, when the big hit game is started, the game ball flowing down by the right-handed game can smoothly enter the first big winning opening without being blocked by other winning openings such as the second starting opening 21. Enter 30. Here, when the second starting port 21 is arranged upstream of the first big winning port 30, the game shifts to the low base state during the big hit game, but in this embodiment, the second starting port 21 is also in the low base state. Because it is a specification that is frequently opened, the game ball flowing down the right game area during the big hit game entered the second start port 21 first, and did not enter the second start port 21 A situation occurs in which only game balls enter the second grand prize opening 30.

  Moreover, since there is only one winning ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, the execution time of the big hit game is simply prolonged, and the player has no merit. Rather, the game becomes redundant, and does not proceed smoothly, and there is a risk that the game interest will be reduced. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by arranging the first big winning opening 30 upstream of the second starting opening 21, such a situation can be prevented and the big hit game can proceed smoothly. Become. It should be noted that since the first big winning opening 30 is not opened except during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 30 may also prevent the entry to the second start opening 21 when not in the big hit game. Absent.

  Next, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a small hit, the second big winning port 35 on the downstream side of the second start port 21 is opened in the open / close mode for small hits shown in FIG. Become. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds). However, as described above, in the high base state, the second start port 21 is open for most of the period. Therefore, about 99% (almost all) of the game balls flowing down to the second start opening 21 enter the second start opening 21 arranged on the upstream side of the second big winning opening 35. Therefore, in the high base state, even when a small hit game is executed in which the second big prize opening 35 is opened in the small base game, the second big prize on the downstream side is caused by the second start opening 21 on the upstream side. The entry into the mouth 35 is hindered, making it difficult to enter the second grand prize opening 35. Although the number is small (though it is unlikely), even in the high base state, the game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second start port 21 when the second start port 21 is closed. When the second grand prize opening 35 is reached when the second big prize opening 35 is reached, the game ball can enter the second big prize opening 35.

  Next, the highly accurate low base state will be described. The highly accurate low base state is a low base state, but since the variation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to advance the game by right-handed. When a right-handed game is performed in the highly accurate low base state, first, a determination is made as to whether or not the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened (normal symbol determination). In the low base state (highly accurate low base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a long time (3 seconds) compared to the high base state, and the probability per normal symbol is about half the probability of the high base state ( 120/240), after the game ball has passed through the gate, after a short time (after 3 seconds), if it hits, the movable member 23 operates and the second start port 21 is opened. It becomes. Since the probability of winning is about ½, winning and losing occur approximately in half.

  That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol success / failure determination is executed and the normal symbol is variably displayed, the game ball that has passed through the gate passes the entrance of the second start port 21 and then the second The start port 21 is opened. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also opened three times of 0.9 seconds (the closing time between opening is 0.1 second), as long as the right-handed game is continued, the second starting port 21 is During the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, it closes, and when it hits, it is opened three times for 0.9 seconds, and when it comes off, it becomes the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds again. Looking at an example where hits and misses occur alternately, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and then opened three times for 0.9 seconds, and then the normal symbol of 3 seconds. It will be closed during the fluctuation time, will be disconnected, and will be closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and the cycle will be repeated (3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open-> 3 seconds closed-> 3 seconds closed-> about 2.7 seconds open->).

  Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in a highly accurate and low base state, the period during which the second start port 21 is open is approximately 30%, and the period during which the second start port 21 is closed is approximately 70%. . Therefore, the high-accuracy low base state is the second start compared to the high base state that occurs when the second start port 21 is in the open state for about 90% and the closed state for about 10%. There is a high possibility that the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the mouth 21 will pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23 and reach the entrance of the second big prize opening 35 without entering the second start port 21. . In addition, the possibility that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination will be a small hit is different in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) or in the high accuracy low base state. Absent. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small hit probability: 300/630). Further, the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination executed in the left-handed game has no small hit, and the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination executed in the right-handed game has only the small hit. ing.

  As described above, about 70% of the game balls flowing down to the right game area (flowing down to the second start port 21) enter the second start port 21 in the high probability low base state. Instead, it flows down to the second big prize opening 35 provided downstream of the second starting port 21. As a result, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second start opening 21 is opened in the small hit opening / closing mode shown in FIG. It becomes a state. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds, and the total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first grand prize winning port 30 and flows down to the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is in the open state. 2 When the ball enters the starting port 21 and the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, it passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 and flows down to the second big winning port 35, and the small hit game To enter the open second winning opening 35.

  The prize balls based on the entrance to the second grand prize opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each entry, and therefore enter the second big prize opening 35 during the small hit game. As a result, it is possible to increase the holding ball during the highly accurate low base state. In addition, since the high probability low base state continues at least until the next big hit is generated by the special symbol success / failure determination (only the second special symbol success / failure determination is performed as long as the right-handed game is continued), the high probability low base state The longer the duration is, the more players can increase their ball. In the present embodiment, on average, about 20 prize balls (two entered balls) can be obtained by generating one small hit game. By generating this small hit game a plurality of times (multiple times) until the next big hit occurs, it is possible to increase a large number of game balls (for example, 200 in ten times). Also, as a total winning ball of the “renso” period in which the right-handed game is continued, in addition to the winning ball of the big hit game, the acquired ball of the small hit game can be added, and a larger amount of gaming balls can be acquired. This also makes it possible to enhance the gaming interest.

  Further, the second big winning port 35 arranged downstream of the gate 28, the first big winning port 30 for big hit (dedicated to big hit) and the second starting port 21 (the most downstream of these) is for small hit ( It is considered as a big prize opening. In addition, the second large winning opening 35, which is a small winning large winning opening, is arranged downstream of the second starting opening 21, so that the opening of the second starting opening 21 (opening / closing control) causes a second large winning opening. The number (ratio) of game balls reaching the winning opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed by the opening / closing control of the second start port 21 (the time to be in the open state, the variation time of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol determination), the high base state ( The possibility of a game ball entering the second large winning opening 35 is higher in the high-accuracy and low-base state than in the low-accuracy and high-base state). Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second large winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting port 21 (without entering the ball), 2 The effect of opening / closing control of the start port 21 is made more effective.

  In addition, even if it is the same right-handed game, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21 and the ball is almost maintained (including slight increase or decrease) (or the rate of decrease of the ball is suppressed). However, a state in which a game is played in the expectation that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination will be a big hit (an advantageous big hit) (a high base state), and a game ball is inserted into the second start port 21 to reduce the game A game state (high probability low) with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination will be a big hit (advantageous big hit) while entering the second big prize opening 35 at the time of winning and increasing the holding ball Base state), and diversify gameplay. This also makes it possible to enhance the gaming interest. It should be noted that for the player, the gaming state is more advantageous in the high-accuracy and low-base state in which the holding ball can be increased than in the high-base state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high-accuracy high-base state, the special symbol changes for a predetermined number of times (50 or 100) in the high-accuracy high-base state. When the big hit is not made until the display is finished, the gaming state is assumed to change to a high-precision low-base state. Also, when the game state after the big hit game is set to a high base state, it is difficult to recognize whether the high base state is a low-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy high-base state in the effect symbol display section, etc. A game effect is executed in a display manner. As a result, even if the gaming state after the big hit game is not in the high-probability low base state but in the high base state, after that, after the predetermined number of changes, the game state will change to the high-probability low base state. It is possible to play games in anticipation. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the gaming interest for a long time.

  Further, in this embodiment, “2R fifth big hit” and “2R sixth big hit” are provided as the types of big hits that shift from the high accuracy high base state to the high accuracy low base state. “2R 5 big hits” will change from high-accuracy high base state to high-accuracy low base state after 50 special symbol fluctuation displays, and “2R 6 big hits” will display 100 special symbols fluctuation display. After elapses, the high-accuracy high-base state shifts to the high-accuracy low-base state. Further, as the high-accuracy low base state, “2R seventh big hit” and “2R eighth big hit” are provided. “2R 7th big hit” shifts from the low probability high base state to the low probability low base state (normal state) after 50 special symbol fluctuation displays, and “2R 8th big hit” is 100 special times When the symbol variation display has elapsed, the low-accuracy high-base state shifts to the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state). In the present embodiment, the big hit game according to the four big hit types of “2R fifth big hit”, “2R sixth big hit”, “2R seventh big hit” and “2R eighth big hit” and the high after the big hit game By executing the common effect in the base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which gaming state is in effect. That is, the non-notification state in which the gaming state is not notified is set.

  In this embodiment, the distribution rate (occurrence rate) of the “2R fifth big hit”, “2R sixth big hit”, “2R seventh big hit”, and “2R eighth big hit” that are in the non-notification state is 50 times. If the high base state (non-notification state) continues even after elapses of time, the high base state transitions to the high probability low base state after 100 times with a higher possibility than when the high base state ends after 50 times. To do. As a result, the player expects to shift to the highly accurate and low base state after 50 passes, and the high base state continues without shifting to the highly accurate and low base state after 50 passes ( Even when the non-notification state continues, it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for the highly accurate and low base state. Thereby, it becomes possible to maintain a game entertainment interest for a long time.

  It should be noted that, instead of such a mode, even if the transition is made when 50 times have elapsed or the transition is made when 100 times have elapsed, the possibility of shifting to the high accuracy and low base state may be set to be the same. On the contrary, the possibility of shifting to the highly accurate and low base state may be higher in the case of shifting when 50 times have elapsed than in the case of shifting when 100 times have elapsed. As a result, when the high base state continues even after 50 passes, the sense of expectation for the transition to the highly accurate low base state is reduced. In addition, when another big hit type is provided and the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays has elapsed, after the second predetermined number of times greater than the first predetermined number ( It may be determined to shift to a high-accuracy low-base state (unless it is a big hit by then). On the other hand, if the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays has elapsed, after the second predetermined number of times greater than the first predetermined number of times has passed ( If not) it may be determined not to transition to the high accuracy low base state. In addition, when a predetermined condition (random lottery, etc.) is established in the middle of the non-notification state in the high base state, the player can display a character or character that easily recognizes the game state (executes a definite effect). You may alert | report a state.

  In addition, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit in the high-probability low base state, or when the result is a loss, the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination in the high base state is as follows. It is the same as the case where it is a big hit and the case where it is off.

  In addition, the start gate 29 is also used as the gate 28, and is provided at the most upstream in the right game area 3B. As a result, when the big hit waiting state is established, the second starting port 21 or the like does not block the passage to the start gate 29, and allows the game ball to pass through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing to start the big hit game. It becomes possible to do. The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In this case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28. It is necessary to provide upstream from the start port 21 and the second grand prize-winning port 35.

  In addition, when a right-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to be lit in a predetermined manner to notify that the game should be fired to the right game area. Further, when the left game is to be played, the firing direction indicator 47 is turned on (display controlled) in a predetermined manner to notify that the left game area should be fired. Specifically, the firing direction indicator 47 includes two “yz” LEDs, and indicates the firing direction by turning on the LEDs according to the gaming state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that it should be fired to the left game area as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off such as “y □ z □” (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are lit, such as “y ■ z ■” (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information (special symbol, production symbol) is performed is “low probability low base state”, “high probability low base state”, “ It is possible to control either “low accuracy high base state” or “high accuracy high base state”. Of these, the low accuracy low base state is also referred to as “normal gaming state”, and the high accuracy low base state is It is also called “specific game state”.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main process program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. . As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial setting, for example, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU setting of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter Perform a reset. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter. In the examples and drawings, the normal symbol is “normal”, the special symbol is “special”, the first special symbol is “special 1” or “first special”, and the second special symbol is “special”. 2 ”and“ second special drawing ”.

  Subsequent to the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the value of the various random number counters shown in FIG. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

  When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, the interruption is permitted (S104). While the interrupt is permitted, the interrupt process (S105) can be executed. This interrupt process (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a cycle of 4 msec, for example. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is finished and before the next interrupt process (S105) is started, the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt process (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt process (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt process (S105), an output process (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in an output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. To do. The command and the like output here include information regarding the gaming state, special symbol success / failure determination, symbol as a jackpot type, variation pattern, and the like. The command is composed of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper 1 byte is information regarding the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information regarding the content of the command.

  In the input process (S202) performed subsequent to the output process (S201), various sensors (a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a first grand prize port sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. 30a, the second big winning hole sensor 35a, the general winning hole sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) are read and stored as prize ball information in the output buffer of the RAM. Further, a detection signal from a lower plate full switch for detecting the fullness of the extra ball receiving tray 62 (also referred to as “lower plate”) is also fetched and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower plate full data.

  Next, normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S203) is executed. The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S203) is the same processing as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) performed in the main control main processing of FIG. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values (including normal symbol random number counter values) shown in FIG. 7 includes the execution period of the timer interrupt process (S105) and the other period (after the end of the interrupt process (S105), The period until the next interrupt process (S105) is started). Thereby, randomness is given to the acquired values of various random numbers.

  Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), the start port sensor detection process (S204), the start ball entry process (S205), the ordinary figure operation process (S206), and the special figure 1 operation process (S207) described later. ), Special figure 2 operation processing (S208), reserved ball number processing (S209), and power-off monitoring processing (S210). Thereafter, other various processes (S211) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) is terminated. Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the processes of S102 to S104 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command set in the RAM output buffer in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
Next, the start port sensor detection process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal symbol holding balls (the number of normal symbol holding balls, specifically, the counter for counting the number of holding the general symbol holding in the RAM) It is determined whether or not (value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined in S301 that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

  If it is determined in S302 that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), “1” is added to the number of stored normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. And proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label -TRND-H, Fig. 7 (B)) of the random symbol counter for determining whether or not the symbol is normal is stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. Then, the obtained random number value (acquired information, universal figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls in the general figure reservation storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

  In S305, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 20, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 20a (S305). If it is determined in S305 that no game ball has entered the first start port 20 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, if it is determined in S305 that a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (YES in S305), the number of reserved special figure 1 balls (the number of first special figure reserved, specifically, the main control unit 80) It is determined whether or not the value of the counter for counting the number of first special figure reservations provided in the RAM reaches 4 (upper limit number) (S306). If it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. If it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than four (NO in S306), 1 is added to the number of stored special figure 1 reserved balls (S307), and special figure 1 related random numbers are acquired. Processing is performed (S308), and the process proceeds to S309.

  In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol success / failure determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, the jackpot type determination random number The counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (the random number value shown in FIG. 7A), and these acquired random values (acquisition information, special information) The figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reservation balls in the first special figure storage unit 85a.

  In S309, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second start port 21, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start port sensor 21a (S309). If it is determined in S309 that no game ball has entered the second start port 21 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S309 that a game ball has entered the second start port 21 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 holding balls (the number of second special figure holdings, specifically the main control) It is determined whether or not the value of the counter for counting the number of second special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number) (S310). If it is determined in S310 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S310), the process ends. When it is determined in S310 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is less than four (NO in S310), "1" is added to the number of stored special figure 2 reserved balls (S311), and special figure 2 relations A random number acquisition process is performed (S312), and the process ends.

  In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), as in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol success / failure determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (Label-TRND-AS), and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (Label-TRND-T1) are acquired (shown in FIG. 7A). Random number value) and the obtained random number value are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved figure 2 reserved balls in the second figure reserved storage unit 85b.

[Processing at start-up]
Next, the start ball entry process (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs a start-and-coming process (S205) following the start port sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the starting and entering ball process (S205), it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number has increased by “1” (S315). If it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the number of reserved figure 2 reserved balls in S307 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second start port. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

  In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit is read ( S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, the value of the random number counter for special symbol success / failure determination (the random number for special symbol success / failure determination) among the acquired random number values read out is a big hit according to the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state) If the result of the determination is a jackpot, the jackpot type is further determined (preliminary determination). The determination (preliminary determination) in S317 is a preliminary determination (so-called “hold prefetching”) in which the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is held (determination of whether or not the big hit is made) is performed prior to the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is determined in the processing shown in FIG. ]).

  It should be noted that the prior determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 8A), that is, a jackpot determination table for a high probability state if it is a high probability state, a normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state. In addition, as another prior determination mode, as a variation pattern information determination table capable of determining variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a high probability state (for a high probability state) And a variation pattern information determination table. In advance determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on an acquired random number value (a value of a random symbol counter for special symbol success / failure determination and the like) and a variation pattern information determination table corresponding to the gaming state. Is possible. Then, from the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether it is a big hit, a big hit type, a game effect with a high big hit reliability, or the like.

  Next, in S318, game information (preliminary determination information) related to the determination result in S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random number value for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct matches the jackpot determination value (jackpot information), Information indicating the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (random number value for determining the big hit type) (hit type information), information indicating whether the special symbol success / failure determination random value matches the small hit determination value (small hit information) ), Command data including information indicating the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (fluctuation pattern random number value) and the like are generated as a special FIG. In addition, as a special figure 2 start entering command, a part or all of the special figure 2 acquisition random number value read in S316 may be transmitted to the sub control board as it is, or the special figure 2 acquisition random number value may be transmitted. The game information acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number (for example, the above-described variation pattern information, etc.) may be transmitted.

  In addition, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, whether the information is related to the big hit, which is the type of the big hit, The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is. In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering command, whether or not the special figure 2 acquisition random number acquired becomes a big hit when determined in a high probability state, and low It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when judged in the probability state. Thereby, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start ball entering command as a hold (effect hold information), pre-determines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not it is a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not production hold information determined to be a big hit is stored.

  For the purpose of preventing fraud, the random number value for determining whether or not the special symbol is determined is not directly transmitted to the sub-control unit among the acquired random number values read out in S316, and the value of the random number counter for determining the other big hit type (big hit value) Command data including information indicating the type determination random number value) and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random value) and information indicating the result of the prior determination is generated as a special figure 2 start entry command. Can be set.

  Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 has increased by “1” as in the process related to the special figure 2 described above (S319). If it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first start port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the special figure 1 number of reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process is terminated as it is. The processing of S321 to S323 is the same processing as that of S316 to S318 described above with reference to FIG. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit is read (S321), A prior determination is made for the read acquired random number value (S322). Then, command data including game information related to this pre-determination is generated as a special FIG. 1 start entering command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). Note that the prior determination (holding prefetching) in S322 is performed prior to the determination of the success / failure in the special figure 1 success / failure determination process described later.

[Usuzu movement process]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a normal operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 after the start and entry process (S205). In the normal drawing operation process (S206), the processing related to the normal symbol display device 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and “normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4” is assigned to each of these stages. . If the “normal operation status” is “1” (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and if the “normal operation status” is “2” (S401) NO, YES in S403), normal symbol change processing (S404) is performed, and when the “normal figure movement status” is “3” (NO in S401, S403, YES in S405), the normal symbol is fixed Processing (S406) is performed, and when the “normal operation status” is “4” (NO in all of S401, S403, and S405), normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. The normal operation status is “1” by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of held balls of the normal symbol is “0” (S501). If it is determined that “0” is determined in S501 (YES in S501), the processing Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in S501 that it is not “0” (NO in S501), a normal symbol success / failure determination process described later is performed (S502), and then a normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D), if the gaming state is the high base state (state B), the normal symbol variation time is 1 second. Select the symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is the low base state (states A and C), the normal symbol variation pattern with the normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Following the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), a normal symbol random number shift process (to be described later) is performed (S504), then a normal symbol variation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In the normal symbol variation start process (S505), the normal symbol variation display is started with the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to “2”. In the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of variation of the normal symbol.

[Normal symbol success / failure determination processing]
Next, the normal symbol success / failure determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol success / failure determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol success / failure determination random number counter stored in the general symbol hold storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state) (S602). If it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, it is in the high base state (YES in S602), the state B table (the hit determination) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the winning is based on the high-probability normalization determination based on the value “0” to “238”) (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter for normal symbol appropriateness determination (label-TRND-H) matches any of the hit determination values.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is not ON, that is, it is determined that the low base state is set (NO in S602), the state A (state C) in the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is a hit based on the low-probability normal / failure determination based on the table (the hit determination value is “0” to “119”) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal map win / fail determination (S603, S604) is a hit (per normal map) (S605), and if it is determined to be out (NO in S605), the display is stopped. A normal symbol (unusual symbol) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning (per normal map) is determined in S605 (YES in S605), the normal symbol per display to be stopped (per symbol in the general pattern) is determined (S607), and the per-normal symbol flag is turned ON (S608). ) Finish the process.

[Normal design random number shift processing]
Next, the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the normal symbol holding ball number is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each general map hold in the general map storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-order reserved storage in the ordinary figure storage area, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth ordinary figure storage area is cleared to 0 (S703). ) Finish the process. In this way, ordinary map suspension is digested in order of suspension.

[Normal symbol change processing]
Next, the normal symbol changing process (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol changing process (S404), it is first determined whether or not the normal symbol change time has elapsed (S801), and if it is determined that it has not elapsed (NO in S801), the processing is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol movement status is set to “3” (S803), and then the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed. Other processing such as stopping at a display result (a hit normal symbol or a missing normal symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for normal symbol success / failure determination is performed (S804), and the processing ends.

[Normal symbol confirmation processing]
Next, the normal symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If it is determined that the usual figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal hit flag is ON (YES in S901), it is then determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high base state (S902). If it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), an opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is set as an opening pattern for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), the process proceeds to S904. The opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is an opening pattern that repeats opening for 1.8 seconds three times as described above. Therefore, “3” is set in the second start port opening counter that counts the number of times the second start port 21 is opened.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the opening pattern for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) is opened as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). A pattern is set (S906), and the process proceeds to S904. The opening pattern for state A and state C (for the low base state) is an opening pattern in which 0.9 seconds are opened three times as described above. Therefore, “3” is set in the second start port opening counter. In S904, the normal operation status is set to “4” (S904), and this process is terminated.

[Normal electric equipment processing]
Next, the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end-of-common-use flag is ON (S1001). The normal hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a win. If it is determined that the normal flag end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second start port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the second start port is not open (NO in S1002), it is then determined whether or not it is time to open the second start port 21 (S1003). If determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second start port (YES in S1003), control for opening the second start port is executed (S1004), and the process is terminated. If it is determined in S1002 that the second start port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), whether or not it is time to close the second start port 21 (that is, after the second start port 21 is opened) Whether or not a predetermined opening time has elapsed is determined (S1005). If it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the second start port (NO in S1005), the process ends. If it is determined in S1005 that the second start port is closed (YES in S1005), the second start port 21 is closed (closed) (S1006), and the value of the second start port open counter is set. Is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second start port opening counter is “0” (S1008). If it is determined in S1008 that the value of the opening counter is not “0” (NO in S1008), the process is finished as it is to open the second start port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the release counter is “0” (YES in S1008), the base game end process is performed to end the auxiliary game (S1009), and the base map end flag is set ( S1010), the process ends. The second start port opening counter becomes “0” when the second start port 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times in the state B (high base state). In the state C (low base state), when the second start port 21 is opened three times, it becomes “0”. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1001 that the end flag per map is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second start port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has ended. Then, the usual figure end flag is turned OFF (S1011), the ordinary figure flag is turned OFF (S1012), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process is terminated. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special Figure 1 Operation Processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 operation process (S207) following the normal operation process (S206). This special figure 1 operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big prize apparatus (the first big prize apparatus 31 and the second big prize apparatus 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. If “Special figure 1 operation status” is “1” (YES in S1101), special symbol 1 standby processing is performed (S1102), and “Special figure 1 operation status” is “2”. (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), perform special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104), and if “Special figure 1 operation status” is “3” (both NO in S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105) ), The special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) is performed, and when the “Special figure 1 operation status” is “4” (NO in S1101, S1103, S1105, YES in S1107), special electric as a big hit game The accessory processing 1 (S1108) is performed, and when the “special figure 1 operation status” is “5” (S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are all NO), the processing ends. The special figure 1 operation status is “1” in the initial setting. In addition, since the small bonus is not set as a result of the first special symbol success / failure determination, the special electric accessory processing 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small bonus is set as a result of the first special symbol successful / bad determination. May be. In this case, when the “special figure 1 operation status” is “5”, the special electric accessory processing 2 as the small hit game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 waiting process]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of retained balls (that is, the number of retained balls in Special Figure 1) at the first start port 20 is “0” (S1201). If it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is “0”, that is, there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry to the first starting port 20 (YES in S1201), then Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is in game (S1207). If it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is playing a game (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is not playing (NO in S1207), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is being processed as a standby screen (during execution of a customer-waiting demo screen). (S1208). If it is determined that the standby screen is displayed (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not displayed (NO in S1208), standby screen setting processing for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not “0”, that is, there is at least one random number counter value acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (in S1201) NO), special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203), special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1204), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), and special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) to be described later. Here, “Special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not playing” means that special figure 2 is not in a variable display (including a fixed stop display time) and the special figure 2 holding ball number is “0”. Means that. Of course, it means that the big hit game and the small hit game according to the special figure 2 are not executed.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Fail Decision Processing]
Next, the special figure 1 determination processing (S1203) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203), first, the determination value is stored in the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first special figure reservation). The value (label-TRND-A) of the special symbol adequacy determination random number counter (labeled-TRND-A) is read (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the big hit (S1602). If it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when one of the special symbols is executing the variable display related to the big hit, in the determination of whether the other special symbol is successful or not, it is not determined whether or not it is a big hit. It is either off (that is, it is not determined to be a big hit). In addition, since it does not have a small hit as a result of the first special symbol success / failure determination, when the second special symbol is executing the variable display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination executed during that time is: Everything is off. If it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol does not execute the fluctuation display related to the big hit (NO in S1602), then whether or not the probability change flag is ON, that is, It is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (S1603). In S1603, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not ON, that is, in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the big hit determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the big hit determination table (FIG. 8A) Based on the table (the big hit determination values are “3” and “397”), the determination is made (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S1603), the success / failure determination is performed based on the jackpot determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, the jackpot determination values are “3”, “53”, “113”, “173”, “227”, “281”, “337”, “397”, “449”. , “503”.

  In S1606, it is determined whether or not the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is “big hit” (S1606). AS) is read out, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8B (S1608), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1609), FIG. 1 The big hit fluctuation flag is set to ON (S1610), and the process is terminated. In the case of determination of success / failure related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of determination of success / failure related to the second special symbol, it is for the second special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table. In addition, when it is determined that the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is a big hit, either 4R first big hit or 4R second big hit is executed. Also, if it is determined that the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) is a big hit, 15R third big hit, 4R fourth big hit, 2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R seventh big hit, 2R One of the eighth big hits is executed (FIG. 8B). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is not “big hit” (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, the off symbol is determined (S1607), and the process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit fluctuation flag, the first special big hit fluctuation flag indicating that the first special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the big hit (the fluctuation display in which the big hit symbol is stopped). And a second big hit fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing a fluctuation display related to the big hit (fluctuation display in which the big hit symbol is stopped), and the main control unit 80 A flag corresponding to the big hit fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM is set. In addition, as the small hit variation flag, a second small hit variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing a variation display related to the small hit (a variation display in which the small hit symbol is stopped). The flag corresponding to the small hit fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. When the big hit fluctuation flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the fluctuation display related to the big hit is being displayed), in the other special symbol winning / no-going determination, processing for determining whether or not the big hit is made is performed. Not performed. In other words, control is not performed in which both special symbols execute the variable display related to the jackpot in parallel. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large amount of game profit is given to the player in a very short time, and to appropriately suppress the gambling.

[Special Figure 1 Variation Pattern Selection Processing]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), after the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203), a special figure 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is state A (whether or not it is a low probability low base state) (S1701). If it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), it is then determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1702), and the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON. If it is determined (YES in S1702), the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is referenced with reference to the state A big hit table (the portion corresponding to state A and big hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). A variation pattern is selected based on (S1703). If the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In the first embodiment, any one of the variation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of variation time is selected by the state A big hit table.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), it is then determined whether the number of reserved balls (reserved number) is either 1 or 2 (S1705). If it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first hold number detachment table (state A in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 1 and 2), the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). Further, when it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of holds is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second hold number removal table (see FIG. 9, a variation pattern is selected on the basis of the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state A and out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG.

  As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is “3” or “4”, the variation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is “1” or “2”. There is a high probability that a variation pattern will be selected. In the first embodiment, the variation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. Thereby, the function of the shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works and the average variation time is shortened.

  If it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not state A (low probability low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the gaming state is state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state) Is determined (S1708). If it is determined in S1708 that the state is B (S1708), it is then determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1709), and if the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1709) S1709: YES), referring to the state B big hit table (the portion corresponding to state B and big hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the fluctuation is based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label -TRND-T1) Select a pattern (S1710). If it is determined in S1709 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), refer to the state B departure table (the portion corresponding to state B and out of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711).

  If it is determined in S1708 that the gaming state is not state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), that is, the gaming state is state C (high probability low base state) (NO in S1708) Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1712), and if it is decided that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C big hit table (see FIG. 9). A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state C and the portion corresponding to the jackpot in the variation pattern table shown (S1710). If it is determined in S1712 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), refer to the state C departure table (the portion corresponding to state C and out of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714).

  In the state B and the state C, since the game state is a game state in which the game is mainly based on the change display of the second special symbol by the right-handed game, if the game is performed according to the game instruction (right-handed or left-handed), the first Fluctuation display of special symbols is rarely executed. Therefore, the variation time of the first special symbol in the state B and the state C is simple (the number of types is small and the variation time is also short). In the state B, when the big hit, the fluctuation pattern P15, and when it is off, the fluctuation pattern P16. In the state C, when the big hit, the fluctuation pattern P23, and when it is off, the fluctuation pattern P24.

  After the variation pattern is selected as described above, the other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing is terminated. In other processing (S1704), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special Figure 1 Random Number Shift Processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the first special figure storage unit 85a is one level lower (for example, the first special figure storage unit 85a is made up of an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003") , The address “0000” side) (S1802). Then, “0” is set in the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure reservation is stored (when the upper limit number is stored). The area is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this process ends. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2" and a fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM to start the fluctuation display of the first special symbol.

[Special symbol 1 changing process]
Next, the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 variation processing (S1104), first, the variation time of the special diagram 1 (variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time in FIG. 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the process proceeds to S1903. In S1903, a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process proceeds to S1904.

  Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1905). If it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B variation counter) that counts the number of special symbol variations executed during state B (high base state) 1 is subtracted (S1905), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter is “0” (S1906). If it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is “0” (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned OFF (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, the low-accuracy base state shifts to the low-accuracy-low base state (normal state), and the high-accuracy high-base state shifts to the high-accuracy low base state (advantageous state).

  In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to “3” (S1908), and the special symbol fluctuation display is stopped according to the result of the special symbol success / failure determination random number and jackpot type determination random number determination result. The process is performed (S1909), and the process ends.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Interrupt Processing]
As shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) is displaying the fluctuation when the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed during the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. This is a process of temporarily interrupting the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol 1 and restarting the interrupted measurement when the big hit game or the small hit game ends. As a result, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game related to one special symbol, the success / failure determination process or the variable display related to the other special symbol is not executed.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902), it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901). If it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), then, FIG. 2 It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON, that is, whether or not the jackpot game according to the special figure 2 is being executed (S2902). If it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game related to special figure 2 is being executed It is determined whether or not (S2909). When it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game according to special figure 2 is executed (NO in S2909), the process is terminated. And the fluctuation display of special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902) and if it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), the special figure 1 The interruption flag is set to ON (S2903), the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is interrupted (S2904), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the fluctuation display of special figure 1 can be interrupted temporarily.

  If it is determined in S2901 that the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, it is already determined that the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted (YES in S2901), whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON. Is determined (S2905). If it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the jackpot game related to the special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), it is then decided whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (S2906). If it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or small hit game related to the special figure 2 has ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned OFF. (S2907), the measurement of the special figure 1 variation time is restarted (S2908), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the change display (time measurement of change time) of the 1st special symbol which was interrupted can be restarted.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the interruption flag, a special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as “first interruption flag”) indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and a second special symbol are displayed. A special figure 2 interruption flag (also referred to as “second interruption flag”) indicating that the variable display is interrupted, and a flag corresponding to interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 Is set (stored).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106), it is first determined whether or not the special symbol 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag indicating that the big hit fluctuation display related to the first special symbol is being displayed is turned off (S2002). The special figure 1 big hit flag indicating execution of the big hit game related to the special symbol is turned on (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2004. Thereby, in FIG. 1, it can be shown that the fluctuation display related to the big hit is ended (the big hit is confirmed) and the game is shifted to the big hit game.

  In S2004, the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game (in the case of one open once round, from one open to the close of the big prize opening) is set to “4”. (S2004), in order to start the jackpot game, the jackpot opening command is set (S2005), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "4" (S2006), and the process is terminated. In addition, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbol that is variably displayed. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can recognize that the special symbol variation display has been completed. As a result, a big hit standby state is established. Also, if it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither big hit game nor small hit game starts, that is, because it is a fluctuation display related to a loss, the special figure 1 operation status Is set to “1” (S2007), and the process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit flag, a special figure 1 big hit flag ("first big hit flag" indicating that the result of the success / failure determination related to the first special symbol becomes a big hit and the big hit game related to the big hit is being executed. And a special figure 2 jackpot flag (also referred to as a "second jackpot flag") indicating that the result of the success / failure determination relating to the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed. When a big hit game is executed, a big hit flag corresponding to the big hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag ("small hit flag") indicating that the result of the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is determined is a small hit and the small hit game related to the small hit is being executed. When a small hit game is executed, a small hit flag corresponding to the small hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

  Here, the round indicator 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when the first big hit is 4R, the display mode is “2RΔ4R ▲ 15RΔ” (for example, ▲: lit, Δ: unlit). Next, the special figure 2 operation process (S211) and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 operation process (S211), the special figure 1 operation process (S211) shown in FIGS. Since the processing is performed in the same flow as in S206), the following description is simplified.

[Special Figure 2 Operation Processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 operation process (S208) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation process (S207) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation process (S208) after the special figure 1 operation process (S207). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel by the special figure 1 operation process and the special figure 2 operation process. That is, the digestion of the first special symbol reservation and the digestion of the second special symbol retention ("change display of the first special symbol and change display of the second special symbol", "determination of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol) The success / failure determination and “)” can be executed in parallel. Further, in the first embodiment, the determination of success / failure based on the entry to the second start opening (second special symbol success / failure determination) is more appropriate to the determination of the success / failure based on the entrance to the first start opening (first special symbol success / failure). Is more likely to be a big hit (a larger amount of profits can be acquired) for the player than the (determination) (FIG. 8B).

  As shown in FIG. 30, similar to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages. “Special figure 2 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5” is assigned to each stage. If “Special figure 2 operation status” is “1” (YES in S1151), special symbol 2 standby processing (S1152) is performed, and “Special figure 2 operation status” is “2”. (NO in S1151, YES in S1153), perform special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154), and if “Special figure 2 operation status” is “3” (NO in S1151 and S1153, YES in S1155) ), Perform special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156), and if “Special figure 2 operation status” is “4” (NO in S1151, S1153, S1155, YES in S1157), special electric as a big hit game When the special treatment 1 (S1108) is performed and the "Special figure 2 operation status" is "5" (S1151, S1153, S1155, S1157 are all NO), the special electric bonus treatment as a small hit game 2 (S1109) is performed. Note that the special figure 2 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) which is not included in the special figure 1 operation process.

  Here, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) is a process common to the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211). Only the special figure 2 operation process (S211) is performed. This is because the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment can execute the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol in parallel. This is because it is impossible to execute in parallel with the jackpot game related to 2 special symbols (only one of them can be executed). In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination does not have a small hit, but as another aspect, the result of the first special symbol correct / incorrect determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game related to the first special symbol and the small hit game related to the second special symbol are not executable in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
The special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG.

[Special Figure 2 Decision Processing]
The special figure 2 success / failure determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. However, since this process is a process related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowermost area of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the second special figure reservation) is stored. The stored special symbol success / failure determination random number counter value (label-TRND-A) is read. In addition, since the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination has a small hit, if it is determined that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol success / failure determination It is determined whether the result of is a small hit (S1305). If it is determined in S1305 that the game is a small hit (YES in S1305), a small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is terminated. The other processes are the same as those in the special figure 1 determination processing (S1203).

[Special Figure 2 Variation Pattern Selection Processing]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1254), the process (S1401 to S1420) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process related to the second special symbol, referring to the column corresponding to the second special symbol of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). To select the variation pattern. In addition, since the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination has a small hit, if it is determined that the small hit variation flag is ON, a variation pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the gaming state.

  In the state B and the state C, the game is performed mainly based on the change display of the second special symbol (second special symbol success / failure determination). Therefore, in the state B and the state C, there are more types of variation patterns (variation times) than the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and a variation pattern having a relatively long time can be selected. On the other hand, in the state A, the game is played mainly by the change display of the first special symbol (first special symbol success / failure determination). Therefore, in the state A, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the variation pattern of a relatively long time can be selected. Therefore, in the state A, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is simple (the number of types is short and the time is short).

  In the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), after the variation pattern is selected, other processing (S1404) is performed, and this processing is completed. In other processing (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the special figure 2 reserved ball number is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure holding storage unit 85b is shifted to the lower side (S1502). Then, “0” is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure holding storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure holding fourth (when the upper limit number is stored). The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this process ends. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2" and a special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the RAM output buffer to start the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. To do.

[Special symbol 2 changing process]
The special symbol 2 changing process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 is performed in the same flow (S1951 to S1959) as the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Suspension Processing]
The special figure 2 fluctuation interruption process (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 performs the processes (S2951 to S2959) in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) shown in FIG. 29 (S2051 to S2067). Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special figure 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) is different from the big hit type (round counter setting process) and the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag. The processing when it is determined to be ON is different as shown in FIG.

[Special electric equipment processing 1 (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108), first, a jackpot game start process to be described later is executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the big hit start flag is ON (S2102). If it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2102 that the big hit start flag is ON (YES in S2102), it is next determined whether or not the big hit end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the big hit start flag is a flag that is turned on when the player launches a game ball to the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball to the start gate 29 in the big hit standby state. . After the special symbol is confirmed and stopped with the big hit symbol and the big hit is made, the big ball start flag is turned on by passing the game ball through the start gate, and the big hit game proceeds (round game starts). Here, after the big hit, when the game ball is not passed through the start gate 29, the gaming machine is maintained in the big hit standby state where the big hit can be executed. During this time, the player can leave the seat and take a rest such as a toilet, drinks, and telephone. Then, after the end of the break, it is possible to advance the big hit game by firing the game ball at any timing of the player and passing the game ball through the start gate 29. The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (first big winning device 31) is all ended (the big hit game is ended) in the big hit game.

  If it is determined in S2103 that the big hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is open (S2104), and is determined not to be open. If it is (NO in S2104), is it time to open the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 30) (round start time), that is, has it reached the time to pass the start gate 29 and start the first round? Alternatively, it is determined whether the time of the interval between rounds has elapsed and the time for starting the next round (next release) has come (S2105). If it is determined in S2105 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is the time to start the round (YES in S2105), a round start command is set (S2106), a special winning opening release process is performed (S2107), and the process ends. Thereby, the 1st big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (refer to Drawing 6) according to the kind of jackpot.

  If it is determined in S2104 that the grand prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is being opened (YES in S2104), the number of balls entered into the big prize opening in the round is the maximum number of balls that are specified (this implementation) In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the prescribed number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not it is time to close the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30), that is, the big prize opening It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening of (S2112). If it is determined in S2112 that the opening time of the special winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the specified number of balls has been reached (10) (YES in S2111), or if it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has elapsed (YES in S2112), That is, when it is determined that one of the two round end conditions is satisfied, a process of closing the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is performed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is “0” (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not “0” (NO in S2115), the process ends to start the next round.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is “0” (YES in S2115), a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game (S2116), and the jackpot ending period Is started (S2117), the big hit end flag is turned ON (S2118), and the process is terminated. If it is determined in S2105 that the big hit end flag is ON (YES in S2103), since the final round has ended, it is next determined whether or not the big hit ending period has passed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has passed (YES in S2119), the big hit end flag is turned off (S2120), the game state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the big hit flag is turned off (S2122). Then, the big hit start flag is turned OFF (S2123), special figure operation status setting processing 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the processing is terminated.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, the big hit game start process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. In the big hit game start process (S2101), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 is not yet passed in the big hit standby state. If (NO in S2151), then it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S2152). If it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probability variation flag is turned OFF (S2102). Transition to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103). If it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2156. . In other words, during execution of the big hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned OFF before the start of the big hit game (round game) in order to control the low probability state and the low base state.

  If it is determined in S2152 that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning the probability variation flag OFF. If it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning off the state B flag. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate (S2156). If it is determined that the game has passed through the start gate (YES in S2156), a big hit game is started (round game is opened). The big hit start flag is set to ON (S2157), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the vehicle has not passed through the start gate (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the gaming machine is continued in the big hit waiting state. If it is determined in S2151 that the jackpot start flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot game has already been started (S2151), the process ends. Thereby, the player can start (promote) the big hit game at an arbitrary timing.

[Game state setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game that has ended this time is related to a probable big hit (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, 5 types of 4R first big hit, 15R third big hit, 4R fourth big hit, 2R fifth big hit, and 2R sixth big hit are probable big hits. In S2201, big hit games Determines whether any of these five types is applicable. If it is determined that it is a probability change big hit (YES in S2201), the probability change flag is turned ON (S2202), and then it is determined whether the ended big hit game is the 2R fifth big hit (S2203). . If it is determined in S2203 that the finished big hit game is the 2R fifth big hit (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), the state B counter is set to “50” (S2205), and the processing is performed. Finish. As a result, the high base state is set up to a maximum of 50 times after the big hit game ends, and a high-accuracy high base state is established.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R fifth jackpot (NO in S2203), it is then determined whether or not the finished jackpot game is the 2R sixth jackpot (S2209). If it is determined in S2209 that the finished big hit game is the 2R sixth big hit (YES in S2209), the state B flag is turned ON (S2210), the state B counter is set to “100” (S2211), and the processing is performed. Finish. As a result, the high base state is set up to a maximum of 100 times after the big hit game is finished, and the high base state is established. If it is determined in S2209 that the big hit game that has ended is not 2R sixth big hit, that is, 4R first big hit, 15R third big hit, or 4R fourth big hit (NO in S2209), state B flag is OFF The process ends. Thereby, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a highly accurate low base state.

  In S2201, if it is determined that it is not probable big hit, that is, low probability big hit (low probability big hit, normal big hit) (NO in S2201), then whether the finished big hit game is 2R seventh big hit Is determined (S2206). If it is determined in S2206 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R seventh jackpot (YES in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2207), the state B counter is set to “100” (S2208), and the processing is performed. Finish. As a result, the high base state is set up to 100 times after the end of the big hit game, and the low probability high base state is obtained. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2206 that the finished jackpot game is not 2R seventh jackpot, that is, 4R second jackpot or 2R eighth jackpot (NO in S2206), the state B flag is turned on (S2204), “50” is set in the B counter (S2205), and the process is terminated. As a result, the high base state is set up to 50 times after the end of the big hit game, and the low probability high base state is obtained.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122), it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game generated this time is a special symbol. If it is determined that the operation is related to 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 big hit flag is turned OFF (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is terminated. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, when it is determined in S3001 that the special figure 1 big hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001). ), The special figure 2 big hit flag is turned off (S3004), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3005), and the process is terminated. Thus, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric equipment processing 2 (small hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), it is first determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hitting end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (second big winning device 36) has ended in the small hit game. If it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is being opened (S2302). If it is determined in S2302 that the big prize opening is not open (NO in S2302), whether or not it is time to open the big prize opening (second big prize opening 35), that is, the opening time per unit has elapsed Then, it is determined whether or not the time for starting the first opening operation has been reached, or the time for the interval between the plurality of times of opening has elapsed and the time for starting the next opening operation has been reached (S2303). . As for the small hit game, regardless of passing the start gate, the small hit game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined time elapses after the fixed stop symbol is displayed. That is, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big hit game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit game.

  If it is determined in S2303 that it is not the time to open the special winning opening (NO in S2303), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2303 that it is time to open the big prize opening (YES in S2303), the second big prize opening 35 is opened according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 6) (S2304). Finish. If it is determined in S2302 that the big prize opening (second big prize opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the big prize opening during six opening operations, that is, six times It is determined whether or not the total number of game balls that have entered in the opening operation has reached the prescribed maximum number of balls (10 in this embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined in S2306 that the specified number of balls has not been reached (10) (NO in S2306), whether or not it is time to close the big prize opening, that is, the predetermined prize is opened after the big prize opening is opened. It is determined whether or not the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). If it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the special winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of balls entered into the grand prize opening during the six opening operations has reached the prescribed number of balls (10) (YES in S2306), the big prize opening (second grand prize) The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the process proceeds to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big prize opening has elapsed (YES in S2307), the big prize opening (second big prize opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small hitting opening counter is set. It is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit release counter is “0” (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hitting release counter is not “0” (NO in S2310), the processing is ended as it is to start the next release operation.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit release counter is “0” (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small hit end process in S2311. In S2311, as a small hit end process to end the small hit game, a small hit ending command is set (S2311), a small hit ending period is started (S2312), a small hit end flag is set (S2313), Finish the process. The small hit opening counter becomes “0” when the big winning opening is opened six times.

  Also, if it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), 6 opening operations have been completed (or a specified number of game balls have entered) It is determined whether or not the small ending time has elapsed (S2315). If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned OFF (S2316), special figure operation status setting processing 2 is performed (S2317), and the processing is terminated. By generating a small hit game in a highly accurate and low base state, it becomes possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls, which enhances the fun of the game. Note that the probability variation flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF or switched from OFF to ON at the start of the small hit game. Also, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the game state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time. Is determined to be related to special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned off (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the processing is performed. Finish. Thus, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101) ), The special figure 2 small hit flag is turned OFF (S3104), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3105), and the process is terminated. Thus, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Reserved ball count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number process (S209) following the special figure 2 operation process (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read ( S2501). Next, the data on the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90 or the like) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process ends.

[Power-off monitoring processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S210) subsequent to the reserved ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 48, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2601). If it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2601 that a power-off signal has been input (YES in S2601), the current gaming machine status (whether it is probable, whether it is a winning game, the number of held balls, (S2602), the power-off flag is turned on (S2603), and then loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

  As described above in detail, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is provided with the above-described characteristic configuration, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a unique effect that is not found in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or compared with the conventional pachinko gaming machine. And has a remarkable effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a big hit in the special symbol determination (first special symbol (also referred to as “first identification information”) or second special symbol (also referred to as “second identification information”). Is based on a big hit symbol (also called “specific display mode”)), a high probability state occurs (a privilege is given), and when a predetermined condition is established, a high probability state ( (Privilege) is supposed to end.

  The process of giving this high probability state (privilege) (game state setting process (S2121)) can also be referred to as “privilege grant means”. Since the first special symbol and the production symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), the second special symbol and the production symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), the variable display and the stop display are performed, and the same determination result is obtained. , "The special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol" can be replaced with "the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the bonus symbol (specific display mode)". .

[Sub control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, timer, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub control board 90 reads out and executes the program of the sub control main process shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, a CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter reset are performed.

  Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub control board 90. That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the RAM contents are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. If the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses, and counter values are reset. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter. In the first embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the same process as the power-off monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. When turned ON, data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, data related to presentation control at the time of power interruption such as a power failure is backed up. Therefore, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) at power-on after power-off such as a power failure (power-off recovery), effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 is performed. Will return to the state before the power failure occurred.

  In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90. The random number for effect determination includes a random effect determination random number for determining the aspect of the effect symbol game effect to be executed (variable effect pattern), a random number for determining the notification effect for determining the notification effect, and an effect symbol determination for determining the effect symbol. There are random numbers. The random number update method may be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random number, the random number value may be added two by two instead of adding one by one. The effect determination random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (start start ball command) notifying that a start ball has been received is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal (notifying the start of variation from the main control board 80) ( For example, when a variation start command) is transmitted, or when a later-described variation effect pattern is determined. The storage location of the acquired effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

  When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in an output buffer (also referred to as “sub output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are transferred to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control. It transmits to the control board which becomes a corresponding command transmission destination among the boards 107. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various rendering devices (image display device, speaker 67, panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. (Effect design game effects, special game effects related to winning games, etc.) are executed. Next, the production control microcomputer 91 permits interruption (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are permitted, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of effect symbols and the like executed on the display screens of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. In addition, it is possible to perform lighting control of various lamps, operation control of a movable decorative member, audio output control from a speaker, and the like.

[Reception interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt process (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception interrupt process (S4008), first, it is determined whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input section of the effect control microcomputer 91. Determine (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is finished. . This reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed whenever an interrupt pulse with a 2 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. In the 2 ms timer interruption process (S4009), first, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d is performed (S4201). Next, lamp data output processing (S4202) for outputting lamp data for emitting lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 and driving data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source) are output. Drive data output processing (S4203). The lamp data and the drive data are created by a 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 10 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, switch state acquisition processing is performed in which the switch data created in the 2 ms timer interrupt processing is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4303), and the switch stored in the switch state acquisition processing Based on the data, switch processing for setting the display content of the display screen 7a is performed (S4304). Thereafter, other processes such as creating lamp data (data for controlling lighting of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the effect determination random number are executed (S4305).

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not a start incoming command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and when it is determined that a start incoming command has not been received (NO in S4401). When the process proceeds to S4403 and it is determined that the start pitching command is received (YES in S4401), the production hold information storage process (S4402) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4403. The production hold information storage process (S4402) is a process for determining various kinds of information (preliminary determination result, jackpot type determination disturbance) included in the start entry command (Special Figure 1 start entry command or Special Figure 2 start entry command) received in S4401. (Game information such as numerical value, fluctuation pattern random number value, etc.) according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the number of special figure holding balls at the time of sending and receiving the start incoming ball command (at the time of command generation) In the shift memory format, the information is stored in a predetermined production hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. For example, if the received start pitch command is a special Fig. 1 start pitch command corresponding to the number of held balls "4" in Fig. 1, the pre-determination result and hit type included in the special map 1 start pitch command Are stored as special figure 1 production hold information in the area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 production hold information storage area. The effect hold information stored in this way is used to execute various effects such as a change effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The contents stored in the effect hold information storage area (effect hold information) in the sub control board 90 are the special figure hold storage parts (first special figure hold storage part, second special figure) in the main control board (main control part) 80 described above. This is consistent with the stored content (acquired information) of the hold storage unit. From this, it can be said that the production hold information storage area of the sub control board 90 is also “acquired information storage means”.

  Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403). If it is determined that a variation start command has been received (YES in S4403), a variation effect start process (described later) ( S4404) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4405. If it is determined that the variation start command has not been received (NO in S4403), the process proceeds to S4405 without performing the variation effect start process. In S4405, it is determined whether or not a variation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405). If it is determined that a variation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. A variation effect end process to be ended is performed (S4406). In the variation effect end process (S4406), a variation effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variation effect is set in the sub output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays the effect symbol 8 that has been variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The stop effect is displayed, and the variation effect (effect symbol game effect) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the change stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407 without performing the change effect end process. The variation effect refers to various effects performed in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol.

  Subsequently, in S4407, it is determined whether or not a hit game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 in executing the hit game (big hit game, small hit game). Specifically, the start of the big hit game (occurrence of big hit game) ) Opening command sent at the time of the round, round start command sent at the start of the round, round end command sent at the end of the round, ending command sent at the end of the big hit game, the first big winning prize in the round game For example, the first big prize entry command sent based on the entry to 30th, the second big prize entry command sent based on the entry to the second big prize entry in the small hit game, etc. . In S4407, it is determined whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands is received. If not received (NO in S4407), the process proceeds to S4409, and if received (YES in S4407). Then, processing related to the execution of the effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) according to the type of the received command is performed (S4408).

  For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command for specifying an opening effect corresponding to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if the command is a round start command, the command Set the round production command that specifies the round production according to the round specified based on the sub output buffer, and if it is an ending command, the ending that specifies the ending production according to the jackpot type specified based on the command Set the production command in the sub output buffer. In addition, if the received command is a winning game entry command (first winning game entry command, second winning game entry command), a winning game specified based on the command (first winning game) The entrance effect command for designating the entrance effect corresponding to the entrance to the entrance 30 and the second major winning opening 35) is set in the sub output buffer. When the various effect commands related to the set winning game are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 performs an opening effect or a round according to the progress of the winning game. An effect, a ball effect, etc. are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the process of S4409 is performed, and this process ends. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other received commands (for example, a normal symbol variation start command and a normal symbol variation stop command) excluding the various commands described above is performed (S4409).

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the variation effect start process (S4402) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the variation effect start processing (S4402), first, effect determination random number processing (S4501) for acquiring various effect determination random numbers such as a random effect determination random number, a notice effect determination random number, an effect symbol determination random number, and the like is performed. In this embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the variation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired value (acquired information), the mode of the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) to be executed, the mode of the notice effect (including presence / absence of the notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, etc.

  Next, in S4502, the received variation start command is analyzed (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information for designating the variation pattern) for designating the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In the variation pattern designation command, variation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, game state information designating the current gaming state, determination of first special symbol success determination or second special symbol success determination The result includes symbol information for designating the jackpot type (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the first special symbol and a variation corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variation pattern designation command, the effect symbol game effect to be started this time It is possible to determine whether the (variation display of the effect symbol) relates to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. Note that the variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in processes other than the variation effect start process to be executed thereafter.

  Next, in S4503, the production control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining an effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from “1” to “5”, and each value is assigned to the production modes A to E. Specifically, mode status “1” corresponds to effect mode A, mode status “2” corresponds to effect mode B, mode status “3” corresponds to effect mode C, and mode status “4” corresponds to effect mode B. Corresponding to the production mode D, the mode status “5” corresponds to the production mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current production mode.

  Here, the effect mode is an aspect of the effect mainly of the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, some or all of the effect aspects of the game effect such as the notice effect and the reach effect are different. . Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 is different depending on the effect mode, such as the aspect of the effect pattern 8 (for example, the pattern design, the number design, etc.) or the characters, items, and background images that appear is different. It will be different. In addition, the production symbol game production can be executed in a mode corresponding to the production mode, and when providing a plurality of game productions (notification production, reach production, etc.), different game production can be executed depending on the production mode. It can be. In the present embodiment, the production modes A and B are executed when the low-accuracy low base state is controlled, and the production modes C and D are executed when the high-accuracy low base state is controlled. Is executed when the low-accuracy base state is controlled and when the high-accuracy base state is controlled. Therefore, when the production mode is any one of A to D, the player confirms the production mode to grasp whether the current gaming state is the low probability low base state or the high probability low base state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the production mode is E, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current game state is the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state even if the production mode is confirmed. is there. In that sense, the production mode E can be said to be a gaming state non-notification mode.

  Next, in S4504, the change display is performed using the image display device 7, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14 and the like, and is controlled by the sub-control unit 90 (variation effect pattern, effect design). A variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) and a notice effect determination table for determining (game effect) are set (S4504). Specifically, based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the change pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, the change effect pattern determination table to be used and the notice effect determination table are set. . That is, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables and a plurality of notice effect determination tables are provided, and a predetermined variable effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set based on the gaming state (effect mode) and the like. To do. For example, when the variation pattern information designated by the received variation pattern designation command is “P1 (variation pattern P1)” (see FIG. 9), as a variation presentation pattern determination table, the big hit time corresponding to the current presentation mode A variation effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set. The variation effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect (the variation pattern of the effect symbol etc.), and a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables (mode status) corresponding to the effect mode (mode status). (Not shown) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, a table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from the variation effect pattern determination tables.

  Next, in S4505, based on the random effect determination random number acquired in S4501 and the variable effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variable effect pattern suitable for the specified variation pattern is selected and set ( S4505). As the variation effect pattern, a variation mode (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) of the effect symbol 8 mainly displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b is set. As a result, in the effect design game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach effect effect game effect), when the character effect performed using a specific character (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect or character In the case where the effect is not executed (non-reach effect symbol game effect) or the like is determined. The reach effect is, for example, that the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same as the display pattern of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol success / failure determination indicates that it is a big win In the case where a mode (a big hit mode, a specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) with a symbol (the same effect symbol) constituting the big hit mode Whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbols (three identical effect symbols) that complete the jackpot mode in a state where the remaining one is continuously displayed in a variable manner (scroll display). This refers to the production that shows. At this time, a game effect is executed using a predetermined character in accordance with the variation display of the effect symbol, and whether or not the effect character is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode is determined whether the predetermined character achieves a predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show in the production. Such game effects (reach effects and character effects described later) can also be referred to as story effects (specific game effects) and purpose effects (specific game effects). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the big hit and to enhance the gaming interest.

  Further, in S4505, based on the effect design determination random number acquired in S4501 and a stop design determination table (not shown), an effect design 8 (also referred to as “stop effect design”) to be displayed is determined and set. The effect symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the effect symbol game effect is that the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is out of reach, and if the reach is out of reach, three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R such as “787” are displayed. Among them, one effect symbol is different from the other effect symbols, and when it is out of reach, at least one effect symbol of three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as “635” is the other The production pattern is different

  In S4506, a notice effect to be executed in accordance with the variation effect pattern (effect symbol game effect) is determined. Moreover, it is also called an effect symbol game effect including the notice effect to be executed. This notice effect is an effect (preliminary) that indicates the possibility that the result of the effect effect game effect being executed will be stopped and displayed in a big win mode before the effect symbol is stopped (determination stop display) Notification effect). In S4506, based on the random number for determining the notice effect obtained in S4501 and the notice effect determination table set in S4504, the designated change pattern and the notice effect suitable for the determined change effect pattern are selected and set. (S4506).

  Then, in S4507, based on the change effect pattern and the notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, a change effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect or the like is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90 ( S4507), the variation production start process is terminated. When the variation effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 determines the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. Predetermined image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in step 1 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variation effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Moreover, the fluctuation display (flashing display) by two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

[Outline of production design game production]
Next, an outline of the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, when the change effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect or the like based on the change effect pattern or the like set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 On the display screen 7a, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started. An effect symbol game effect (variation effect) is configured as a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the variation display of the effect symbol 8.

  In principle, the variation of the effect symbol 8 is “1” → “2” → “3”... → “7” → “8” → “9” (ascending order). Vertical scrolling) is performed by returning to “1” again when reaching “9” and repeating vertical scrolling. Such a variation display mode of the effect symbol 8 is determined by the variation effect pattern stored in the above-described variation effect pattern determination table. For this reason, in addition to vertical scrolling, there are various display modes such as horizontal scrolling display (horizontal scrolling) and switching display in which symbols (numbers) are switched sequentially on the spot without scrolling. It is possible to provide a mode as a variation effect pattern. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed in descending order. Furthermore, it is also possible to set a variation display mode according to the effect mode and the gaming state.

  In addition, the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed according to the variation time determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display is stopped as the variation time elapses. In this embodiment, the variation display is stopped. A plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) are provided as modes. Specifically, as the main stop mode, (1) The stop order (also referred to as “stop order”) of each of the design symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), and 8R (right symbol) is “left symbol”. → Stop mode (also referred to as “first stop mode”) with “middle symbol → right symbol”, and (2) stop mode with “(left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol)” as the stop order of each symbol (“ (Also referred to as “second stop mode”) and (3) a stop mode (also referred to as “third stop mode”) in which all stop timings (stop timings) of the symbols are substantially the same (also referred to as “simultaneous stop”). And (4) a stop mode (also referred to as a “fourth stop mode”) in which the stop time of the left symbol and the right symbol is substantially the same, and the middle symbol thereafter stops. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and it is determined in which stop mode the variable display is stopped depending on the variable effect pattern selected (set) in S4505. It has become a thing. That is, in this embodiment, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern also serves as the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern and the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern) can be performed separately. The first stop symbol in the stop order is also called the “first stop symbol”, the second stop symbol in the stop order is also called the “second stop symbol”, and the stop order is the third stop symbol. This is also referred to as “third stop symbol” or “final stop symbol”.

  Among the first to fourth stop modes, the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol) is the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination result being “small” mainly in the production mode C (state C). This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variation display is stopped when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the fact that it is “winning”.

  In the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “out” or “big hit” mainly in (1) production mode A and B (state A). In the case where the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the fact that, in the case of (2) the effect mode E (state B), the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is “out” or “hit” And when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in a variation mode with reach (also referred to as “reach variation”) or a variation mode without reach (also referred to as “normal variation”), and (3) effect mode C, In the case of D (state C), when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed by reach variation or normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination being “out” or “big hit”, In the stop mode that can be executed when the variable display is stopped That.

  The third stop mode (simultaneous stop of all symbols) is mainly under the circumstances (1) In the production modes A and B (state A), the function of the shortening variation according to the number of special figure holding balls works. The special figure 1 reserve ball number is “3” or “4”) and the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “out”, and based on this, the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed with normal variation , (2) In the production mode E (state B), the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed with a normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination being “out” or “small hit”. (3) When the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed in the normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination being “out” in the production modes C and D (state C), And (4) When the production mode D (state C), the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is When variations in performance symbols 8 displayed based on a Koatari "is performed, a viable stop mode during the variation display stops.

  The fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol) is that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is “out” or “big hit” mainly in the production mode D (state C). This is a stop mode that can be executed when the change display is stopped when the change display of the effect design 8 is performed by reach change.

  In this manner, a plurality of stop modes when stopping the variable display of the effect symbol 8 are provided depending on the effect mode (game state) and the variation display mode and the result (stop display mode) based on the result of the special symbol success / failure determination. Thus, the stop mode can be varied depending on the game situation. In addition, for the player, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 stops, it is possible to guess the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 displayed (derived display) thereafter. Through this stop mode, it is possible to infer the types of special games that can be executed, the presence / absence of execution, the possibility, and the like. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stop mode when the variable display stops and to give a sense of expectation for the subsequent special game.

  In addition to the first to fourth stop modes described above, for example, a stop mode (fifth stop mode) in which the stop order of the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 is “right symbol → left symbol → middle symbol”. ), And a stop mode (sixth stop mode) in which the stop timing of the left symbol and the middle symbol is substantially the same, and the right symbol is stopped thereafter (sixth stop mode). The conditions under which the aspect is executed are not limited to the present embodiment, and can be variously determined.

  In this embodiment, the symbols “1” to “9” constituting the effect symbol 8 are colored so that the symbols can be classified by color, and the type of symbol (symbol type) is determined by the color. As shown in FIG. 53, this symbol type corresponds to the gaming state (effect mode). Specifically, in state A (effect modes A and B), “7” among the odd symbols is a red symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “red symbol”), and other odd symbols are “1” and “3”. , “5”, “9” are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “green symbols”), and even symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” are blue symbols (hereinafter “blue”). It is also called “design”. On the other hand, in states B and C (production modes C, D, and E), “3”, “5”, and “7” are red symbols among odd symbols, and “1” and “9” are odd symbols other than these. Are green symbols, and even symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are blue symbols.

  Note that the correspondence relationship between the symbols and colors according to the present embodiment shown in FIG. 53 is merely an example, and other correspondence relationships can be taken, and the types of colors are not limited to the present embodiment. Other colors can be used. In the present embodiment, the symbol type (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by color, but it can be determined by elements other than colors. For example, the type of character in the case where a character is attached to the production symbol, and the numeric design in the case of having the production design (character design) representing a predetermined character in addition to the production design (numerical design) representing a number The symbol type may be determined depending on the character symbol, and furthermore, the symbol type may be determined merely based on the odd symbol and the even symbol.

  The effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner, and the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped according to the stop mode described above. The result of the variable display is notified. In the present embodiment, as the basic symbol combination (stop display mode), the “completely broken eyes” (“124”, etc.) in which the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all different symbols (numbers) and the effect symbols. 8L (left symbol) and effect symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number), and the remaining effect symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a symbol (number) different from the others, such as “Reach Ballet” (“343”, etc. ) Is a detachment mode (non-specific mode) that does not trigger the winning game. On the other hand, “Zoro eyes” (“777”, etc.) in which the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same are used as a big hit mode (specific mode) that triggers the execution of a big hit game of 4R or higher (see FIG. 6). Yes.

  Assuming such a basic symbol combination, in this embodiment, the “reach ballet” is also used as the 2R jackpot mode that triggers the execution of the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). . This is because the 2R jackpot game has a smaller number of prize balls (the number of winning prize balls) that the player can acquire than the jackpot game of 4R or higher (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game), state C (high It is a special game that triggers the setting of state B (high base state), which makes it difficult to obtain a prize ball (increase in possession) in a small hit game compared to (probably low base state), that is, for the player This is because it is a special game with a relatively low advantage (profit amount). In addition, the “completely broken eyes” among the broken eyes are also used as a small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). As described above, in the state B, since the second start port 21 is in an open state for most of the period, the small winning big winning port (the second winning port) located on the downstream side of the second start port 21 (second This is because it is difficult to enter the big prize opening 35), and the possibility of obtaining a profit by small hits is extremely low (infinitely close to zero) (substantially equivalent to a loss). Furthermore, a “specific breaker”, which will be described later, among the breakers is a small hit mode that triggers the execution of a small hit game (second special symbol small hit) in the state C (highly accurate low base state). Here, the small hit mode (specific rosette) is also referred to as a “first display mode”, and the big hit mode (bottled eyes) is also referred to as a “second display mode”. Among the eye), the reach variation eye is also referred to as a “third display mode”, and the out-of-focus mode (complete break eye, reach variation eye) is also referred to as a “fourth display mode”.

  Since the state A (low probability low base state) is a gaming state that is basically based on the left-handed game, the first special symbol validity determination (variation display of the first special symbol) is mainly performed. Yes, since it is rare for the second special symbol determination (change display of the second special symbol) to be performed during the variation display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol determination in this situation If performed, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but only the variation display (and stop display) by the effect display 102 is performed. Yes. Similarly, since the state B (high base state) and the state C (high probability low base state) are gaming states that are basically based on right-handed gaming, the second special symbol determination (second special determination) This is the case because it is rare that the first special symbol determination (change display of the first special symbol) is performed during the variation display of the second special symbol. When the first special symbol success / failure determination is performed below, the variation display of the production symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation display ( And stop display). However, when a special symbol win / rejection determination that is contrary to the current game state (left-handed game, right-handed game) is performed and a determination result of “big hit” is obtained (for example, in state C, the first special symbol correct / incorrect determination is made) If the result is a big hit), one or more display devices among the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 provide an effect display that suggests the occurrence of the big hit. Do. Thereby, while the effect display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to the current gaming state (the change display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, it is performed in parallel with the change display of the main special symbol. It is possible to inform the player that the result of the change display of the special symbol displayed is a big hit. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of a jackpot, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player loses the opportunity to gain profits by stopping the game without noticing the occurrence of the jackpot.

[Game production in state A]
Next, a description will be given of a game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state A (low probability low base state). The game effect performed in the state A is mainly an effect symbol game effect (variable effect) performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination. As described above, in the state A, “A” or “B” is set as the effect mode. For this reason, the effect symbol game effect in the state A is performed under a situation where a background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. In the present embodiment, the setting and transition of the effect mode in the state A is automatically performed according to a predetermined mode control condition under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91). . For this reason, the player cannot be involved in setting the production mode in the state A.

  In the state A, as the production symbol 8, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” symbols composed of blue symbols and “1”, “3”, “5”, “green symbols”, A symbol “9” and a symbol “7” consisting of a red symbol are displayed (see FIG. 53). Each of these symbols is displayed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading out the corresponding symbol image data (symbol data) from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying it on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Executed.

  Under such effect mode and symbol type, as shown in FIG. 54, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 54A), the variation display is basically the second stop mode. (Left design-> Right design-> Middle design) (see Fig. 54 (b)-> (c)-> (d), (e)-> (f)) When the function is activated (see S1707 in FIGS. 9 and 24), it is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 54 (g)). Here, when the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R) stop at the same symbol, reach is established (see FIG. 54 (f)), and then the middle symbol (effect symbol 8C) is displayed in a variable manner. Until it stops, the reach effect is executed by the image display device or the like. The reach effect mainly develops an effect indicating whether the middle symbol (final stop symbol) stops at the same symbol as the previously stopped symbol (whether or not the big hit mode is displayed). The same holds true for states B and C regarding reach establishment and reach production.

  In this way, while the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a discrete pattern (completely broken pattern or reach variable pattern) as a result of the variable display, it is “displaced”. On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a big hit mode (double eye) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed. However, it changes to the big hit game effect for 4R big hits concerning the first special symbol. When the big hit game is related to “4R first big hit”, the gaming state after the big hit game is state C (highly accurate low base state), and “4R second big hit” is related. In this case, the gaming state after the big hit game ends is the state B (low probability high base state) (see FIG. 6).

[Game production in state B]
Next, a description will be given of a game effect that is performed when the gaming state is controlled to the state B (low-accuracy base state or high-accuracy base state). The high-accuracy high base state is set after the end of the big hit game based on the occurrence of “2R fifth big hit” or “2R sixth big hit” in the state C (high accuracy low base state).

  The game effects performed in the state B are mainly effect symbol game effects (variable effects) performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination. As described above, in state B, “E” is set as the effect mode. For this reason, the effect symbol game effect in the state B is performed in a state where a background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode E is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. In this embodiment, the setting of the effect mode E corresponding to the state B is automatically performed with the transition to the state B under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). For this reason, the player cannot be involved in the setting of the production mode E.

  In state B, as the design symbol 8, the symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” consisting of blue symbols, the symbols “1”, “9” consisting of green symbols, and red Symbols “3”, “5”, and “7” consisting of symbols are displayed (see FIG. 53). Each of these symbols is displayed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading out the corresponding symbol image data (symbol data) from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying it on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Executed. In the present embodiment, the state (design) of the effect symbol 8 is different between the state A and the state B.

  Under such effect mode and symbol type, as shown in FIG. 55, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 55 (a)), the variation display is basically the third stop mode. It is stopped by (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 55B). This is because, in state B, the second special symbol time reduction function and the high base generation function are activated, so that the game can be smoothly advanced by digesting out-of-reach fluctuations and small fluctuations in a short time as much as possible. Because. When the variable display stops in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear for the player that there is no possibility of executing a special game (big hit game) immediately after the stop, so the player's expectation I won't talk to you. On the other hand, when there is an out-of-reach fluctuation or jackpot fluctuation (that is, a “reach fluctuation”), or a “reach-throwing out fluctuation” (a kind of fluctuation mode without reach), which is actually a normal fluctuation that appears to be a reach fluctuation. In this case, the variation display of the production symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIG. 55 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → ( f)).

  While the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a deviating manner (unevenness) as a result of the variable display, it is “out”. On the other hand, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect. Instead, a round presentation or the like is performed as the jackpot game progresses. In the state B, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the form of a big hit, the jackpot game is related to “15R third jackpot” or “4R fourth jackpot”. A big hit game effect for 3 big hits or a big hit game effect for 4R fourth big hits is performed. Then, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is a state C (highly accurate low base state) (see FIG. 6).

  In addition, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the 2R jackpot mode (reach barrage) as a result of the variable display, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the jackpot game effect for 2R jackpot with the start of the jackpot game. Change. When the big hit game started is related to “2R fifth big hit” or “2R sixth big hit”, the gaming state after the big hit game is a high-accuracy base state (state B), When the jackpot game is related to “2R seventh jackpot” or “2R eighth jackpot”, the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes a low probability base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

  Furthermore, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a small hit in state B and the variation display of the effect symbol 8 based on this is performed, the variation display is performed with normal variation and stopped in the third stop mode. The Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect design 8 is displayed in a completely broken pattern (displacement mode) (see FIG. 55 (b)). When the small hit is made in state B, the small hit game is executed. However, even if the small hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a remains the effect symbol game effect (in this case, the effect symbol) No. 8 is displayed in a completely broken manner), and the effect during the small hit game (small hit game effect) is not particularly performed. This is because the small hit in the state B is substantially equivalent to a loss as described above. Then, the gaming state after the end of the small hit game remains in the state B unless it overlaps with the transition timing of the gaming state based on the number of changes in the special symbol.

  In the state B, which is a low-accuracy base state, when a special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is displayed for a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 in this embodiment) without generating a big hit. The gaming state shifts to state A (low-probability low base state) with the end (stop) of the predetermined number of fluctuation display (displacement fluctuation), and the production mode shifts from “E” to “A” or “B”. To do. Further, when the variation display of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this embodiment) without generating a big hit in the highly accurate base state which is the state B, The gaming state shifts to state C (highly accurate and low base state) with the end (stop) of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays (outward fluctuation), and the production mode shifts from “E” to “C” or “D”. .

[Game production in state C]
Next, a game effect that is performed when the game state is controlled to the state C (highly accurate low base state) will be described. The game effects performed in the state C are mainly based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination, the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, and the occurrence of a small hit This is an effect (small game effect). The state C is an advantageous gaming state (specific gaming state) in which a lot of winning balls can be expected from the big hits by repeating the small hits until the next big hit occurs. Therefore, in the state C, a special effect in which the effect symbol game effect and the small hit game effect are linked is performed. Details of this point will be described later.

  As described above, in the state C, “C” or “D” is set as the effect mode. For this reason, the game effect in the state C is performed in a situation where a background image or the like corresponding to the effect mode C or D is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The setting of the production mode in the state C is performed under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) as in the state A and the state B described above, but in this embodiment, during the mode selection period described later. The player can select the effect mode by operating the first effect button 63a, and the effect mode C or D is set based on the selection result. In the state C, as in the state B, the effect symbols 8 are “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” symbols composed of blue symbols, and “1”, “9” symbols composed of green symbols. "3", "5", and "7" symbols are displayed (see FIG. 53). In the present embodiment, the state (design) of the effect symbol 8 is the same in the state B and the state C.

  Here, in the “effect mode C” and the “effect mode D” in the state C, the contents of the game effects (effect specifications) developed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are greatly different. . Therefore, in the following, game effects in each effect mode will be described by dividing into “effect mode C” and “effect mode D”.

[Direction mode C]
As shown in FIG. 56A, in the effect mode C, the effect symbol 8 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and behind the effect symbol 8 is a background image corresponding to the effect mode C. A predetermined character is displayed. The characters displayed here include a teammate character (first character) and an enemy character (second character), which are displayed so that both characters confront each other. These characters are also displayed when the symbol variation display is not performed. There are a plurality of types of characters for the ally character and the enemy character, and one ally character (also referred to as “ally character”) and one enemy character (also referred to as “enemy character”) are in the rendering mode C. Displayed when setting. As the effect by the character (character effect), for example, the effect display is performed in such a manner that the ally character attacks the enemy character or the ally character receives an attack from the enemy character. Such an effect by the character (character effect) is performed as a variation effect based on the variation effect pattern (when it is performed in accordance with a variation display of the identification information), and the result of the variation display becomes a small hit and the small hit game is performed. There are cases where it is performed as a small hit game effect when it is performed (when it is performed in conjunction with a special game after the end of the variable display).

  Further, a right-handed instruction image M for instructing right-handed is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, and the number of winning prize balls (acquired profit amount) is displayed in the lower right part (first display part) of the display screen 7a. A prize ball count image C1 is displayed. The winning ball count image C1 of the present embodiment includes an image (numerical image) that can display a 5-digit number from “00000” to “99999” and a character image of “pt”. This winning ball count image C1 mainly shows the number of winning balls (the number of winning winning balls) that the player has won by the big hit game, the small hit game, etc., and the game state after the big hit game is the state B or the state If it becomes C, then the number of winning prize balls during that period (so-called winning ball number during the consecutive villa period) is shown until the gaming state returns to state A (except for the big hit game). . In addition, since state C (highly accurate low base state) is an advantageous state in which small hits occur frequently (the frequency of execution of small hit games increases), winning balls (increase in possession) in small hit games In order to produce a prize ball count image C1 is displayed. That is, as the small hit game effect, an effect display (a ball entering effect) is performed by the prize ball count image C1. Details of the effects associated with the occurrence of small hits will be described later.

  A basic flow of the variation display (variation rendering) of the rendering symbol 8 in the rendering mode C having such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 57, for the sake of convenience of explanation, some display contents such as effect suspension (holding symbol), right-handed instruction image M, and background are omitted. As shown in FIG. 57, when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 57 (a)), the variation display is basically stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (FIG. 57). 57 (b)). This is because, in the state C, the second special symbol time shortening function operates, so that the variation without reach can be digested in a short time as much as possible so that the game can proceed smoothly. When the variation display of the effect symbol 8 stops in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear for the player that there is no possibility of executing a special game (big hit game, small hit game) immediately after the stop. . For this reason, when the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode, an effect for enhancing the player's sense of expectation (swing effect) is not performed. On the other hand, when reach fluctuation (displacement or big hit) or reach dislocation fluctuation is performed, the variation display of the production symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIG. 57 ( c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). Further, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination result being “small hit”, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → (Right symbol) (see FIG. 57 (g) → (h) → (i)).

  While the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a deviating manner (unevenness) as a result of the variable display, it is “out”. On the other hand, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect. Instead, a round presentation or the like is performed as the jackpot game progresses. In the state C, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the form of a big hit of the big eyes, the big hit game is related to “15R third big hit” or “4R fourth big hit”. In this case, for the 15R third big hit Jackpot game effects or 4R fourth jackpot game effects are performed. Then, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is a state C (highly accurate low base state) (see FIG. 6).

  In addition, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the 2R jackpot mode (reach barrage) as a result of the variable display, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the jackpot game effect for 2R jackpot with the start of the jackpot game. Change. As a big hit game effect in this case, an effect display of contents indicating the end of the state C, that is, the end of the advantageous state where the small hits frequently occur, is performed from the start to the end of the 2R big hit game. When the big hit game started is related to “2R fifth big hit” or “2R sixth big hit”, the gaming state after the big hit game is a high-accuracy base state (state B), When the jackpot game is related to “2R seventh jackpot” or “2R eighth jackpot”, the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes a low probability base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

  In addition, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a small hit in the effect mode C (state C) and the variation display of the effect symbol 8 based on this is performed, the variation display is performed with normal variation and the first variation is performed. Stopped in a stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol). Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect design 8 is displayed in a specific break (small hit mode) (see FIG. 57 (i)). Here, in this embodiment, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all red symbols, and two symbols which are adjacent to each other among the three symbols are the same and the other one is different ("335", "355"). , “557”, etc.) are defined as specific breaks (small hit mode). The symbol combination that constitutes a specific break (small hit mode) is not a reach, but it is a combination of two adjacent symbols that have the same symbol (number). Is also referred to as “reach sequence”.

  Of the symbols ("3", "5", "7") that make up the specific rosette (first display mode), the symbols "3" and "5" constitute a specific rosette in state A Although it is a green symbol (first symbol type) that cannot be performed, in state C, it is a red symbol (second symbol type) that can constitute a specific broken eye (see FIG. 53). That is, the symbols “3” and “5” are symbols whose symbol type changes depending on the gaming state. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the game by making the player pay attention to the symbol type of the effect symbol (in this example, the color type).

  In the present embodiment, a part of the effect design (“1”, “3”, “5”, “9”), which is a green design in the state A, is used in the state C with a specific break (first) The display design is a red design that can constitute a display design. For example, a part of the production design (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) that is a blue design in state A is a red design. In the state A, the effect symbols (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) that are blue symbols and the effect symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”) that are green symbols ”,“ 9 ”) can also be made red (for example,“ 4 ”and“ 5 ”). In addition, as a symbol type, a symbol type dedicated to the state C that does not exist in the state A may be provided, and a specific break (first display mode) may be configured by a symbol belonging to the dedicated symbol type. For example, a golden symbol (gold symbol) may be provided as a symbol type dedicated to state C, and a part of the effect symbol that is green in state A may be a gold symbol in state C. Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player's attention easy by making a symbol type that can constitute a specific broken eye stand out more. Alternatively, in this embodiment, the symbols “3” and “5” that are green symbols (first symbol type) in state A are red symbols (second symbol type) in state C. In this case, In the state A, the symbol “7”, which was a red symbol (second symbol type) from the beginning, may be configured to be a gold symbol in the state C. In this case, the symbols “3” and “5”, which are red symbols (second symbol type), are symbols that can constitute a specific rosette, and the symbol “7”, which is a gold symbol (third symbol type). Can be set to a 15R big hit mode corresponding to 15R third big hit among the big hits ("7"). This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the symbol type (red symbol) that can constitute a specific rosette (small hit pattern) from the symbol type (gold symbol) that constitutes a specific Zorogy (15R big hit feature). It is possible to clearly show the correspondence between the type and the symbol type.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first stop mode (left symbol → cannot appear in other production modes) at the time of derivation display (stop of fluctuation display) of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) in the production mode C The change display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the order of stoppage of middle symbol → right symbol). For this reason, not only the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) but also the stop display mode of the variable display that triggers the display of the small hit mode is noticed by the player. Further, in the effect mode C, the effect display that emphasizes the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) is performed when the small hit mode is derived and displayed (variation display is stopped). Specifically, one line image extending in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) along the stop order of the first stop mode through the center of each symbol (red symbol) constituting the small hit mode, and the surroundings of each symbol An effect image E (effect effect image) composed of an image (decoration image) decorating the image is displayed. Thus, the display of the small hit mode (the execution of the small hit game) can be emphasized when the variable display is stopped in the first stop mode, and the variable display is stopped in the first stop mode. It is possible to enhance the production effect. The aspect of the effect image E is not limited to the present embodiment, and various other aspects can be adopted.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the second big prize opening 35 in the small hit game executed with the display of the small hit mode as an opportunity, the winning prize ball indicated by the prize ball count image C1 is shown for each of the balls. The number (numerical image) is added and displayed (updated). In this embodiment, the winning balls based on the balls entered into the second large winning opening 35 are 10 winning balls for each winning ball, so that the winning prize indicated by the winning ball count image C1 is shown. The number of balls is added in units of ten. Further, when a small hit game is executed with the display of the small hit mode as an opportunity, along with the execution of the small hit game, an ally character (first character) and an enemy character (which are displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a) It is assumed that the effect display (character effect) by the second character) is performed. Specifically, an effect display (also referred to as a “first effect”) in which either one of the ally character and the enemy character (for example, an ally character) attacks or places an attack on the other (for example, an enemy character). It is said. The character effect in this case (also referred to as “character effect display”) does not include a battle effect described later depicting the confrontation scenes of both characters. The execution period of the small hit game is determined according to the opening time of the big winning prize opening for the small hit (second big winning opening 35), but the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game is 1. Because it is 8 seconds, it is difficult to secure the execution time of the battle effect in this time. In this way, by performing a character effect in association with a short hit game with a short execution time, it becomes easy to make the character effect and a character effect to be performed as a variable effect, which will be described later, as related effects. Through the small hit game, it is possible to obtain an effect (character effect) with a sense of unity between the ally character and the enemy character. Here, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 associated with the small hit is a sub-command of the second big prize opening entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second big prize opening sensor 35a. The character effect display associated with the small hit is performed based on the reception of the control unit 90, and the small control opening command (S2066) transmitted from the main control unit 80 is received by the sub control unit 90. Since these are performed, all of these effects correspond to the small hit game effects (S4407, S4408). The effect of adding and displaying the number of winning prize balls (acquired profit amount) indicated by the winning ball count image C1 is also referred to as “first profit effect”.

  As described above, in the effect mode C (state C), the stop of the effect symbol 8 in the first stop mode and the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) occur frequently, and accordingly, in the small hit game Since the addition display and the character effect display of the prize ball count image C1 can be executed at a high frequency, the linkage between the effect symbol game effect (fluctuation effect) and the small hit game effect strongly enhances the occurrence of the small hit to the player. It is possible to impress. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectation for winning a prize ball (increase in possession ball) due to frequent small hits, and to enhance the gaming interest of the production mode C (state C). It should be noted that the character effect display associated with the small hit is performed based on the fact that the sub control unit 90 receives the second big prize entry ball command from the main control unit 80, similarly to the addition display of the prize ball count image C1. You may comprise as follows. In this case, if the game ball does not enter the second grand prize opening 35 in the small hit game, the character effect is not performed. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second big prize opening 35, It is possible to make a strong impression on the player, and it becomes easy to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the second big prize opening 35 in the small hit game.

  Next, the contents (effect mode) of the effect display when the reach variation (displacement or big hit) or reach disappointment variation is performed in the effect mode C will be described. As described above, in the effect mode C, the effect symbol game effect (the variation display of the effect symbol 8 or the like) is performed in a state where the ally character (first character) and the enemy character (second character) are displayed as the background on the display screen 7a. ) Is performed (see FIG. 56A). In addition, when the reach variation (displacement or big hit) is performed and when the reach dislocation variation is performed, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 stops in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol). (See FIGS. 57 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). Under such circumstances, when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is started based on the variation production pattern of reach fluctuation or reach deviation variation, the left symbol (production symbol 8L) is first stopped according to the second stop mode. However (see FIG. 57 (c)), when the left symbol (first stop symbol) stops, an effect display depicting a scene in which either a friendly character or an enemy character displayed on the background attacks the opponent. (First effect) is performed. The first effect in this case is an effect (character effect) by a character (a friend character, enemy character) performed before the right symbol (effect symbol 8R, second stop symbol) stops. The first effect is roughly divided into a pattern in which an ally character attacks an enemy character (also referred to as “first effect pattern A”), and a pattern in which an enemy character attacks an ally character (“ In addition, for each pattern, there are a plurality of patterns that define the content (type) of the attack to be set and the success or failure of the attack. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, the information regarding the current fluctuation display (the fluctuation) (hit reliability, the contents of the production that can be executed later, etc.) is suggested based on the content of the production when the first production is performed. (Notice). The first effect is an effect that ends when either one of the ally character and the enemy character attacks the other, and does not include a battle effect described later.

  For example, when the pattern of the first effect (also referred to as “first effect pattern”) is the first effect pattern A (a pattern in which an ally character sets an attack), at least the 2R big hit mode is not displayed as a result of the variation display. That is, it is suggested that no big hit that triggers the end of state C, which is an advantageous state in which small hits occur frequently, does not occur. In this case, the right symbol (second stop symbol) and the middle symbol (third stop symbol) are stopped without reaching reach, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in perfect variation (disengagement mode). Although the reach has been achieved and the reach has been developed, it has been developed as a reach production, but the middle design will eventually stop at a different pattern from the left and right designs, and the production design 8 will be displayed in reach breaks (out of the way) (Reach-out fluctuation) or the effect design 8 is displayed in a double-hit (big hit mode) through a reach production (big hit fluctuation). On the other hand, when the first effect pattern is the first effect pattern B (the pattern in which the enemy character attacks), the 2R jackpot mode that triggers the end of the state C is displayed as a result of the change display. Suggest that there is a possibility. In this case, the right symbol (second stop symbol) and the middle symbol (third stop symbol) are stopped without reaching reach, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in perfect variation (disengagement mode). Although the reach has been achieved and the reach has been developed, it has been developed as a reach production, but the middle design finally stops at a design different from the left and right designs, and the production design 8 is in reach reach (outgoing or 2R big hit mode). It is displayed (reaching out-of-reach fluctuation or 2R big hit fluctuation), or the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the form of a flat (hit hit) through the reach production (big hit fluctuation). In this way, by the first effect performed by the stop of the left symbol (first stop symbol), the subsequent development of the fluctuation (whether or not reach is established, whether or not it is advantageous development for the player, etc.). It is possible to suggest. Then, it is suggested that the first performance pattern A is more likely to be advantageous for the player than the first performance pattern B. Such a first effect pattern is included in the variation effect pattern, and the first effect is executed in any of a plurality of types of patterns by the variation effect pattern set (selected) in S4505 described above. It is determined what to do.

  After the left symbol (the effect symbol 8L, the first stop symbol) is stopped (after the execution of the first effect), the right symbol (the effect symbol 8R, the second stop symbol) is stopped according to the second stop mode. If the right symbol that stops is a symbol (number) different from the left symbol, reach is not established, and then the middle symbol (the effect symbol 8C, the third stop symbol) stops and the variable display ends, and the effect symbol 8 is It is displayed with complete disparity (displacement). In this case, the fluctuation is a reach deviation fluctuation (see FIGS. 57 (c) → (e) → (f)).

  On the other hand, if the right symbol that stops following the left symbol becomes the same symbol (number) as the left symbol, reach is established. At this time, the fluctuation is a reach fluctuation (see FIGS. 57 (c) → (d)). When reach is established, a predetermined reach effect (also referred to as “second effect”) is performed on the display screen 7a. The second effect is an effect by a character (friend character, enemy character) performed after the reach has been established (after the execution of the first effect) and the middle symbol (the effect symbol 8C, the third stop symbol) is still fluctuating ( In this embodiment, it is performed as a battle effect depicting a confrontation scene between an ally character and an enemy character that have been displayed as backgrounds. The second effect (battle effect) can be broadly divided into a pattern in which a teammate character wins the battle (also referred to as “second effect pattern A”) and a pattern in which the teammate character loses the battle (battle). There are three patterns (also referred to as “second effect pattern B”) and a pattern (also referred to as “second effect pattern C”) in which the confrontation (battle) ends without winning or losing. There are a plurality of patterns that determine the type of character, which one of the friendly character and enemy character attacks first (the type of character that strikes first), the content of the attack, success or failure, and the like. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, the information about the current fluctuation display (the fluctuation) (such as the big hit reliability) is suggested based on the contents of the production when the second production (battle production) is performed. Yes.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 64A, among the second effect patterns (also referred to as “second effect patterns”), the ally character makes a first strike on the second effect pattern A (ally win pattern). There is a pattern in which the enemy character wins as it is and a pattern in which the enemy character first wins and the teammate character eventually wins. In addition, the second performance pattern B (an ally defeat pattern) includes a pattern in which an enemy character defeats first and the ally character loses. Furthermore, in the second performance pattern C (the winning / losing undecided pattern), a pattern in which an enemy character makes a first strike, but an enemy character avoids that attack, and a pattern in which an enemy character makes a first strike and an ally character can withstand that attack. There is. Each of the second effects (battle effects) based on these second effect patterns starts from the first strike of the friendly character or enemy character, and the contents of the effects until the subsequent confrontation results (battle results) become clear (confrontation) Scene etc.) is predetermined according to each pattern. Such a second effect pattern is included in the variation effect pattern, and the second effect (battle) is selected from any of a plurality of patterns depending on the variation effect pattern set (selected) in S4505 described above. It is determined whether to execute (directing).

  In the present embodiment, the reach fluctuation in the production mode C is performed as a big hit fluctuation based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit), that is, fluctuation As a result of the display, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the form of a flat eye (a big hit mode), before the display of the big hit mode (before the derivation display), the second effect (battle) based on the second effect pattern A (ally win pattern) Production). In this case, a 15R or 4R big hit game is played after the change display is stopped (after the big hit mode is displayed), and after the big hit game, the gaming state becomes the state C (highly accurate low base state) again. For this reason, after the big hit game, the player can play the game in an advantageous state (state C) where small hits occur frequently again. As described above, since the game in the state C can be continued through the big hit game, the second performance pattern A is a pattern in which the teammate character wins.

  In addition, when the reach variation in the production mode C is performed as an out-of-range variation (reach out-of-range variation) based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is out-of-range (ie, out-of-reach variation), When displayed with the eyes (disappearing aspect), the second effect (battle effect) based on the second effect pattern C (winning / losing undecided pattern) is performed before the disabling state is displayed (before derivation display). In this case, the game in the state C is continued after the change display is stopped (after the off mode is displayed). Since the game in the state C continues as described above, the second performance pattern C is a pattern in which the confrontation (battle) ends without winning or losing.

  Further, when the reach variation in the production mode C is performed as a 2R big hit variation based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination being a 2R big hit (any one of 2R fifth to eighth big hits), that is, a fluctuation As a result of the display, when the production symbol 8 is displayed in reach-variety (2R big hit mode), the second production based on the second production pattern B (ally lost pattern) before the display of the 2R big hit mode (before derivation display) (Battle production) is performed. In this case, a 2R big hit game is played after the change display is stopped (after the 2R big hit mode is displayed), and the gaming state becomes the state B (high base state) after the big hit game. For this reason, for the player, the game in the advantageous state (state C) in which the small hits frequently occur is terminated with the occurrence of the 2R big hit. Thus, since the gaming state shifts from state C to state B via 2R jackpot, the second performance pattern B is a pattern in which the teammate character is defeated.

  Here, among the second performance patterns A to C, the patterns including the content of the first character attacking the teammate character are the second performance pattern A (ally win pattern) and the second performance pattern C (win / loss undecided pattern). Therefore (see FIG. 64 (a)), for the player, the battle effect (second effect) is started after the reach is established on the display screen 7a, and the confrontation (battle) in the battle effect is preempted by the ally character. In the case of starting from an attack, it can be assumed that there is at least a possibility of 2R jackpot, that is, no possibility of ending state C at that time. On the other hand, since the pattern including the content that the enemy character makes the first strike applies to all of the second performance patterns A to C (see FIG. 64 (a)), the player can reach on the display screen 7a. If the battle effect (second effect) is started after the establishment, and the confrontation (battle) in the battle effect starts from the preemptive attack of the enemy character, the possibility of 2R jackpot at that time (possible to end state C) Sex) cannot be excluded. Then, after the first attack of the enemy character, when the ally character is defeated and the battle production is ended, the pattern of the battle production (second production) is the second production pattern B, so the fluctuation is 2R big hit As a result, the game in the state C ends. On the other hand, after the first attack of the enemy character, when the teammate character finally wins and the battle production ends, the pattern of the battle production (second production) is the second production pattern A. The fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation of 15R or 4R, and when the teammate character has passed the first strike of the enemy character and the battle production is ended, the pattern of the battle production (second production) is the second production pattern C. Therefore, the fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation, and in these cases, the game in the state C can be continuously executed. Thus, in the reach variation in the production mode C, the second production (battle production) based on the second production patterns A to C is performed, so that the advantageous state (state C) in which small hits frequently occur continues (win, undecided). ) Or finish (defeat), it is possible to obtain a production effect that stirs up the player's expectation and anxiety. As a result, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the variation effect (character effect) from the first effect to the second effect (battle effect), and it is possible to enhance the gaming interest of the effect mode C (state C). It becomes.

[Direction mode D]
As shown in FIG. 56 (b), in the effect mode D, the effect symbol 8 is smaller in the upper right of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 than the other effect modes such as the effect mode C (reduced size). Displayed (also referred to as “reduced display”), a main image X imitating a fighter plane is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In the production mode D having such a screen configuration, usually, the production display that mainly represents the state in which the fighter is flying is developed on the display screen 7a while performing the fluctuation display of the production symbol 8 at the upper right of the screen. It has become a thing. Then, when the reach variation is performed, the effect symbol 8 is displayed largely in the center of the screen as in the effect mode C described above, and a predetermined reach effect (development effect, etc.) is applied to the entire display screen after the reach is established. It is possible to use it. In the present embodiment, the main image X imitating a fighter is displayed as the main effect image in the effect mode D, but an image having a motif other than this may be displayed as the main effect image. Is possible. Also, in the effect mode D, as in the effect mode C, the right-handed instruction image M and the prize ball count image C1 are displayed.

  The basic flow of the variation display (variation rendering) of the rendering symbol 8 in the rendering mode D having such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 58 as well, for the convenience of explanation, some display contents such as effect suspension (holding symbol) are omitted. First, in the effect mode D, a moving image depicting a scene in which the main image X flies is usually displayed. This moving image is also displayed when the symbol variation display is not performed. When the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 58 (a)), the variation display is basically in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) in the case of normal variation (displacement or small hit). It is stopped (see FIG. 58 (b)). The stop in the third stop mode is for the same purpose as the effect mode C described above. In the effect mode D, the change display mode in the case of performing the variable display of the effect symbol 8 on the upper right of the display screen 7a is a switching display in which the symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. . On the other hand, when reach fluctuation (displacement or big hit) or reach dislocation fluctuation is performed, the main image X is not displayed, and the effect design 8 that has been displayed small (reduced display) at the upper right of the screen is displayed. Largely displayed at the approximate center of the screen 7a, and its variable display is performed by vertical scrolling (see FIG. 58 (c)). Thereafter, the variation display of the production symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) or in the fourth stop mode (left / right symbol simultaneous stop → middle symbol) (FIG. 58 (c) → (See (d) → (e), (c) → (e), (d) → (f) → (g)). When the variable display is stopped in the fourth stop mode (left / right symbol simultaneous stop → middle symbol), after the main image X is not displayed, the effect symbol 8 is displayed largely in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the left symbol and the right symbol may be stopped almost simultaneously, and the middle symbol may be variably displayed (scrolled).

  While the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a deviating manner (unevenness) as a result of the variable display, it is “out”. On the other hand, 4R or 15R big hit games can be executed when the production symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, and 2R big hit games can be executed when displayed in the 2R big hit mode (reach ballet). It becomes. Since the effects during the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game are the same as those in the effect mode C, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  Further, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a small hit in the effect mode D (state C), and the variation display (small variation variation) of the effect symbol 8 based on this is performed, the variation display is displayed on the upper right of the screen. Thus, it is performed in the normal variation and stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 58B). At this time, as a result of the variable display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a specific loose eye (small hit mode) (see FIG. 58B). Here, in the production mode C, the change display accompanying the small hit is stopped in the first stop mode that cannot appear in other production modes, or the effect image E (production effect image) is displayed at the time of the stop. The display of the effect design 8 is mainly shown to emphasize the occurrence of the small hit. On the other hand, in the effect mode D, the effect symbol 8 is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a with a specific break (small hit mode), so that the notification of the occurrence of the small hit by the stop display mode of the effect symbol 8 is not so much. Although it is performed in an inconspicuous manner, an effect image different from the effect symbol 8 can be displayed at that time, and the display of the effect image may suggest (pre-notify) the occurrence of a small hit to the player. It is supposed to be.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), a plurality of target images Y can be displayed at substantially the center of the display screen 7a with the start of the small hit variation. The target image Y is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter the second big prize opening 35 in one small hit game. In this embodiment, the target image Y is approximately 2 per small hit game. Since three game balls are designed to be able to enter the second grand prize opening 35 (gauge configuration), three target images Y are displayed correspondingly. The display of the target image Y is based on the variation effect pattern in the effect mode D (effect design game effect). When the hit variation effect pattern) is selected (set), the target image Y is displayed when the variation effect is executed. By displaying the target image Y in this way, the player can estimate that the result of the variation display is a small hit. Therefore, it can be said that the target image Y is a notice effect image for notifying the occurrence of a small hit. In addition, it is also possible to include the display of the target image Y in the notice effect pattern set in S4506 described above without including it in the change effect pattern.

  Then, when the small hit variation (change display of the effect symbol 8) stops and the small hit mode ("355" or the like) is displayed, the small hit game is started, and the second big prize that is released by the small hit game is released. When a game ball enters the mouth 35, an effect display (also referred to as a “destructive effect”) showing how the target image Y is destroyed for each entered ball is performed (see FIG. 59B). The destruction effect is performed based on the fact that the sub-control unit 90 receives the second big prize entry ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second big prize port sensor 35a. It corresponds to the small hit game effect (S4407, S4408). In this embodiment, the destruction effect represents a state in which the target image Y is destroyed by a missile attack from the fighter (main image X). Further, similarly to the effect mode C, addition display of the prize ball count image C1 based on the entry into the second big prize opening 35 is also performed.

  The production from the start of the small hit fluctuation to the small hit game is a basic production accompanying the occurrence of the small hit in the production mode D. In addition to this, in the production mode D, the above-described production relating to the small hit is given. It is assumed that an effect based on the effect hold information stored in S4402, that is, a so-called “hold prefetch effect” is performed. This hold prefetch effect related to the small hit (also referred to as “small hit prefetch effect”) is realized by the small hit prefetch effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. That is, when the sub-control unit 90 (the production control microcomputer 91) starts the variation display (variation production) of the production design 8 in the production mode D, the sub-control pre-reading production process (S5000) shown in FIG. Specifically, when setting the variation effect pattern (S4505) in the variation effect start process (S4402) described above, the small hit prefetch effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. 60 is performed.

  In the small hit prefetch effect process (S5000), first, it is determined whether or not the specific period flag is OFF (S5001). Although the details will be described later, the specific period flag is a flag that can be set to ON in S5006, which will be described later, when a predetermined specific period start condition is satisfied during the game in the effect mode D (state C). During the period, there will be a special performance for small hits. If it is determined in S5001 that the specific period flag is ON (NO in S5001), the process ends without performing the processes after S5002. On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific period flag is OFF (not during the specific period) (YES in S5001), the second special symbol is determined as the currently stored second special symbol hold (second special figure hold). It is determined whether or not a hold whose determination result is a small hit (also referred to as “small hit hold”) is stored (S5002). This determination is performed with reference to the production hold information (preliminary determination result or the like) stored in S4402 described above, that is, the storage contents of the production hold information storage area (acquisition information storage means) of the sub-control board 90. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit hold, including the second special figure hold corresponding to the change display (also referred to as “the change”) of the effect design 8 starting from now (S5002). Note that the small hit hold is also referred to as “specific acquisition information”.

  If it is determined in S5002 that the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is not stored (NO in S5002), the process ends without performing the processing after S5003, and the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is stored. If it is determined (YES in S5002), it is determined whether or not the small hit is continuously generated three times or more as a result of the variation display including the variation (the variation display to be started) (S5003). That is, it is determined whether or not three or more small hit holds are continuously stored including the second special figure hold corresponding to the change (S5003). This determination can also be made with reference to the production hold information stored in S4402 (the stored contents of the production hold information storage area).

  In S5003, when it is determined that three or more small hits are not stored continuously (NO in S5003), this process is terminated without performing the processes after S5004. In this case, the small hit prefetching effect (small hit consecutive notice) based on the small hit prefetching effect process (S5000) is not started. However, when the variation is a small hit variation corresponding to the small hit hold, as described above, the variation effect pattern including the display of the target image Y is set as the variation effect pattern related to the variation, With this variation (small hit variation), a variation effect involving display of a plurality (three in this example) of target images Y is performed (see FIG. 59A). That is, there are cases where three target images Y are displayed as an effect that suggests the occurrence of a small hit with the change (the change notice).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S5003 that three or more small hits are continuously stored (YES in S5003), it is determined whether or not a specific period is to be started (S5004). Here, the specific period refers to a period in which a special effect is performed as an effect related to the small hit. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the small hit game is continuously performed three times or more, that is, it is determined that the small hit is derived as a result of each of the three or more consecutive fluctuation displays. (S5003: YES), the specific period can be started (executable). The sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) performs a start lottery for a specific period (a kind of random number lottery for effect determination) as a determination as to whether or not to start the specific period. In the case of winning a win (YES in S5004), the processing of S5005 to S5007 at the start of the specific period is performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the two conditions of (1) three or more small hits are continuously stored and (2) winning the start lottery of the specific period are satisfied, the specific period Is started. That is, the two conditions (1) and (2) are the start conditions for the specific period.

  If it is determined in S5004 that the specific period is to be started (YES in S5004), the specific period counter is set (S5005), the specific period flag is turned on (S5006), and the small hit prefetch effect pattern A is set (S5007). . On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is set without setting the specific period counter or the like (S5008). Here, the specific period counter is a counter for determining the end of the specific period. In S5005, a value corresponding to the number of small hits reserved determined in S5003 is set. In this embodiment, “3” or “4” is set (S5005). After the specific period counter is set in S5005, the value of the specific period counter is decremented by 1 every time the change display (small hit fluctuation) stops (ends) thereafter. The specific period flag is a flag indicating that it is in a specific period. Mainly, when the variation production starts (S4404, S5001, etc.) or the second special figure is suspended (special figure 2 start entry command reception) ) Is a flag that is referenced when storing the production hold information based on (S4402). The specific period flag is turned OFF when the value of the specific period counter becomes zero after being turned ON in S5006.

  In this embodiment, when three or more small hits are continuously stored (YES in S5003) and the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is set. However, it may be configured to determine whether or not to set the small hit prefetch effect pattern B, and to set the effect pattern B in the case of an affirmative determination. In this way, it is possible to provide a case where a small hit pre-reading effect is executed and a case where the small hit prefetch effect is not executed when three or more small hit holds are continuously stored. Become.

  When a small hit prefetch effect pattern (A or B) is set in S5007 or S5008, a variable effect start command for starting a small hit prefetch effect based on the set effect pattern together with the effect symbol game effect is displayed on the image control board 100. As a result, a small hit prefetch effect on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is started together with the effect symbol game effect. At this time, when a specific period is started and an effect based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern A is performed, as shown in FIG. 61, with the start of variation display of the effect symbol 8 (first small hit variation). The main image X (see FIG. 56B) is not displayed, and the characters “continuous GET !!!!” are displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61A).

  After that, along with the display of the first small hit mode (“355” or the like) due to the suspension of the variable display, the specific period display area T (displaying the prize ball count image C2 indicating the number of prize balls won during the specific period) The second display unit) appears on the left side of the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61B). The prize ball count image C2 displayed in the specific period display area T includes an image (numerical image) capable of displaying a three-digit number from “000” to “999” and a character image of “pt”. Each time one game ball enters the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game executed with the display of the small hit mode, the number of winning balls to be paid out for that single winning ball An award ball number image S indicating (in this embodiment, 10) is displayed on the right side of the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61C), and the award ball number indicated by the award ball number image S is It is displayed in addition to the award ball count image C2 (acquired award ball number) in the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61 (d)). In addition, during a specific period, when a game ball enters the third starting port 26 as well as the second large winning port 35, a prize ball that is paid out for each entered ball (each time one ball is entered). An award ball number image S indicating the number (1 in this embodiment) is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61C), and the award ball number indicated by the award ball number image S is the award ball count image. C2 (the number of winning prize balls) is added and displayed (see FIG. 61 (d)). Thereby, during the specific period, the display of the winning ball number image S and the addition display of the winning ball count image C2 are easily performed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the entry effect. The effect of adding and displaying the number of winning prize balls (acquired profit amount) indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is also referred to as “second profit effect”.

  The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 are input from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the third start port sensor 26a or the second large winning port sensor 35a. This is performed based on the fact that the sub-control unit 90 receives a ball command (special figure 2 start entry command, second grand prize entry command) (S4407, S4408). In addition, since the entrance to the third starting port 26 can occur other than during the small hit game, the display of the winning ball number image S based on the entering into the third starting port 26 and the addition of the winning ball count image C2 are performed. The display can also be executed as an effect during variable display between the previous small hit game and the subsequent small hit game, for example. In addition, during the specific period, addition display of the prize ball count image C1 displayed on the lower right portion (first display portion) of the screen is not performed. This shows the number of prize balls won during a specific period (during the small hits villa period) in which a small hit game is continuously performed three times or more separately from the number of prize balls won by a small hit game when it is not a specific period. Because.

  The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 as described above are all of the small hits stored at the start of the specific period (three or four small hits held in this embodiment). ) Until the small hit fluctuation and the small hit game corresponding to) are completed. When the small hit variation and the small hit game corresponding to all the small hit holds are completed, the specific period ends, and based on the end, the specific period display area T displayed so far is erased from the screen. In addition, the prize ball count image C2 is enlarged and displayed on the screen (see FIG. 61 (e)), and the number of winning prize balls indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is lower right (first display section). An effect display that is added (summed) to the number of winning prize balls indicated by the prize ball count image C1 displayed on the screen is performed (see FIGS. 61 (e) → (f)). According to such an effect based on the small hit pre-reading effect pattern A, the effect of the profit effect (the first profit effect and the second profit effect) is given by changing the display mode of the number of winning prize balls (acquired profit amount). The effect can be increased. The effect display mode (display position, size, shape, etc. of the character image, specific period display area T, prize ball number image S, etc.) based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern A displayed on the display screen 7a is shown in FIG. For example, the specific period display area T is displayed in the horizontal direction near the upper left part of the display screen 7a, and the award ball number image S is displayed below the specific period display area T. For example, various display modes can be adopted.

  On the other hand, when the specific period is not started (NO in S5004) and an effect based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B (predetermined effect) is performed, along with the start of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 (small hit fluctuation) A plurality of the aforementioned target images Y (see FIG. 59A) are displayed on the display screen 7a. The target image Y displayed in this case is the second big prize opening in the number of small hit games corresponding to the number of small hits held (3 or 4) stored at the time when the variable display is started. 35 is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter the ball. As described above, in this embodiment, since three target images Y are displayed for each small hit game (see FIG. 59A), an effect based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern B (predetermined effect) Then, nine or twelve target images Y are displayed. That is, the display number of target images Y (the production mode of the predetermined effect) differs depending on the stored number of small hits on hold. By such display of the target symbol Y, the results of the variable display that is continuously performed a plurality of times (three or four times in this example) including the variable display are all small hits (specific display results) (small display) It is possible to suggest to the player the continuous occurrence of hits). Thereafter, each time a game ball enters the second big prize opening 35 while a small hit game corresponding to the number of small hits held at the start of the production based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is performed. Then, the destruction effect of the target image Y (see FIG. 59B) is performed.

  The effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is not limited to the display of the target image Y and the destruction effect of the target image Y as in the present embodiment. For example, an image such as a number or level meter that directly indicates the stored number of small hits on hold is displayed on the display screen, and the display mode of the number or level meter is used for entering the second big prize opening 35. A predetermined character image is displayed while the effect updated based on this and the small hit variation based on the small hit hold are performed, and the display mode (character movement, etc.) of the character image is changed to the second big prize opening 35. It is possible to set various effects such as effects that change based on the number of balls entered as a predetermined effect. It is also possible to provide a plurality of types of effect patterns (predetermined effect patterns) corresponding to the small hit prefetch effect pattern B, and select and set one of them. In this way, it is possible to diversify the small hit prefetching effect.

  As described above, in the effect mode D (state C), while the effect display by the main image X is mainly performed (see FIG. 56B), a small hit frequently occurs, so that the player enters the second big prize opening 35. Since the effects based on the first profit effect (second profit effect, second profit effect) can be executed with high frequency, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the effect related to the small hits and to improve the game entertainment. In particular, when a specific period is started and a specific period display area T is displayed as a kind of small hit pre-reading effect in a situation where there are a plurality of small hit reservations ("3" or more in this embodiment), The prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 (second profit effect) are performed until the specific period ends after all the small hits are reserved, so that the prize ball number image S is displayed and It is possible to secure an execution opportunity of the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 and to increase the certainty that the display is performed. Then, after the end of the specific period, the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls during the specific period) indicated by the winning ball count image C2 is originally displayed on the lower right (first display section) of the screen. It is added (added) to the number of winning prize balls in the ball count image C1. In addition, in a situation where there are a plurality of small hit reservations ("3" or more in the present embodiment), even if the specific period is not started, a plurality of target images Y are displayed on the display screen 7a as a kind of small hit prefetching effect. The effect (small hit pre-reading effect pattern B, predetermined effect) is performed, and the effect mode (the number of display of the target image Y in this embodiment) differs depending on the number of stored small hits. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effects of the effects (such as the small hit look-ahead effect, the first profit effect, the second profit effect, etc.) that are executed with the small hits, and to enhance the game entertainment of the effect mode D (state C) Become.

  Next, the contents (effect mode) of the effect display when the reach variation (displacement or big hit) or reach disappointment variation is performed in the effect mode D will be described. As described above, in the effect mode D, the main image X is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the effect symbol game effect (the effect symbol 8 of the effect symbol 8 is displayed) in a state where the effect symbol 8 is reduced and displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. Fluctuation display or the like) is performed (see FIGS. 56B and 58A). In addition, when reach fluctuation (off or big hit) is performed, and when reach fluctuation is performed, the main image X is not displayed after the start of the variation display of the production symbol 8, and the upper right of the screen is displayed until then. The displayed effect symbol 8 is displayed largely in the approximate center of the screen, and the variable display is performed by vertical scrolling. Thereafter, the variable symbol display of the effect symbol 8 is the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) or fourth. Stop in the stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol) (see FIG. 58 (c) and after). At this time, when the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol (number) (see FIG. 58 (e)), reach is established, and then, after the result of the variable display is displayed (derived display), the predetermined symbol is displayed. Reach production is performed. The reach effect is executed based on the variation effect pattern set in S4505 described above, and the content of the reach effect varies depending on the type of the change effect pattern.

  Here, the reach effect (also referred to as “third effect”) executed in the effect mode D is similar to the second effect executed as the reach effect in the effect mode C described above. It is a battle effect (confrontation effect) depicting a confrontation scene, and includes a plurality of third effect patterns having different patterns of the content of the battle effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the third effect (battle effect) in effect mode D is roughly divided into a pattern in which the teammate character wins (also referred to as “third effect pattern A”), and a friend. There are three patterns: a pattern in which the character loses (also referred to as “third effect pattern B”), and a pattern in which the confrontation (battle) ends without being won or lost (also referred to as “third effect pattern C”). For each of these three patterns, there are a plurality of patterns that define the type of enemy character, the type of character that strikes first, the success or failure of the attack, and the like. The third effect pattern A (ally win pattern) is also referred to as a “first variation effect pattern”, and the third effect pattern B (ally defeat pattern) is also referred to as a “second change effect pattern”. The effect pattern C (the winning / losing undecided pattern) is also referred to as a “third variation effect pattern”. In addition, the third effect (battle effect) pattern includes a pattern with strong attack power (for example, the type of weapon used in the attack, the type of technique, etc.) And a pattern with weak attack power (also referred to as “weak pattern”). In this embodiment, a strong pattern (also referred to as “strong friend pattern”) among the patterns in which a friendly character attacks an enemy character can win a friendly character as compared to a weak pattern (also referred to as “weak friend pattern”). It is meant to indicate that it is highly probable. Of the patterns in which an enemy character attacks an ally character, a strong pattern (also called “enemy strong pattern”) is more likely to win the enemy character than a weak pattern (also called “enemy weak pattern”). It is meant to show that. With these strong and weak patterns, it is possible to suggest to the player the development and results of battle effects.

  In addition, when the reach variation or reach loss variation is performed in the effect mode D, an image (“notice image”) that informs (suggests) the content of the subsequent game that may be executed through the reach effect in the variation. (Refer to FIG. 65). The display of the notice image is a kind of notice effect (notice effect pattern) set in the above-mentioned S4506 according to the variation effect pattern in the effect mode D set in the above-mentioned S4505. When a notice effect (notice effect pattern for effect mode D) by display of the notice image is selected (set) based on an effect determination table (not shown), predetermined for execution of the variable display (variable effect) Is displayed. There are various timings for starting the display of the notice image, such as when the variable display is started, when reach is established, after reach is established, and this timing is also set according to the form of the notice effect (notice effect pattern). However, the display start timing of the notice image in the case of the change of reach loss is determined from the start of the change display until the reach is not established (the reach is not established) (for example, until the second stop symbol is stopped). . This is because the reach is not established in the case of the fluctuation of reach loss. In the present embodiment, the display start timing of the notice image in the case of the fluctuation of reach loss is the start time of the variable display. By displaying the preview image, the player can estimate the development of the game that can be executed after the change. Note that the display of the notice image is not based on the notice effect pattern, but can be included in the variable effect pattern set in S4505 described above. In addition, the preview image can be said to be “information regarding the game after the end of the variable display”, and the effect of displaying the preview image is also referred to as “information display effect”.

  In this embodiment, when displaying a preview image, as shown in FIG. 65A, the lower part of the display screen 7a is a preview image display area U, and the preview image is displayed in the area. In FIG. 65 (a), the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R) that have been stopped due to the establishment of reach are displayed small on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a, respectively, and the reach effect is mainly in the center of the screen. The state to be performed (reach state) is shown. As a preview image that can be displayed in the preview image display area U, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a first preview image that notifies (suggests) the occurrence (execution) of a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit). 501 (first information), a second notice image 502 (second information) for notifying (suggesting) the continuation of the effect mode D (state C), and a notice (suggesting) for the transition to the effect mode E (state B). The third notice image 503 (third information) is provided. At the start of displaying the preview image (starting the information display effect), at least two types of the preview images can be displayed in the preview image display area U. By displaying such a preview image, it becomes possible for the player to make an alternative guess about the subsequent game development, and it is possible to attract the player's interest in the content (type) of the displayed preview image. Become. Further, since the contents suggested by the first to third notice images are contents based on the game in the effect mode D (state C), the effect mode D (state C) is displayed by displaying the notice image. ) Will be notified (suggested) of the subsequent game development based on the game in the game), and it is possible to enhance the gaming interest of the production mode D (state C). The mode (display position, size, shape, etc.) of the preview image display area U is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 65. For example, the horizontally long preview image display area U shown in FIG. 65 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Or a vertically long notice image display area U is provided on the left or right part of the display screen 7a, and the first to third notice images are arranged in the notice image display area U in the vertical direction (vertical direction). It is possible to adopt various modes such as enabling display side by side.

  The first preview image 501 is configured to include the characters “big hit”, the second preview image 502 is configured to include the characters “continue”, and the third preview image 503 is configured to include the characters “mode E”. Is done. In this embodiment, when displaying the preview image, two types of the preview image are displayed. As the display pattern (preview image combination), that is, the preview effect pattern, the “first preview image 501” shown in FIG. And a second preview image 502 ”and a second display pattern for displaying“ second preview image 502 and third preview image 503 ”shown in FIG. 65 (d). . In addition to this, a display pattern for displaying “first notice image 501 and third notice image 503” may be provided. In the present embodiment, three types of notice images are provided. For example, when 15R third big hit and 4R fourth big hit are separately (differentiated) for notice, or when there are more types of big hits. More types of preview images may be provided, such as providing a preview image according to the type of the big hit. In this case as well, at least two types of preview images may be displayed in the preview image display area U, and the display pattern of the preview image (precautionary effect pattern) can be arbitrarily determined.

  Which of the first notice image 501, the second notice image 502, and the third notice image 503 is to be displayed is determined by the type of notice effect (notice effect pattern) set in S4506 described above. For example, when reach fall off fluctuation is performed (reach roll off fluctuation production pattern), the first notice image 501 and the second notice image 502 (first display pattern) or the second notice image 502 from the start of the change and The third preview image 503 (second display pattern) is displayed in the preview image display area U (upper part of the display screen 7a), and this display is caused by the stop of the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and right symbol (effect symbol 8R). This is done until reach failure is confirmed. Then, after the start of displaying the preview image (after the start of the information display effect), when the reach failure is confirmed, the previously displayed preview image is erased from the screen. In this case, the change display of the effect symbol 8 ends (stops) without the reach effect thereafter.

  Here, the determination (selection) of the display pattern when displaying the preview image includes the display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 referred to when setting the preview effect by displaying the preview image in S4506, The display pattern determination random number takes a value in a range of 99. The feasibility of each display pattern is determined according to the selection rates of the first display pattern and the second display pattern determined by this display pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 66, in the reach deviation variation, both the display of the preview image by the first display pattern and the display of the preview image by the second display pattern can be executed. In the present embodiment, the former The latter has a higher possibility of execution (selection rate of the first display pattern “30%”, selection rate of the second display pattern “70%”).

  On the other hand, when a reach change is performed (reach change effect pattern), the change is a big hit change based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) In other words, when the effect design 8 is displayed as a double eye (big hit mode) as a result of the variable display (big hit variation mode pattern), the third effect is displayed before the big hit mode is displayed (before derivation display). A third effect (variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern) based on the pattern A (friend victory pattern) is performed. In addition, since the big hit game is performed after the change display is stopped (after the display of the big hit mode), and the game in the state C can be continued thereafter, the third effect pattern A (first change effect pattern) is It is a pattern in which an ally character wins. Then, in the fluctuation (big hit fluctuation), for example, a notice image is displayed (information display effect) at a predetermined time during the fluctuation before the third effect (battle effect) starts, for example, when the change starts or when reach is established. Is started. The display of the preview image in this case can be executed based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern. When the display of the first notice image 501 and the second notice image 502 is started based on the first display pattern (see FIG. 65 (c)), the player at least as a result of the change (battle effect) It can be inferred that there is no possibility that 2R jackpot will occur, that is, there is no possibility that the game in the state C will be terminated (possibility that later game development will be disadvantageous). On the other hand, when the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 is started based on the second display pattern (see FIG. 65 (d)), the player generates a 2R jackpot at that time. The possibility (possibility that later game development will be disadvantageous) cannot be excluded.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the display of the preview image when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A (the battle effect that becomes the ally victory) is executed with the big hit fluctuation is more first than the second display pattern. The possibility of executing with the display pattern is increased (see FIG. 66). For this reason, the display of the preview image by the first display pattern displays the expected degree of ally victory in the battle effect, that is, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode, compared to the display of the preview image by the second display pattern. It can be said that the degree of expectation (big hit reliability) that a game (15R big hit game or 4R big hit game) is executed is high. Further, when the battle effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on the “strong teammate pattern” due to the big hit variation, the possibility of displaying the preview image by the first display pattern is made higher. (See FIG. 66).

  Further, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is the “strong friendship pattern” and the display of the preview image is the first display pattern, a predetermined time after the display of the preview image (for example, the friend character and the enemy is displayed). It is assumed that the first notice image 501 (big hit) may be displayed in an enlarged manner in the notice image display area U in the notice image display area U at the start of the character confrontation or at a predetermined time before the battle such as during the confrontation. (See FIG. 65 (e)). This enlargement display of the notice image is based on the notice effect pattern set in S4506 described above, and when the notice effect pattern including the enlargement display of the notice image is selected (set), the enlargement display of the notice image is displayed. Done. In addition, with the enlarged display of the first preview image 501, the second preview image 502 (continuation) is displayed smaller than the beginning of display or deleted (in this embodiment, deleted). That is, the display mode of the preview image being displayed in the preview image display area U changes. As a result, there is a possibility that the third effect (battle effect) to be executed is based on the strong teammate pattern and that a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) may occur as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). It is possible to increase the player's expectation, security, etc. by suggesting that the player is high. Note that when the first notice image 501 is enlarged and the second notice image 502 is deleted, the display may be a notice for confirming the big hit (the big hit confirmation notification). Further, after the first notice image 501 is enlarged and the second notice image 502 is reduced and displayed, the first notice image 501 is further enlarged or the second notice image 502 is deleted. The display mode of the preview image being displayed on U may be changed stepwise. Further, as a change in the display mode of the preview image, for example, the “big hit” character of the first notice image 501 is changed to “super big hit” suggesting 15R big hit, the “big hit” character or the background color is changed. The character, color, shape, or the like constituting the preview image may be changed, for example, by changing the color of the image. Furthermore, such a change in characters and the like and a change in display size (enlarged display, reduced display, etc.) of the present embodiment may be combined and executed.

  On the other hand, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on a pattern other than the “strong friendship pattern”, that is, the “ally weak pattern”, “strong enemy pattern”, or “enemy weak pattern”. In any of these three patterns, the first preview image 501 is not enlarged and the display mode of the preview image does not change. The display of the notice image in the notice image display area U is performed until the third effect (battle effect) or the end of the change display. In addition, even when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is other than the “strong friendship pattern”, the first preview image 501 can be enlarged and displayed in this case. Compared to the above, the feasibility of enlarged display (display mode change) may be lowered. This makes it easy to understand the relationship between the battle effect pattern (strong pattern, weak pattern) and the enlarged display (display mode change) of the preview image.

  In addition, when reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), the variation is performed as an out-of-range variation (reach out-of-range variation) based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is out-of-range, that is, When the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the reach variation (displacement mode) as a result of the variation display (reach out-variation variation effect pattern), the third effect pattern C (not winning or losing) is displayed before the display of the deviating mode (before derivation display). A third effect based on the settlement pattern) (a variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern) is performed. In addition, since the game in the state C is continued after the change display is stopped (after the display of the off-state), the third effect pattern C (third change effect pattern) is confronted (battle) without winning or losing. The pattern is finished. And in the said fluctuation | variation (reaching out-of-reach fluctuation | variation), for example at the time of the start of the said fluctuation | variation, reach establishment, etc., at the predetermined time in the said fluctuation | variation before the 3rd production (battle production) starts, the 1st notice image 501 and the 1st The display of the second notice image 502 (first display pattern) or the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 (second display pattern) is started. At this time, when the preview image is displayed according to the first display pattern, the player has no possibility of generating at least 2R jackpot (possibility of ending state C) as a result of the change (battle effect). Can be guessed. On the other hand, when the preview image is displayed according to the second display pattern, the player may have at least a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) as a result of the change (battle effect). I can guess that. In the present embodiment, the first display pattern and the second display are used to display the preview image when the third effect based on the third effect pattern C (a battle effect that has not been won or lost) is executed due to a fluctuation in reach. The selection rate of each pattern is set to 50% so that the execution possibility is the same for each pattern (see FIG. 66).

  Here, the display of the notice image (big hit or continuation) by the first display pattern is also a display suggesting that the game in the state C can be executed after that, so that the game in the state C is ended. The player will not be worried about getting lost. On the other hand, the display of the preview image by the second display pattern (continuation or effect mode E) cannot eliminate the possibility that the 2R big hit will occur, and may not be able to continue the game in the state C. Because it also includes sex, it gives such anxiety to the player. The display of the notice image by the first display pattern or the second display pattern in such a deviation in reach is displayed at a predetermined time after the display is started (for example, a predetermined time such as during a confrontation between an ally character and an enemy character or when a confrontation ends) Only the second notice image 502 (continuation) is displayed, and the other notice images (first notice image 501 or third notice image 503) are deleted (change in display mode of the notice image). Thereby, the player recognizes that the big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) is not generated as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect) and the game in the state C is continued. Can do. In this way, the display of the notice image that only the second notice image 502 (continuation) finally remains in the notice image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

  It should be noted that, in the case of out-of-reach fluctuation, a big hit mode is not displayed as a result of the fluctuation display (a big hit is generated), so the first warning image as described above is displayed in the warning image display by the first display pattern. The enlarged display of 501 is not performed. In addition, it is possible to configure so that the enlarged display of the second preview image 502 of the first display pattern or the second display pattern can be executed after starting the display of the preview image by the first display pattern or the second display pattern in the case of the unreachable fluctuation. The second notice image 502 is a notice image for notifying (suggesting) the continuation of the state C in which small hits occur frequently, and the enlarged display of the second notice image 502 does not provide the player with the benefit of the big hit. Since the advance notice (suggestion) that the continuation possibility of the state C is high is made, it is possible to alleviate the player's anxiety that the game in the state C ends.

  Further, in the case where reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), the variation is based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination being 2R big hit (any of 2R fifth to eighth big hits). When the 2R big hit variation is performed, that is, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the form of reach variation (2R big hit variation pattern) as a result of the variable display (2R big hit variation production pattern), before the display of the 2R big hit variation mode (before the derivation display) ), The third effect (variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern) based on the third effect pattern B (friend defeat pattern) is performed. After the change display is stopped (after the 2R big hit mode is displayed), the 2R big hit game is played, and the game state after the big hit game becomes the state B (high base state), and the game in the state C is continued. Since it becomes impossible, the 3rd production pattern B (2nd variation production pattern) is a pattern in which a friendly character loses. And in the said fluctuation | variation (2R big hit fluctuation | variation), for example at the time of the start of the said fluctuation | variation, reach establishment, etc., the 2nd notice image 502 and the 2nd notice image are given at the predetermined time in the said fluctuation | variation before the 3rd production (battle production) starts. 3 The display of the preview image 503 (second display pattern) is started. Based on the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503, the player estimates that there is a possibility of occurrence of 2R big hit (possibility of ending state C) as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). be able to. In the present embodiment, the display of the notice image when the third effect based on the third effect pattern B with the 2R big hit variation (the battle effect of ally defeat) is not executed in the first display pattern. It is assumed that the process is executed only with the second display pattern (see FIG. 66). This is because the game in the state C is ended by the occurrence of the 2R big hit (relative to the display of the preview image by the first display pattern (notification effect suggesting relatively advantageous game development)) (relative (This is a disadvantageous game development) because it is cruel to the player. By doing so, when the preview image is displayed and the third effect (battle effect) is aligned, the notice image is displayed (information display effect) and the third effect (battle effect) is executed. It is possible to prevent feelings from being held.

  After that, the display of the preview image by the second display pattern in the change (2R big hit change) is performed at a predetermined time after the display is started (for example, a predetermined time such as during the confrontation between the ally character and the enemy character or at the end of the confrontation). Only the third preview image 503 (effect mode E) is displayed, and the second preview image 502 (continuation) is deleted (change in display mode of the preview image). As a result, the player recognizes that two big hits (any of 2R fifth to eighth big hits) have occurred as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect), and the game in state C has ended. it can. In this way, the display of the preview image that only the third preview image 503 (effect mode E) finally remains in the preview image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

  As described above, in the effect mode D, when reach variation or reach deviating variation is performed, based on the variation effect pattern related to the variation, the content of the game (game development) that can be executed after the variation is notified (suggested). The preview image to be displayed is displayed on the display screen 7a (preview image display area U). This notice image includes a first notice image 501 (first information) for notifying (suggesting) the occurrence of a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) that triggers the setting of state C (highly accurate low base state). And a second notice image 502 (second information) for notifying (suggesting) the continuation of the state C, and a notice (suggesting) that the gaming state shifts to the state B (game end in the state C) triggered by a 2R jackpot 3) a third preview image 503 (third information). The display patterns of these preview images include a first display pattern composed of a combination of the first preview image 501 and the second preview image 502, and a second preview image. And a second display pattern composed of a combination of 502 and the third preview image 503. For the display of the preview image based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern, the third effect from the start of the change in reach change before the reach failure is determined from the start of the change in reach deviation change. By starting at a predetermined time before the result of (battle effect) becomes clear (before the battle effect or the end of the change), state C (an advantageous state with frequent small hits) continues (win) , Undecided) or finished (defeated), it is possible to obtain a production effect that stirs up the player's expectation and anxiety. In addition, when the reach fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation, depending on the third effect (battle effect) of the change (stronger ally pattern, weaker ally pattern, etc.), the third effect is executed after the display of the preview image is started. The display mode of the preview image displayed at that time can be changed at a predetermined time during the battle (during battle production). Such a change in the display mode attracts the player's interest in the displayed preview image, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the subsequent game development will be advantageous to the player, at an early stage before the end of the change, It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation and security.

[Mode selection period]
Next, the mode selection period for selecting the effect mode in state C will be described. As described above, when the gaming state is controlled to the state C (highly accurate low base state), one of the presentation modes C and D is set, and selection of the set presentation mode is set. Can be performed based on the operation of the first effect button 63a by the player. This selection of the effect mode can be executed at a predetermined time when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (highly accurate low base state) occurs. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, “4R first big hit”, “15R third big hit” and “4R fourth big hit” are big hits that trigger the setting of state C (highly accurate low base state) (see FIG. 6). ), The production modes C and D can be selected at a predetermined time when these big hits occur.

  In the present embodiment, at a predetermined time after the start of the big hit game, a mode selection period is generated in which the production mode after the big hit game is ended can be selected from the two production modes C and D. The generation timing (occurrence timing) of the mode selection period is different between “4R first big hit” and “4R fourth big hit” and “15R third big hit”. It should be noted that control processing related to the production mode selection, such as the generation of the mode selection period and the selection of the production mode based on the operation of the first production button 63a during the mode selection period, is performed by the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91). It is executed under the control, and more specifically, it is executed by the winning game effect process (S4408) of the received command analysis process (S4302).

  First, when a big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in state A (left-handed game) and “4R first big hit” occurs, that is, when “4R first big hit” occurs as the first hit, Mode selection when a big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in B or C (right-handed game) and a “4R fourth big hit” occurs, that is, a “4R fourth big hit” occurs as a villa The period occurs in the ending period after all rounds of 4R jackpot game are completed. Here, as described above, when the final round of the big hit game ends (when the value of the round counter becomes “0”), the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets the big hit ending command and (S2116), the jackpot ending period is started (S2117). When the sub-control unit 90 receives the ending command, the sub-control unit can recognize the start of the ending period. The ending commands are, for example, “4R ending command” for “4R first big hit” and “4R fourth big hit”, and “15R ending command” for “15R third big hit”. It is provided according to the type of jackpot. The ending period is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses. In this embodiment, the ending time for the 4R jackpot game is “15 seconds”, and the ending time for the 15R jackpot game is “5”. Seconds ". Note that the ending time shown in this embodiment is an example, and can be arbitrarily determined in consideration of the specifications of the gaming machine, game playability, and the like.

  Upon receiving the ending command, the sub control unit 90 transmits an ending effect command corresponding to the received ending command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response to this, an ending effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When this ending effect is triggered by the 4R ending command, as shown in FIG. 62, a mode selection screen 700 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a as the ending effect. The mode selection screen mainly includes an image 701 indicating “effect mode C” (hereinafter also referred to as “mode C selection image”) and an image 702 indicating “effect mode D” (hereinafter also referred to as “mode D selection image”). Are arranged side by side and an image 703 simulating the first effect button 63a (hereinafter also referred to as “button image”) is arranged between the left and right. By displaying such a mode selection screen 700, the player is notified that the mode selection period is in progress.

  When the player operates the first effect button 63a while the mode selection screen 700 is displayed, an image 701 (mode C selection image) and an image 702 (mode D selection image) to be selected alternately for each operation. The highlighted image (that is, the rendering mode) is displayed as being selected (see FIGS. 62A and 62B). In the present embodiment, the selected mode selection image (effect mode) is displayed (highlighted) as an aspect surrounded by a thick frame, and the unselected mode selection image (effect mode) is displayed darkly (dark display). Yes. Accordingly, the player operates the first effect button 63a so that the mode selection image corresponding to the desired effect mode is highlighted, thereby selecting the effect mode in the subsequent state C (highly accurate low base state). can do.

  In this embodiment, the mode selection period after the end of 4R is 10 seconds from the start of the ending period. Then, at the timing when 12 seconds have elapsed from the start of the mode selection period (start of the ending period), a countdown display indicating the remaining period until the end of the mode selection period is started on the upper side of the button image (FIG. 62 (c)). reference). The countdown display is performed in such a manner that the numeric image 704 is displayed by subtracting one by one from “3” → “2” → “1”. By this countdown display, the player is notified that the mode selection period is about to end (notification before the selection period ends). When the numeric image 704 becomes “1” in the countdown display, the countdown display ends soon after, and the mode selection period ends. At this time, the mode selection image that is highlighted (enclosed by a thick frame) is displayed as the selected effect mode (selection result). Thereafter, until the end of the ending period, an effect display (not shown) indicating the transition to the state C is executed on the display screen 7a. The effect mode (C or D) selected in this way is set as the effect mode of state C to be executed (started) thereafter, and thereafter, in state C, the effect mode (C or D) set (selected). The directing game effect is executed.

  On the other hand, when the big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in the state B or C (right-handed game) and the “15R third big hit” occurs, that is, “15R third big hit” occurs as the villa. In this case, the mode selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the 15R big hit game. Specifically, in this embodiment, the mode selection period is from 1R to 15R from the start of 14R to the middle of 15R. Here, as described above, when the round game is started, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets a round start command (S2106), and the sub control unit 90 receives the round start. The start of the round game can be recognized on the sub-control unit side. The round start command is provided according to the number of rounds to be started (executed), for example, “1R start command”, “2R start command”... “15R start command”.

  When the sub-control unit 90 receives a “13R start command” that specifies the start of the round game immediately before 14R (predetermined round game) that is the start round of the mode selection period, that is, the start of 13R, it responds to this. The round effect command to be transmitted is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a 13R round effect is executed. In the 13R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63A, the 13R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (upper left of the screen in this embodiment). A notification screen 810 indicating that the mode can be selected from the next round (14R) is displayed. By displaying the notification screen 810, the player is notified that the mode selection period starts from the next round (14R in the present embodiment) (notification before starting the selection period, first notification means). In this way, after notifying in advance that the production mode can be selected (the mode selection period is started), the production mode in a new mode such as the occurrence (start) of the production mode selection period is reached. Selection becomes possible. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in selecting the production mode.

  The round effect screen 800 also displays a predetermined round effect image (not shown), an image indicating the current number of rounds, a prize ball count image C1, and the like. The winning ball count image C1 displayed here is added and displayed for each ball entered based on the ball entering the first big winning opening 30 during the big hit game (reception of the first big winning port entering command). It is displayed continuously even in the state C after the big hit game ends, and the first big in the second big prize opening 35 in the small hit game or the first big in the big hit game An addition display is also made by entering the winning opening 30. Therefore, the winning ball count image C1 displays the total number of winning balls acquired during the consecutive period from the beginning.

  Next, when receiving the “14R start command” designating the start of 14R, which is the start round of the mode selection period, the sub control unit 90 transmits a corresponding round effect command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). To do. In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a 14R round effect is executed. In the 14R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the 14R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (upper left of the screen in this embodiment). A mode selection screen 900 is displayed. This mode selection screen 900 has the same screen configuration as the mode selection screen 700 (see FIG. 62) in the mode selection period generated during the ending period of the 4R jackpot game described above, and the mode selection screen 700 is reduced. Yes. The display of the mode selection screen 900 notifies the player that the mode is being selected (notification during the selection period, second notification means). The production mode selection on the mode selection screen 900 (upper and lower switching of the mode selection image) is the same as the production mode selection on the mode selection screen 700 described above with reference to FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b). Therefore, the detailed description about effect mode selection in 14R is abbreviate | omitted. Note that the screen configuration (display contents) of the mode selection screen 900 may be different from part or all of the mode selection screen 700 displayed in the mode selection period during the ending period, and the entire display screen 7a has a mode. The selection screen 900 may be displayed.

  Next, when receiving the “15R start command” designating the start of 15R following the start round (14R) of the mode selection period, the sub control unit 90 sends the corresponding round effect command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). ). In response, a 15R round effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the 15R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the 15R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (upper left of the screen in this embodiment). A mode selection screen 900 is displayed. At this time, on the mode selection screen 900, the countdown display is started with the start of 15R. This countdown display is the same as the countdown display (see FIG. 62C) on the mode selection screen 700 during the ending period described above, and the numeric image changes from “3” to “2” as 15R progresses. It decreases to “1” (see FIG. 63D). By this countdown display, the player is informed that the mode selection period is about to end (notification before the end of the selection period, third notification means). Then, the countdown display ends in the middle of 15R (when about 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of 15R), thereby ending the mode selection period.

  Thereafter, the mode selection screen 900 is displayed together with the round effect screen 800 on the display screen 7a until 15R ends, and the selected effect mode (selection result) is displayed on the mode selection screen 900. This selected effect mode (C or D) is set as the effect mode of state C to be executed (started) thereafter, and thereafter, in state C, the effect mode (C or D) set (selected). The directing game effect is executed.

  In this way, when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (highly accurate low base state) occurs, at the predetermined time after the big hit game related to the big hit has been started, ”Or“ effect mode D ”to select a mode selection period. Regarding the generation time (start time) of this mode selection period, a 4R first big hit has occurred in state A (left-handed game) and a 15R third big hit has occurred in state B or C (right-handed game) The time of occurrence differs depending on the case. That is, the timing of the mode selection period is different between the initial hit in state A, which is a game state in which left-handed gaming is performed, and the hit state in state B or C, which is a game state in which right-handed game is performed. It has become a thing. In another way, the type of jackpot game to be executed (type of jackpot), that is, 4R jackpot game (4R first jackpot, 4R fourth jackpot) or 15R jackpot game (15R third jackpot) The generation timing of the mode selection period differs depending on whether or not it is. For this reason, depending on the game state when the big hit occurs (whether it is the first hit or the consecutive villa) and the type of big hit game to be executed, the timing at which the presentation mode can be selected varies, It is possible to make the aspect different.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when a 4R jackpot game is executed, a mode selection period is generated during the ending period after all round games have ended, and the mode selection screen 700 is displayed (see FIG. 62). On the other hand, when a 15R jackpot game is executed, a mode selection period occurs (starts) in the middle of 14R through 15R (final R) during the jackpot game, but in the 13R before the mode selection period occurs (before the start) Then, a notification screen 810 for notifying that the mode selection period starts from the next round is displayed (notification before starting the selection period, see FIG. 63 (a)). In 14R, the mode selection period occurs and the mode selection screen 900 is displayed. Displayed (notification during selection period, see FIG. 63 (b)), and countdown display is executed in 15R (notification before the end of the selection period, see FIGS. 63 (c) and 63 (d)). Thus, in the 4R jackpot game, the player is given the opportunity to select a production mode after the completion of all round games. In the 15R jackpot game, the player has the opportunity to select the production mode before all round games are finished. Given to. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the production mode selection from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to give a different impression to the player regarding the production mode selection.

  Also, the ending period for 4R jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds is longer than the ending period for 15R jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds, and the mode selection period is generated using the ending period for the 4R jackpot. ing. For this reason, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible the negative image for the player that the number of rounds (the number of winning prize balls) is small compared to the 15R jackpot and the execution period of the jackpot game is short, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the gaming interest Become.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a 15R jackpot game is executed, the player is prompted to select an effect mode after the jackpot game over a plurality of round games (13R to 15R in this embodiment). Yes. For this reason, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in selecting the production mode. Further, the mode selection period is from the start of 14R (predetermined round game) to the middle of 15R (next round game), and the notification (selection period) related to the production mode selection from the start to the end of the mode selection period. Notification before start, notification during selection period, notification before selection period end). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the opportunity to select the production mode without noticing the occurrence of the mode selection period.

[Direction with low accuracy and low bass]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 70, main effects performed in the low-accuracy and low-base state will be described. Here, FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of effects performed in the low probability low base state. FIG. 68 is a screen diagram (No. 1) showing a specific example of the effect performed in the low probability low base state. FIG. 69 is a screen diagram (No. 2) showing a specific example of the effect performed in the low probability low base state. FIG. 70 is a screen diagram (No. 3) showing a specific example of the effect performed in the low probability and low base state.

  As shown in FIG. 1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, the vertical widths of these display screens 71a and 72a are (first An image display device that is sufficiently narrower than the vertical width of the first display screen 7a (of the one image display device 7) is provided. On the premise of this configuration, when the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a are illustrated together, the images displayed on the display screens 71a and 72a are reduced, and the visual recognition thereof is reduced. There are concerns that it will be difficult. 68, the vertical widths of the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a are made substantially the same as the vertical width of the first display screen 7a for convenience of explanation. The image displayed on the display screen is illustrated.

In the following description based on FIGS. 67 to 84, for the convenience of explanation, the first effect hold 9a indicating that the first special symbol success / failure determination is held is simply referred to as a “hold icon”, and the hold icon The display area to be displayed is referred to as a hold icon display area 9c (in place of the first effect hold display area 9c). In addition, “the icon” as a variation suggestion image that suggests that the first special symbol and the first effect symbol 8 are being displayed is displayed in the icon display area 9e (see, for example, FIG. 68A). I will explain as a thing.
Each of the effects described based on FIGS. 67 to 84 includes a change effect in the change effect pattern set by the change effect pattern setting process in step S4505 in FIG. 52 and a notice effect setting process in step S4506 in FIG. This is realized by transmitting a change effect start command instructing execution of the notice effect set by the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, and the image control board 100 performing processing based on the change effect start command. The

  In FIG. 68 (A), in order to notify that the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e is “lost” The state where the first effect image 8 shown is stopped and displayed is illustrated. On the other hand, when the first special symbol success / failure determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon (hold icon indicated by a black circle in FIG. 68A) displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is executed. In the 1 special symbol display 41a, the first special symbol is variably displayed, and the first special symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, on the first display screen 7a, the first hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, the shift process of the three symbol sequences in the effect symbol display area 7b is started (see FIGS. 67A and 68B). Specifically, in the effect symbol display area 7b, a part of a symbol line of effect symbols in which numbers "1" to "9" are continuously written in the vertical direction from the bottom to the top are three rows in the horizontal direction. As the first special symbol variation display is started, the scroll display of the three symbol sequences is started so that these symbol sequences scroll from top to bottom.

  Here, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination performed at the start of the first special symbol variation display is “losing” and it is determined that the reach effect is not performed, the first special symbol variation display is performed. At the end of the game, three effect symbols indicating a break (for example, “458”) are pseudo-stopped, and when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the three effect symbols are permanently stopped. (See FIG. 67 (B)).

  Here, “pseudo stop” means that the effect symbol is swung on the spot without almost moving, and “actual stop” means that the effect symbol is completely stopped.

  On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “big hit”, or when it is determined to perform a reach effect of “losing”, for example, during the variation display of the first special symbol, A predetermined left symbol (for example, four symbols) is pseudo-stopped in the left column of the symbol display region 7b, and then the right symbol (for example, four symbols) indicating the same effect symbol as the left symbol is displayed in the right column of the effect symbol display region 7b. A pre-reach effect is made to make a pseudo stop. As a result of such pre-reach effects, reach is established when the same left symbol and right symbol are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 67C).

  Note that, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a so-called pseudo-continuous effect may be performed as a pre-reach effect before such reach establishment. This pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that makes it appear as if the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner several times in the effect symbol display area 7b during the special symbol change display. When this pseudo-continuous effect is executed before the reach is established, the following effect display is performed.

  That is, when a predetermined time elapses after the first special symbol variation display is started, for example, the left symbol (for example, four symbols) is pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 68 (C)), and then the right symbol and Different symbols on the right (for example, one symbol) are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 68 (D)), and thereafter, seven symbols are pseudo-stopped as medium symbols for informing the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 68 (E)). .

  In this embodiment, the case where the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is notified by pseudo-stopping the 7 symbols in the middle row will be described. However, in another embodiment, the player performs a pseudo-continuous effect such as “NEXT”, for example. You may make it alert | report the execution of a pseudo-continuous production by carrying out the pseudo stop of the recognizable special symbol to a middle row.

  As described above, when the 7 symbols in the middle row are pseudo-stopped after the different symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, the pseudo second-stamped variation effect is started following the pseudo first-stamped variation effect. The Specifically, after the character “× 2” suggesting the start of the fluctuating second-stage variation effect is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the character “× 2” is displayed on the first display. A small display is made in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and accordingly, scroll display of the three symbol rows is resumed (see FIG. 68 (F)).

  Then, when a variation effect pattern that establishes reach during the pseudo second-sequence variation effect is set at the start of variation display of the first special symbol this time, the predetermined variation after the pseudo second-sequence variation effect is started. When time elapses, the left symbol (for example, two symbols) is pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 68 (G)), and then the same right symbol (for example, two symbols) as the left symbol is pseudo-stopped to reach. (See FIG. 68H).

  Heretofore, the case where “pre-reach pseudo-ream” in which the seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row before the reach is established and the pseudo-ream effect is performed has been described as an example, but the left symbol and the right symbol are the same There is a case where “post-reach pseudo-ream” is performed in which after the effect symbols are pseudo-stopped, the seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row to execute the pseudo-ream effect.

  As described above, when the same effect symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol is pseudo-stopped and reach is established, the player expects that the same effect symbol as the effect symbol (reach symbol) stops in the middle row A predetermined reach effect is performed. In the present embodiment, as a reach effect that can be executed in accordance with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state, as illustrated in FIG. 67, normal short reach, normal long reach, first SP reach, There are five types of reach production: 2SP reach and SPSP reach.

  The normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)) is the reach effect with the lowest jackpot reliability among the above five types of reach effects (for example, the jackpot reliability: about 2%). This normal short reach is a reach effect in which the effect execution time is shorter than the normal long reach described later. When the reach is established, first, the normal short reach is performed (see FIGS. 67 (C) and (F)). When this normal short reach is performed, when reach is established, the scroll speed of the middle symbol row gradually decreases, and the middle symbol or reach symbol that is the same as the reach symbol between the left symbol and the right symbol that forms the reach. Scroll display of the middle symbol row is performed to pseudo-stop middle symbols different from (see FIG. 68 (I)). In FIG. 68 (I), one symbol “1” less than the reach symbol passes on the effective line between the left symbol and the right symbol, and the same middle symbol as the reach symbol (here, two symbols) is the effective line. The situation of approaching is illustrated.

  Here, when the variation effect pattern for notifying the winning is set in the normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)), the winning notification effect (see FIG. 67 (G)) is performed in the normal short reach. Specifically, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination of this time is “big hit”, the same middle symbol as the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line, so that the doublet (for example, “222”) After the effect symbols are pseudo-stopped, a hit notification effect is performed in which these effect symbols are stopped as they are. On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “losing”, an intermediate symbol different from the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the active line, and the effect symbol of the reach losing eye (for example, “232”) is displayed. After pseudo-stopping, a loss notification effect is performed in which these effect symbols are stopped as they are.

  On the other hand, when a variation production pattern that develops from normal short reach to another reach production is set, the following production is performed. For example, when a variation production pattern is set in which normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)) is developed to normal long reach (see FIG. 67 (H)) and a winning effect is set for normal long reach, the normal short reach is set. At the end of the reach, a long development suggestion effect (see FIG. 69 (A)) suggesting the development to the normal long reach is performed, and the high-speed scrolling of the middle symbol row is resumed, and the normal long reach (FIG. 67 (H (See))) Reach production develops. In this normal long reach, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), an effect display in which a predetermined character expects a uniform pattern is performed in the central area of the first display screen 7a.

  The normal long reach is a reach production with the next highest hit reliability after the normal short reach among the above five types of reach production (for example, the jackpot reliability: about 2%). In most cases, the normal long reach is the normal long reach. Will not be developed into other reach productions, and the normal long reach will produce a loss notification effect (see Fig. 67 (G)). A hitting notification effect (see FIG. 67 (G)) may be performed. Further, when a variation production pattern that develops from normal long reach to another reach production is set, the normal long reach to the first SP reach (see FIG. 67 (I)) or SPSP reach (see FIG. 67 (N)). ) The reach production will develop.

  Here, the first SP reach is a reach production with the next highest jackpot reliability after the normal long reach (for example, the jackpot reliability: about 11%). When developing from the normal long reach to the first SP reach, the following is performed. Effect display is performed. That is, after the same middle symbol as the reach symbol has passed on the effective line, the high-speed scrolling of the middle symbol row is resumed, and the reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that are pseudo-stopped in the effect symbol display area 7b are: While being reduced while maintaining the reach state, the first display screen 7a moves to the upper left area and the upper right area, respectively. And the predetermined | prescribed effect display which expects a big hit is performed in the center area | region of the 1st display screen 7a.

  As described above, when the first SP reach is developed, a winning notification effect (see FIG. 67 (K)) for notifying the winning is performed in the first SP reach, and a predetermined developed gimmick effect (see FIG. 67). 67 (L)) to SPSP reach (see FIG. 67 (N)).

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)) is developed to the first SP reach (see FIG. 67 (I)) without passing through the normal long reach. In some cases, the normal short reach directly develops to the second SP reach (see FIG. 67 (J)).

  Here, the second SP reach is a reach production having a slightly higher jackpot reliability than the first SP reach (for example, the jackpot reliability: about 12%). When developing from the normal short reach to the second SP reach, the following is performed. Effect display is performed. That is, after the same middle symbol as the reach symbol has passed on the effective line, the high-speed scrolling of the middle symbol row is resumed, and the reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that are pseudo-stopped in the effect symbol display area 7b are: While being reduced while maintaining the reach state, the first display screen 7a moves to the upper left area and the upper right area, respectively. And the predetermined | prescribed effect display which expects a big hit is performed in the center area | region of the 1st display screen 7a.

  Thus, although the 1st SP reach and the 2nd SP reach perform the effect display which expects a big hit with the same screen composition, these reach effects differ from each other. Specifically, in the first SP reach (see FIG. 67 (I)), if the player's character prevents the attack of the enemy character, the player wins the game. Conversely, if the player's character cannot prevent the enemy character's attack, the player loses. An effect display is performed. On the other hand, the second SP reach (see FIG. 67 (J)) is configured as a mission effect, and when the player's character succeeds in the mission, a big hit is made, and conversely, when the player's character fails in the mission, an effect display is displayed. .

  When the first SP reach and the second SP reach are developed, since the jackpot reliability of these reach effects is relatively low, the lost notification effect is the hit notification effect in the winning notification effect (see FIG. 67 (K)). Easier to implement. For this reason, when the player develops to the first SP reach or the second SP reach, the player, as in the case of developing to the normal long reach, the SPSP reach (see FIG. 67 (L)) via the development gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)). 67 (N)).

  Here, the SPSP reach is a reach effect having the highest jackpot reliability among the five types of reach effects. In this SPSP reach (refer to FIG. 67 (N)), in this embodiment, the development pattern always develops via a development gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)) that suggests development to the SPSP reach. 67, as shown in FIG. 67, an effect pattern in which an extended gimmick effect is generated immediately after the reach is established and the SPSP reach is developed, and an effect pattern in which an extended gimmick effect is generated during the normal long reach and the SPSP reach is developed. And an effect pattern in which a development gimmick effect occurs during the first SP reach and develops into an SPSP reach, and an effect pattern in which an evolution gimmick effect occurs during the second SP reach and develops into an SPSP reach.

  For this reason, the player can enjoy the game while expecting an extended gimmick effect to be performed at some timing during the variable display of the first special symbol (and effect symbol). Note that in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is high before reaching or immediately after reaching reach, during normal long reach, during the first SP reach, during the second SP reach, etc. during the first special symbol variation display. Preliminary effect with relatively high jackpot reliability called first big chance notice (see FIG. 67 (E)) suggesting that it is relatively high (big hit reliability: about 33% (see FIG. 75 (B))) When this first big chance notice is generated, it is easy to develop into a highly reliable reach production (SPSP reach in the present embodiment).

  For this reason, the player first notices the first big chance (see FIG. 67 (E)) during the first special symbol variation display, and then develops a gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)). You can enjoy the game while expecting to do. The rank-up effect that can suggest the occurrence of the first big chance notice or the first big chance notice will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75.

  As is clear from the notation of FIG. 67, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the case where the development gimmick effect directly develops to the SPSP reach, and the second big chance notice from the development gimmick effect (FIG. 67 (M) To SPSP reach via reference). The second big chance notice is a notice effect that suggests that the jackpot reliability is extremely high (the possibility that the hit notification effect is executed is relatively high) (the jackpot reliability: about 58%: FIG. 75 (B)), the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the second great chance notice will be subsequently generated when the development gimmick effect is generated.

  Next, a specific example of the production performed when the development gimmick production occurs in the final stage of the normal long reach and develops to the SPSP reach via the second big chance notice will be described. In the case of developing directly from the normal long reach to the SPSP reach without going through the first SP reach, for example, at the end of the normal long reach (see FIG. 69 (B)), the production design showing the reach loss eye is pseudo-stopped. A pseudo losing effect (see FIG. 69 (C)) that makes it appear is performed. After that, a “roulette chance” character indicating that a development destination selection effect for selecting the type of SPSP reach as the development destination is performed is displayed on the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 80 (H)). A selection effect (see FIG. 69D) is performed.

  When the development destination selection effect is developed, as illustrated in FIG. 69D, panels corresponding to each of the four types of SPSP reach having different jackpot reliability are displayed. Specifically, a panel corresponding to an A battle where the player's character battles with the enemy character A, a panel corresponding to a B battle where the player's character battles with the enemy character B, and a C battle where the player's character battles with the enemy character C. And a panel corresponding to the X battle in which the player character battles with the enemy character X are displayed on the first display screen 7a. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 69 (D), the four panels all indicate the degree of expectation that the victory effect will be performed when they develop into the corresponding SPSP reach. It has been suggested that the degree of expectation that a winning effect is performed and a jackpot gaming state is different from each other.

  Further, when the development destination selection effect is developed, in addition to the above four panels, the first effect button image simulating the first effect button 63a and the remaining effective period of time during which the operation of the first effect button 63a is effective are shown. The lifetime gauge is displayed. When the development destination selection effect is developed, a roulette effect that highlights the four panels in order is started before the effective period starts. Note that FIG. 69D illustrates a state in which a panel corresponding to the A battle is highlighted. In this way, the effective period is started in a state where the roulette effect is being performed, and when the player operates the first effect button 63a during the effective period, the roulette effect ends and one of the panels is highlighted. It will be in the state. Here, for example, when the panel corresponding to the A battle is highlighted, the development suggestion effect (FIG. 69) is displayed in which the panel corresponding to the A battle is enlarged and displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a. (See (E)).

  In the development destination selection effect, the SPSP reach highlighted at the timing when the player operates the first effect button 63a is not necessarily selected, and the effect pattern set at the start of the current symbol variation is not selected. Based on this, either panel is selected.

  As described above, when the development destination suggestion effect that suggests development to any one of SPSP reach is performed, the development gimmick effect (see FIGS. 67 (L) and 69 (F)) is necessarily performed. This development gimmick effect is an effect suggesting the development to SPSP by using the movable decorative member 14 as a director. In the developed gimmick effect, although not shown in FIG. 69 (F), the movable decorative member 14 moves from the initial position to fall to the effect position covering the central area of the first display screen 7a, and the first display A predetermined developed gimmick effect image is displayed in a peripheral area that is not covered with the movable decorative member 14 on the screen 7 a, and a developed gimmick effect sound corresponding to these effects is output from the speaker 67.

  Next, when the development gimmick effect develops to the second great chance notice, when the movable decorative member 14 returns to the initial position and a predetermined time elapses, the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display are displayed. On the screen 72a, a predetermined second big chance notice image including the characters “Gekiatsu” is displayed, and a second big chance notice that outputs a predetermined second big chance notice sound from the speaker 67 is performed. The second big chance notice may be any aspect of production as long as the player can recognize that the jackpot reliability is extremely high. For example, the second big chance notice is accompanied by the operation of the movable decorative member 14. There may be. Moreover, in other embodiment, the operation | movement of the production | presentation actor provided in the front frame 51 or the outer frame 53 may be accompanied.

  As described above, when the second great chance notice is performed following the development gimmick production, the SPSP reach is started. In this SPSP reach, first, a title display for notifying the type of SPSP reach is performed (see FIG. 69H). In the example shown in FIG. 69, the panel corresponding to the A battle is selected by the development destination selection effect that can be performed prior to the development gimmick effect, so that in FIG. It is illustrated that a title is displayed that suggests the development of an SPSP reach (A battle).

  In the title display performed at the start of the SPSP reach, there are a case where characters constituting the title display are displayed in white, a case where they are displayed in red, and a case where they are displayed in rainbow colors.

  On the other hand, from the time when the title is displayed until the end of the SPSP reach, an effect display indicating that the player character and the enemy character (here, the enemy character A) repeat attack and defense is performed. Then, when the end of the SPSP reach is reached, a first effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 69 (I)) that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a is performed. Specifically, a first effect button image simulating the first effect button 63a and an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the effective period in which the operation of the first effect button 63a is effective are displayed.

  In the first effect button operation promotion effect, the first effect button 63a is operated by the player during the effective period, or the effective period ends without the first effect button 63a being operated. An effect called cut-in is performed in which a predetermined cut-in image is superimposed and displayed on the effect image displayed on the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. This cut-in is a notice effect that suggests how much the jackpot reliability is, and in this embodiment, a green cut-in (see FIG. 70A) for displaying a green cut-in image in a superimposed manner is performed. A red cut-in (see FIG. 70B) for displaying a red cut-in image in a superimposed manner, and a gold cut-in for displaying a gold cut-in image in a superimposed manner (see FIG. 70C). May be performed.

  Thus, when the cut-in occurs and the SPSP reach ends, the second effect button operation promotion effect (see FIGS. 70D to 70F) that prompts the player to operate the second effect button 63b is performed. . During the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, the second effect button image imitating the second effect button 63b, characters indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b, “Press!”, And the effective period And an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of. In the present embodiment, when the second effect button image indicating the small second effect button 63b is displayed as the second effect button image (see FIG. 70D), the second effect button image having a medium size is displayed. When the second effect button image showing the effect button 63b is displayed (see FIG. 70E) and when the second effect button image showing the large second effect button 63b is displayed (see FIG. 70F). )

  When the player operates the second effect button 63b during the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, a winning notification effect (see FIG. 67 (O)) is provided as an operation corresponding effect according to the operation. Done. In other words, if the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit, the winning effect indicating that the player's own character wins the enemy character and the Zoro eyes effect symbol are temporarily stopped and then stopped. Notification production is performed. On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is a loss, the defeat effect indicating that the player's character is defeated by the enemy character, and the lose that causes the reach loser eye effect symbol to be pseudo-stopped and then stopped. Notification production is performed.

  Note that the size of the second effect button 63b indicated by the second effect button image displayed during the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect corresponds to the jackpot reliability, and the medium-sized second When the second effect button image indicating the effect button 63b is displayed (see FIG. 70E), the second effect button image indicating the smaller second effect button 63b is displayed (FIG. 70D). ))), The hit notification effect (see FIG. 70G) is more likely to be executed as the operation-corresponding effect. In addition, when the second effect button image indicating the small second effect button 63b is displayed (see FIG. 70D), the second effect button image indicating the medium-sized second effect button 63b. Compared with the case where the message is displayed (see FIG. 70E), the loss notification effect (see FIG. 70H) is more likely to be executed as the operation-compatible effect.

  In addition, the second effect button image showing the large second effect button 63b can be displayed when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is successful, but is not displayed when it is lost. There is. For this reason, it can be said that the 2nd effect button operation promotion effect which displays the 2nd effect button image which shows the big 2nd effect button 63b is a notification effect with 100% of jackpot reliability.

[About chances during SPSP reach]
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a description will be given of a chance increase during SPSP reach. Here, FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the chance increase during the SPSP reach.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the title display (see FIG. 69H) performed in the early stage of the SPSP reach has a jackpot reliability of about 15% when the color of the characters constituting the title display is white. When the character color is red, the jackpot reliability is approximately 37%, and when the character color is rainbow, the jackpot reliability is 100%.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the jackpot reliability when the characters constituting the title display are displayed in white or red is fixed regardless of the type of SPSP reach, but in other embodiments, the title is displayed. The jackpot reliability when displaying the characters constituting the display in white or red may be made different depending on the type of SPSP reach.

  Although not shown in the figure, the frame lamp 66 is made to emit light in a predetermined emission color when an effect display showing the state where the player character and the enemy character repeat attack and defense is performed in the middle of the SPSP reach. In some cases, an effect called a frame flash that outputs a predetermined sound effect from the speaker 67 is performed, and the jackpot reliability of the frame flash that emits the frame lamp 66 in red is about 53%. The big hit reliability of the frame flash that emits light at 100 is 100%.

  Further, although not shown in the figure, during the SPSP reach, a predetermined music corresponding to the SPSP reach is output from the speaker 67. On the other hand, during SPSP reach, there may be a chance-up effect called a song change that changes this predetermined song to another special song. This song change has a jackpot reliability of about 70%. It has become a chance up production.

  In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 71, a green cut-in is generated for the operation of the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 69 (I)) during the SPSP reach. The jackpot reliability when it occurs is about 7%, the jackpot reliability when a red cut-in occurs is about 56%, and the jackpot reliability when a gold cut-in occurs is about 71%.

  In the present embodiment, a case where the jackpot reliability of the blue cut-in, red cut-in, and gold cut-in is fixed regardless of the type of SPSP reach will be described. In the other embodiments, the above three types are described. The cut-in jackpot reliability may be made different depending on the type of SPSP reach.

  On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 71, with respect to the second effect button operation promotion effect in the final stage of SPSP reach, an effect of displaying the second effect button image indicating the small second effect button 63b (see FIG. 70D). The jackpot reliability is about 16%, and the jackpot reliability of the effect (see FIG. 70E) for displaying the second effect button image showing the medium second effect button 63b is about 55%, which is large. The jackpot reliability of the effect (see FIG. 70F) for displaying the second effect button image showing the second effect button 63b is 100%. Although not shown in the figure, a vibration motor for vibrating these effect buttons is provided at a position close to the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b, and the second effect button at the end of the SPSP reach. In the operation promotion effect, there is a case where a chance-up effect that the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b vibrate is performed before the effective period starts. This chance-up effect using the vibration motor can be executed when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination of this time is a big hit, while the big hit reliability that is not executed when the game is lost is 100%. It has become.

[About rank-up production]
Next, the rank-up effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the rank-up effect. FIG. 73 is a screen diagram (part 1) showing a specific example of the rank-up effect. FIG. 74 is a screen diagram (part 2) showing a specific example of the rank-up effect.

  The rank-up effect is a notice effect that is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol, and is configured as a step effect that changes the display mode of the character image (see, for example, FIG. 73D) step by step. In the present embodiment, the rank-up effect can be changed step by step up to any one of five steps or less with the fifth step as an upper limit. That is, in the present embodiment, the rank-up effect started in the first stage ends with the first stage, and the rank-up effect started in the first stage finally develops to the second stage and ends. The rank-up effect started in the first stage finally develops to the third stage and ends, and the rank-up effect started in the first stage finally develops to the fourth stage. The rank-up effect started in the first stage eventually develops to the fifth stage and ends.

  Hereinafter, a specific example of the rank-up effect will be described by taking as an example the case where the rank-up effect started in the first stage finally develops to the fifth stage and ends.

  In FIG. 73 (A), in order to notify that the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e is “lost” The state where the effect design to be displayed is stopped is illustrated. On the other hand, when the first special symbol success / failure determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon (hold icon indicated by a black circle in FIG. 73A) displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is executed. In the 1 special symbol display 41a, the first special symbol is variably displayed, and the first special symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, on the first display screen 7a, the first hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. The shift process is performed, and the variable display of the three symbol sequences in the effect symbol display area 7b is started (see FIG. 73B). In addition, in the screen diagrams after FIG. 73 (C), the representation of the effect symbols displayed on the first display screen 7a is omitted for convenience of explanation.

  Here, when it is set to execute the rank-up effect during the variation display of the first special symbol this time, when the variation display of the three symbol sequences is started and a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses, A white character image used for the rank-up effect is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 73C). Thus, when the white character image used for the rank-up effect is displayed, the character movement effect for moving the white character image from the first display screen 7a to the second display screen 71a (see FIG. 72A). ) Is performed. Specifically, the white character image displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a is moved leftward (in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 73C), and the left end of the first display screen 7a. The white character image that has been moved to the first display screen 7a is simultaneously erased from the first display screen 7a, and at the same time, the white character image is displayed on the second display screen 71a (see FIGS. 73C and 73D).

  By performing such a character movement effect, it is possible to make it appear that the white character image displayed on the first display screen 7a has moved to the second display screen 71a. When a rank-up effect is executed, a character image that is larger than the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a after the character movement effect is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a, and the rank-up effect is increased. Production begins.

  For this reason, it is easier for the player to notice that the character image has been displayed than when the character image is displayed on the second display screen 71a and the rank-up effect is started without performing the character movement effect. It is possible to effectively notify that the production has started.

  Immediately after the character movement effect is performed, the rank-up effect is in the first stage, and a white character image corresponding to the first stage is displayed on the second display screen 71a (see FIG. 73D). ). On the other hand, when the rank-up effect is changed step by step after the second step, a predetermined charge effect (see FIG. 72B) is performed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 73E, another character image having the same white color as the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a (hereinafter referred to as “snowman image”) is the first. In order to inject energy into the character image on the second display screen 71a displayed on the display screen 7a, an effect display representing a state in which the snowman image throws a white star-shaped item against the character image is performed. Then, when the rank-up effect is developed to the second stage, the character color change success effect (FIG. 72 (C), FIG. 73 (), in which the portion below the knee of the character image is changed to blue corresponding to the second stage. F) is performed.

  On the other hand, when the rank-up effect is not developed to the second stage, a character color change failure effect (see FIG. 72D) is performed in which the display color of the character image does not change from white even if the charge effect is performed.

  When the rank-up effect is developed from the second stage to the third stage, the second charge effect (see FIG. 72B) is performed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 73G, the same blue snowman image as the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and the character image is further displayed. In order to inject energy, an effect display that shows the snowman image throwing a blue star-shaped item against the character image is performed. Then, when the rank-up effect is developed to the third stage, the character color change that changes the character image that is blue below the knees of both legs into a character image that has both legs green (corresponding to the third stage). A successful performance (see FIGS. 72C and 73H) is performed.

  On the other hand, if the rank-up effect is not developed into the third stage, a character color change failure effect (see FIG. 72D) is performed in which the display color of the character image does not change from blue even if the charge effect is performed.

  When the rank-up effect is developed from the third stage to the fourth stage, the third charge effect (see FIG. 72B) is performed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 73 (I), the same green snowman image as the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and further to the character image. In order to inject energy, an effect display that shows the snowman image throwing a green star-shaped item against the character image is performed. Then, when the rank-up effect is developed into the fourth stage, the character color change success effect (in which the character image whose both feet are green is changed to a character image other than both hands is red (corresponding to the fourth stage) ( 72 (C) and 74 (A)).

  On the other hand, if the rank-up effect is not developed into the fourth stage, a character color change failure effect (see FIG. 72D) is performed in which the display color of the character image does not change from green even if the charge effect is performed.

  When the rank-up effect is developed from the fourth stage to the upper limit of the fifth stage, the fourth charge effect (see FIG. 72B) is performed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 74B, the same red snowman image as the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and the character image is further displayed. In order to inject energy, an effect display representing a state in which the snowman image throws a red star-shaped item against the character image is performed. Then, when the rank-up effect is developed to the fifth stage, the character color change success effect (in which the entire character image other than both hands is red) is changed to a golden character image (corresponding to the fifth stage) ( 72C and 74C) are performed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the rank-up effect is executed, the character image is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a to start the rank-up effect. A configuration is employed in which an image is displayed on the second display screen 71a to change the character image. As described above, since the character image is displayed on the first display screen 7a before the character image is displayed on the second display screen 71a, it is possible to easily notify the start of the rank-up effect. . In addition, since a movement effect that makes the character image appear to move from the first display screen 7a to the second display screen 71a is performed, the line of sight of the player who is gazing at the first display screen 7a is displayed on the second display screen 71a. Can be guided to.

  So far, the case where the rank-up effect has been developed to the upper limit of the fifth stage has been described, but in this embodiment, there is a possibility that the jackpot game will be executed in response to the rank-up effect having been developed to the fifth stage. A configuration is adopted in which a first great chance notice that suggests a certain event is executed. Specifically, when the rank-up effect finally develops to the stage below the fourth stage and ends, that is, the display color of the character image finally changes to a color below red and the rank-up effect ends. In this case, there are a case where the first big chance notice is executed after the rank-up effect is finished (see FIG. 72G) and a case where the first big chance notice is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the rank-up effect finally develops to the fifth stage and ends, that is, when the display color of the character image finally changes to gold and the rank-up effect ends, the rank-up effect ends. After ending, the first big chance notice is always executed (see FIGS. 72C and 72F). For this reason, when the rank-up effect is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol in which the first big chance notice is not executed, the rank-up effect that finally develops to the fifth stage is not executed. Finally, a rank-up effect that only develops up to the fourth stage or less is executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a rank-up effect that finally develops to the upper limit of the fifth stage and ends is executed, a configuration in which the first big chance notice is always executed after that is adopted. Therefore, when the display color of the character image changes to gold, the countdown effect (see FIG. 72 (E)) that counts down the remaining time until the first big chance notice is started is also executed. Adopted.

  For this reason, when the character color change success effect (see FIG. 74C) for changing the display color of the character image to gold is performed, the word “until the big chance notice” is changed from the first display screen 7a to the second display screen. A movement display that makes it appear as if moving to 71a is performed (see FIGS. 74D to 74G). A white number “4” indicating that the remaining time until the timing immediately before the first big chance notice (see FIG. 74 (I)) is 4 seconds immediately above the icon display area 9e. Is displayed (see FIG. 74D), and every time one second has elapsed since the countdown effect image was displayed, the numbers indicated by the countdown effect image are “4”, “3”, “2”. ”,“ 1 ”, and“ 0 ”are counted down (see FIGS. 74D to 74G).

  In FIG. 74, since the remaining time from the time when the display color of the character image is changed to gold to the timing immediately before the first big chance notice is executed is 4 seconds, the number indicated by the countdown effect image is Although the case where the initial value is “4” is illustrated, the remaining time from the time when the display color of the character image changes to gold to the timing immediately before the first big chance notice is executed is variable. The initial value of the number indicated by the countdown effect image is also variable. That is, for example, a countdown effect may be performed from “5”, or a countdown effect may be performed from “3”.

  In this way, when the countdown effect related to the rank-up effect is performed and the number indicated by the countdown effect image becomes “0”, the character image changed to gold moves from the second display screen 71a to the first display screen 7a. A character movement effect (see FIG. 74H) that pretends to be performed is performed. Then, when the golden character image moves to the central area of the first display screen 7a by this character movement effect, an effect image showing a state where power is exhausted in the character image is displayed on the first display screen 7a. The characters “Great Chance” are displayed on the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a (see FIG. 74I), and a predetermined sound effect corresponding to the first big chance notice is output from the speaker 67. .

  The first big chance notice may be executed even if the rank-up effect is not performed, but the countdown effect image related to the rank-up effect is displayed immediately above the icon display area 9e on the first display screen 7a. When the countdown effect that counts down the number indicated by the countdown effect image is executed, the first big chance notice is executed according to the end of the countdown effect.

  Even when the display color of the character image finally changes only to red or less, the first big chance notice may be executed, but the first big chance notice may not be executed. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when the display color of the character image finally changes only to red or less, even if the first big chance notice is executed, immediately before the first big chance notice is executed. The above-described countdown effect is not executed based on the timing.

  In this way, when the first big chance notice occurs during the display of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the second big chance notice (see FIG. 67 (M)) occurs after that, or the money is displayed at the end of the SPSP reach. Cut-in (see FIG. 70C) may occur. For this reason, when the first big chance notice occurs, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the second big chance notice and the gold cut-in to be combined.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 74, the case where the rank-up effect is developed step by step has been described as an example, but the rank-up effect is achieved by one charge effect and character color change effect. There may be multiple stages of development. For example, when a charge effect (see FIG. 73 (G)) showing that the snowman image throws a blue star-shaped item on the blue character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is removed, both hands are excluded. A character color change success effect (see FIG. 74A) in which a part of the character image changes to red may be performed. Further, for example, when a charge effect (see FIG. 73 (G)) showing that the snowman image throws a blue star-shaped item on the blue character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is performed. A character color change success effect (see FIG. 74C) in which the entire image changes to gold may be performed.

(Functional effects by rank-up production)
According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the character image is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a when the rank-up effect is started, so that the player who is gazing at the first display screen 7a It is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of the problem of not being aware of the start of the rank-up effect. In addition, after the start of the rank-up effect, the character image is displayed on the second display screen 71a (instead of the central region of the first display screen 7a), so that the display area where the character image is displayed is fixed. It is possible to execute a rank-up effect that is more interesting and highly varied than in the case of being present. In addition, after the start of the rank-up effect, the character image is displayed on the second display screen 71a instead of the central region of the first display screen 7a. For example, the character image is displayed using the central region of the first display screen 7a. It is possible to execute a production of the above, and a high production effect can be obtained by a synergistic effect of the rank-up production and other productions.

  In the present embodiment, the character image displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a is larger than the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a. For this reason, when the size of these effect images is the same, or when the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is larger than the character image displayed on the central area of the first display screen 7a. In comparison, it is easier for the player to recognize that the rank-up effect has started, and the player cannot recognize that the rank-up effect has started, and the original effect of the rank-up effect cannot be obtained. It is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of problems.

  Further, when the rank-up effect develops to the fifth stage, the first great chance notice is executed, so that the player can expect the rank-up effect to develop to the upper limit of the fifth stage, and the rank-up effect is achieved. It is possible to obtain a high stage effect by the synergistic effect of the first big chance notice.

(Features of rank-up production)
FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability of various notice effects such as a rank-up effect, and FIG. 75 (A) illustrates the characteristics of the rank-up effect. As illustrated in FIG. 75A, when a rank-up effect is performed in which the display color of the character image finally becomes white, the jackpot reliability is about 1%, and the display color of the character image is When a rank-up effect that finally turns blue is performed, the jackpot reliability is about 2%. In addition, when the rank-up effect that the display color of the character image is finally green is performed, the jackpot reliability is about 4%, and the rank-up effect that the display color of the character image is finally red is obtained. When performed, the jackpot reliability is about 23%, and when a rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image is finally gold is performed, the jackpot reliability is about 45%.

  In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 75A, when a rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image is finally gold is performed, the timing until immediately before the first big chance notice is executed. If a countdown effect that counts down the remaining time is performed while a rank-up effect is performed in which the display color of the character image finally becomes red or less, even if the first big chance notice is performed thereafter The countdown effect is not performed.

  Further, as illustrated in FIG. 75A, when a rank-up effect is performed in which the display color of the character image is finally red, or the display color of the character image is finally gold. When the performance is performed, there is a feature that the SPSP reach always develops thereafter. In other words, there is a feature that a rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image is finally red or gold is performed only when a variation effect pattern that finally develops to SPSP reach is set.

  In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 75A, when a rank-up effect is performed in which the display color of the character image is finally gold, a first big chance notice is given with a probability of 100% thereafter. Will occur. This is as described above. On the other hand, if the display color of the character image remains white in the end, the probability that the first big chance notice will occur after that is extremely low, and a rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image is finally blue is achieved. When performed, when the rank-up effect that the display color of the character image finally becomes green is performed, in the order when the rank-up effect that the display color of the character image finally becomes red, The probability that a first big chance notice will occur later increases.

  That is, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute the first big chance notice (see FIG. 74 (I)) that suggests that the possibility of executing the jackpot game is relatively high. Then, in a rank-up effect, when displaying a white character image, displaying a blue character image, and displaying a green character image as a character image that suggests that a jackpot game may be executed. When displaying, when displaying a red character image, when displaying a golden character image, and when displaying a golden character image, the first big chance notice is most easily executed. Yes.

(Variation related to rank-up production)
Note that the following configuration may be adopted for the rank-up effect.
That is, in this embodiment, the case where the charge effect that changes the display color of the character image is performed using a snowman image different from the character image has been described as an example. In other embodiments, for example, the second display screen 71a A character image (common character image) that is common to the character image displayed on the screen is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and the common character image moves toward the character image and is integrated with the character image. You may make it produce an effect and change the display color of a character image.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the display color of the character image is changed stepwise has been described as an example. However, in other embodiments, the size of the character image is changed stepwise or the shape of the character image is changed. It may be changed step by step. In another embodiment, any two of the display color, size, and shape of the character image are changed in stages, or three of the display color, size, and shape of the character image are displayed. May be changed step by step.

  In this embodiment, the case where the display color of a part of the character image is changed stepwise has been described as an example. However, in other embodiments, the entire display color of the character image is changed stepwise. May be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the character image is changed step by step as the step effect image has been described as an example. However, the step effect image is not limited to the character image. It may be changed.

(The jackpot reliability of each production pattern)
FIG. 75B illustrates the jackpot reliability when each notice effect is performed alone and the jackpot reliability when each notice effect is combined. As illustrated in FIG. 75B, when the first big chance notice is executed alone, the jackpot reliability is about 33%. On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 75B, when the first big chance notice is given after the rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image is finally gold is performed. The jackpot reliability by these two types of notice effects is about 49%, and the jackpot reliability is higher than when the first big chance notice is executed alone.

  For this reason, it is possible to make the player expect that the rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image will eventually become gold and the first great chance notice are combined, and the synergistic effect of these notice effects produces a high effect. A production effect can be obtained.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 75B, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a first big chance notice as a notice effect that suggests that the possibility of a big hit game being executed is relatively high. In addition, there is a case where a second big chance notice is performed or a gold cut-in is performed. When the second big chance notice is executed alone, the jackpot reliability is about 58%, and the gold cut-in is performed. Is executed alone, its jackpot reliability is about 58%.

  On the other hand, when the first big chance notice (see FIG. 67 (E)) and the second big chance notice (see FIG. 67 (M)) are combined within the same fluctuation, the jackpot trust by these two kinds of notice effects The degree is about 66%, when the first big chance notice is executed alone (hit reliability: about 33%) or when the second big chance notice is executed alone (hit reliability: about 58%) ) Than the jackpot reliability. For this reason, either the first big chance notice or the second big chance notice is not executed, but the player can expect that these notice effects are combined, and the first big chance notice and Due to the synergistic effect of the second big chance notice, it is possible to obtain a high performance effect.

  In addition, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit, the three types of the first big chance advance notice, the second big chance advance notice, and the gold cut-in are displayed during the change display of the symbol corresponding to the success / failure judgment. Can be combined. On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is a loss, a notice effect pattern that combines the above three types of notice effects is not set during the variable display of the symbol corresponding to this success / failure determination. . That is, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is a loss, the selection of the notice effect pattern that combines the three kinds of notice effects is restricted. For this reason, when the first big chance notice and the second big chance notice are combined within the same fluctuation, the big hit reliability is about 66%, whereas the first big chance notice, the second big chance notice, When the gold cut-in is combined within the same fluctuation, the jackpot reliability by these notice effects is 100%.

  For this reason, when the first big chance notice occurs, it is expected that the second big chance notice will occur, and when these big chance notices occur, it is expected that a gold cut-in will occur. In this way, it is possible to make the player expect that these three types of notice effects are combined, and it is possible to obtain a very high effect by the synergistic effect of these three kinds of notice effects.

[Specific example of the first countdown effect]
Next, a specific example of the first countdown effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 77. Here, FIGS. 76 and 77 are screen views showing a specific example of the first countdown effect.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first countdown effect image indicating a predetermined number is displayed on the first display screen 7a during the first special symbol variation display in the low probability low base state, and the first countdown There is a case where a first countdown effect that counts down the number indicated by the effect image is executed. When this first countdown effect is executed, a predetermined first suggestion effect that suggests that a jackpot game may be executed is executed according to the end of the first countdown effect.

  Hereinafter, a specific example of the first countdown effect will be described by taking as an example a case where the first countdown effect is executed three times during the one-time variation display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state.

  FIG. 76A illustrates a state in which the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon, and the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the icon is started. Has been. When a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the display of the effect symbols is started, the first countdown used for the first countdown effect is displayed in the display area immediately above the hold icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a. An effect image is displayed (see FIG. 76 (B)). Since the first countdown effect is not started for the first time, the first countdown effect image indicating the character “standby” is displayed in the area immediately above the hold icon display area 9c in FIG. The state displayed in is illustrated.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first countdown effect is executed a plurality of times during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the first countdown effect is indicated in order to suggest that effect. The suggestion image that suggests that the execution of is held is displayed on the second display screen 71a. In FIG. 76B, the execution of the first countdown effect three times is held. In order to suggest this, three suggested images including the characters “standby” are displayed on the second display screen 71a.

  After the first countdown effect image related to the first first countdown effect is displayed, the first countdown effect image indicating the character “standby” is displayed at the start timing of the first countdown effect. The first countdown effect image changes to the first countdown effect image indicating the remaining time until the timing immediately before the first suggestion effect is executed in accordance with the end of the first countdown effect (see FIGS. 76B and 76C). Here, since the first first countdown effect has been started, it is displayed on the second display screen 71a in FIGS. 76B and 76C (first first countdown effect). The manner in which the suggestion image (corresponding to) is deleted from the second display screen 71a is illustrated.

  FIG. 76C illustrates a state immediately after the suggestion image corresponding to the first countdown effect for the first time is deleted, but two suggestion images are displayed on the second display screen 71a. Since the state is left as it is, the player can easily recognize that the first countdown effect is performed twice after the first first countdown effect is completed.

  In FIG. 76C, the first countdown effect indicating the number “8:51” is shown to indicate that the remaining time until the timing immediately before the first suggestion effect is executed is 8.51 seconds. The state in which an image is displayed is illustrated, but in the present embodiment, there are cases where this number is displayed in white and there are cases where it is displayed in red, and the latter is a jackpot reliability compared to the former. Is characterized by high.

  In this way, when the first countdown effect is started for the first time, the number indicated by the first countdown effect image decreases with the passage of time, and finally the number of “0:00” is set. (See FIG. 76D). Then, since the above-described pseudo-continuous effect is executed immediately after the first first countdown effect is finished (as the first suggestion effect), the number “0:00” indicated by the first countdown effect image is displayed. Is switched to the character “NEXT” (see FIGS. 76D and 76E), and when the character “NEXT” is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. The first countdown effect image is erased from the first display screen 7a (see FIGS. 76E and 76F).

  Next, when the first countdown effect image is deleted from the first display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 76 (F), the left 6 symbols, the right 2 symbols, and the middle 7 symbols are simultaneously pseudo-stopped. A pseudo-continuous production is performed. Then, in order to start the pseudo second-sequence variation effect following the pseudo first-sequence variation effect, the character “× 2” indicating the start of the pseudo second-sequence variation effect is the central area of the first display screen 7a. The character “× 2” is displayed small in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the scroll display of the three symbol rows is resumed accordingly (FIG. 76 (F ) And (G)).

  When the pseudo second-stage variation effect is started, the second first countdown effect that has been put on hold is immediately started. For this reason, as illustrated in FIGS. 76 (F) and 76 (G), the first countdown effect image indicating the number “8:51” is newly added to the area immediately above the hold icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a. And the suggestion image corresponding to the second first countdown effect displayed on the second display screen 71a is deleted.

  In this way, when the second first countdown effect is started with the start of the pseudo second-stage variation effect, the number indicated by the first countdown effect image is counted down. For example, at the timing immediately after reach is established for one symbol, the number indicated by the first countdown effect image is “0:00” (see FIG. 76 (H)), and immediately after that, the first countdown effect image is displayed. When the number “0:00” is changed to the character “NEXT” (see FIGS. 76 (H) and (I)), and the character “NEXT” is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), Prior to the execution of the effect, the first countdown effect image is erased from the first display screen 7a (see FIGS. 76I and 77A).

  Next, when the first countdown effect image is erased from the first display screen 7a, as illustrated in FIG. 77 (A), the middle between the left 1 symbol and the right 1 symbol that have been pseudo-stopped first. A second pseudo-continuous effect is performed to pseudo-stop 7 symbols (see FIG. 77A). Then, in order to start the pseudo third continuous variation effect following the pseudo second continuous variation effect, the character “× 3” indicating the start of the pseudo third continuous variation effect is the central area of the first display screen 7a. The character “× 3” is displayed small in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the scroll display of the three symbol rows is resumed accordingly (FIG. 77A). ) And (B)).

  When the pseudo third-stage variation effect is started, the third first countdown effect that has been suspended is immediately started. For this reason, as illustrated in FIGS. 77A and 77B, the first countdown effect image indicating the number “29:71” is newly displayed in the region immediately above the hold icon display region 9c, The suggestion image corresponding to the third first countdown effect displayed on the second display screen 71a is deleted.

  In this way, when the first countdown effect for the third time is started with the start of the pseudo third-stage variation effect, the number indicated by the first countdown effect image is counted down (see FIG. 77C). . FIG. 77 (C) shows an example in which a reach is established with 3 symbols after the pseudo third variation effect is started, and the third first countdown effect is executed during the normal short reach. Has been.

  Here, when the variation effect pattern that develops from the normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)) to the first SP reach (see FIG. 67 (I)) is set, the first countdown effect image is displayed during the first SP reach. The number shown in FIG. 77 reaches “0:00” (see FIG. 77D), and immediately after that, the number “0:00” shown in the first countdown effect image is switched to the letters “SPSP” (FIG. 77 ( D) and (E)). When the characters “SPSP” are displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the first countdown effect image is displayed for the first time before the development gimmick effect for informing the progress to SPSP reach is executed. It is erased from the screen 7a (see FIGS. 77E and 77F). Then, the development gimmick production described above is executed based on FIG. 67 (L) and FIG. 69 (F) (see FIG. 77 (F)), and when the SPSP reach is developed, title display is performed in the early stage (FIG. 77). (See (G)). FIG. 77 (G) illustrates a state in which a title display suggesting that the player character develops into an SPSP reach (X battle) that battles with the enemy character X is illustrated. When the SPSP reach is developed in this way, a first effect button operation promotion effect for generating a cut-in (see FIG. 77 (I)) is performed toward the end of the SPSP reach (see FIG. 77 (H)). The first effect button operation promotion effect and cut-in are as described above based on FIG. 69 (I) and FIGS. 70 (A) to (C).

(Characteristics of the first countdown effect)
FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram for describing the feature of the first countdown effect. As illustrated in FIG. 78A, when the number indicated by the first countdown effect image reaches “0:00”, immediately after that, the number “0:00” indicates execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. When switching to the character “NEXT”, when the number “0:00” is switched to the character “SPSP” suggesting the development of SPSP reach, and the number “0:00” goes to the SPSP reach X battle Sometimes it is switched to the “final battle” character that suggests the development of the.

  As illustrated in FIG. 78A, when the first countdown effect in which the number “0:00” is switched to the character “NEXT” is executed, the jackpot reliability is about 6%. When the first countdown effect in which the number “0:00” is switched to the letters “SPSP” is executed, the jackpot reliability is about 30%. Further, when the first countdown effect in which the number “0:00” is switched to the characters “final battle” is executed, the jackpot reliability is about 55%.

  Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first countdown effect that suggests execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is executed and when the first countdown effect that suggests development to SPSP reach is executed. And the first countdown effect suggesting the development of SPSP reach into an X battle may be executed, and the case where the third first countdown effect is executed has the highest jackpot reliability. Next, when the first countdown effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is high. Therefore, the player enjoys the game while expecting the characters “Last Battle” and “SPSP” to be displayed immediately after the number indicated by the first countdown effect image reaches “0:00”. be able to.

  The timing at which the characters “NEXT”, “SPSP”, and “Last Battle” are displayed is not particularly limited, but the character “NEXT” is executed by the pre-reach pseudo-ream, for example. It is displayed at the timing immediately before being executed or immediately before the post-reach pseudo-ream is executed. Further, the characters “SPSP” can be displayed at various timings such as the timing immediately before the development gimmick effect is executed, the end of the normal long reach, the end of the first SP reach, and the end of the second SP reach. In addition, the character of “final battle” can be displayed, for example, after the development gimmick effect is performed until it develops to SPSP reach.

  The first countdown effect that suggests the execution of another notice effect has been described so far, but the number “0:00” indicated by the first countdown effect image is a big hit such as “opportunity” or “super hot”. There is a possibility that a game is executed, and there is a case where a first countdown effect that changes to characters indicating the degree of the possibility is performed. The jackpot reliability of the first countdown effect that finally displays the “opportunity” character is about 8%, and the jackpot reliability of the first countdown effect that finally displays the character “Hatsuatsu” is about 71%. It is. These characters are displayed, for example, at a timing immediately before the development gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)) is executed or at a predetermined timing during SPSP reach. For this reason, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the characters “Gekiatsu” to be displayed instead of “opportunity” at these timings.

  In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 78 (B), in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first countdown effect is executed once during the one-time variation display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state. There are cases where the first countdown effect is executed twice, and cases where the first countdown effect is executed three times as described above with reference to FIGS. The jackpot reliability when the first countdown effect is executed once within the same variation is about 7%, and the jackpot reliability when the first countdown effect is executed twice within the same variation is about 14%. The jackpot reliability when the first countdown effect is executed three times within the same variation is about 65%. In addition, when the first countdown effect is executed three times within the same variation, there is a feature that the development to X battle with the highest jackpot reliability among the four types of SPSP reach becomes rich.

  Therefore, when the first countdown effect occurs, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that two more first countdown effects will occur within the same variation.

  In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 76, the first countdown effect is not immediately executed by displaying on the second display screen 71a the suggestion image that suggests that the execution of the first countdown effect is suspended. When two first countdown effects are stocked at the same time, the jackpot reliability is about 20%, and when three first countdown effects are stocked simultaneously (FIG. 76 (B ))) Is about 69%. If three first countdown effects are stocked at the same time, the first countdown effects are executed three times within the same fluctuation, so in this case as well, the development to X battle is substantial. become.

(Modification regarding first countdown effect)
Note that the following configuration may be adopted for the first countdown effect.
That is, in this embodiment, when execution of the first countdown effect has been put on hold, a case has been described in which a suggestion image that suggests that is displayed on the second display screen 71a. However, in other embodiments, The suggestion image may be displayed on the first display screen 7a. In this case, for example, it is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which a suggestion image is displayed in an area above the icon display area 9e on the first display screen 7a.

  Further, in FIGS. 76B and 76C, regarding the first countdown effect for the first time, the first countdown effect image indicating the characters “standby” is displayed, and thereafter the characters “standby” are displayed as “8”. The first countdown effect is started after switching to the number “: 51” as an example. However, when the first countdown effect image is displayed without displaying the characters “standby”, the first countdown effect is displayed. It may be started immediately.

  In addition, in FIGS. 76 and 77, the first countdown effect for the second and subsequent times has been described as an example in which the execution is not put on hold (the “standby” character is not displayed). As for the production, a configuration may be adopted in which execution of the first countdown production can be suspended as in the first countdown production for the first time.

[First specific example of second countdown effect]
Next, a first specific example of the second countdown effect will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 79 is a screen diagram showing a first specific example of the second countdown effect.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second countdown effect image (see FIG. 79 (B)) showing a predetermined number is displayed on the first display screen 7a during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state. There is a case where a second countdown effect is displayed and displayed to count down the number indicated by the second countdown effect image. When the second countdown effect is executed, a predetermined second suggestion effect that suggests that a jackpot game may be executed is executed according to the end of the second countdown effect.

  FIG. 79A illustrates a state in which the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon, and the dynamic display of the effect symbol corresponding to the icon is started. Has been. When a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the display of the effect symbols, the second countdown effect image used for the second countdown effect is displayed in the center area of the first display screen 7a (FIG. 79). (See (B)). FIG. 79B illustrates a state in which a large red “5” number is displayed as the initial value of the number indicated by the second countdown effect.

  When the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect is displayed in this way, the number indicated by the second countdown effect image decreases by “1” in the order of 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 and finally Is in a state indicating the number “1” (see FIG. 79C). Then, when about 1 second has elapsed since the display of the second countdown effect image indicating the number “1”, a first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a is performed ( (See FIG. 79D). When the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect starts, as illustrated in FIG. 79D, the first effect button image simulating the first effect button 63a and the remaining time of the effective period are shown. The lifetime gauge is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the player operates the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, a pseudo second variation effect is started as an operation corresponding effect in accordance with this button operation. A character “× 2” indicating that the effect mode has shifted to the storm mode described later is displayed in the center area of the first display screen 7a. 3 is displayed on the display screen 72a (see FIG. 79E). Then, as illustrated in FIG. 79 (F), the character “× 2” is displayed in a small size in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the scroll display of the three symbol rows is resumed accordingly. As a result, the pseudo second-stage variation effect is started.

  If the first effect button 63a is not operated during the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period at the timing when the effective period ends. The same effect as that in the case (operation corresponding effect illustrated in FIG. 79E) is performed.

[Second specific example of second countdown effect]
Next, a second specific example of the second countdown effect will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 80 is a screen diagram illustrating a second specific example of the second countdown effect. FIG. 80A illustrates a state in which the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon, and the variation display of the effect symbol corresponding to the icon is started. Has been. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the effect symbol variation display, a second countdown effect image used for the second countdown effect is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a (FIG. 80). (See (B)). Note that the initial value of the number indicated by the second countdown effect image is fixed to “5”, and FIG. 80B shows a large red “5” number as in FIG. 79B. The state where the second countdown effect image is displayed is illustrated.

  When the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect is displayed in this manner, the number indicated by the second countdown effect image is “1” as in the first specific example described above with reference to FIG. It will decrease, and finally it will be in the state which shows the number of "1" (refer FIG.80 (C)). Then, when about 1 second has elapsed since the display of the second countdown effect image indicating the number “1”, a first effect button operation promotion effect similar to FIG. 79D is performed (FIG. 80D). )reference).

  On the other hand, when the player operates the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, the second countdown effect is executed again as an operation corresponding effect corresponding to this button operation. The second countdown effect image indicating the red number “5” suggesting the above is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 80E). As described above, when the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect is displayed, the second countdown effect for the second time is performed (see FIGS. 80E to 80F).

  Thereafter, when the second countdown effect for the second time progresses and the number indicated by the second countdown effect image becomes “1”, immediately after that, the second first time for prompting the player to operate the first effect button 63a. An effect button operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 80G).

  On the other hand, if the player operates the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the second first effect button operation promotion effect, this suggests that the development destination selection effect is executed as the operation-compatible effect. The characters “roulette chance” are displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 80H), and the development destination selection effect similar to that described above with reference to FIG. 69D is performed (FIG. 80). (See (I)).

  If the first effect button 63a is not operated during the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period at the timing when the effective period ends. The same effect as that in the case (operation corresponding effect illustrated in FIG. 80H) is performed.

[Comparison of countdown production]
Next, referring to FIG. 81, a countdown effect (see FIGS. 74 (D) to (G)), a first countdown effect (see FIGS. 76 and 77), and a second countdown effect (see FIGS. 79 and 79). 80) will be described. Here, FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the characteristics of various countdown effects.

  When comparing the countdown effect of the rank-up effect, the first countdown effect, and the second countdown effect, the following can be said. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, in the countdown effect of the rank-up effect, a number (countdown effect image) indicating the remaining time until the timing immediately before the first big chance notice is executed is displayed in the icon display area 9e. It is displayed in the region immediately above (see FIG. 74D). On the other hand, in the first countdown effect, a number (first countdown effect image) indicating the remaining time until the timing immediately before the first suggestion effect is displayed is displayed in the area immediately above the hold icon display area 9c ( (See FIG. 76C). On the other hand, in the second countdown effect, a number (second countdown effect image) indicating the remaining time until the timing immediately before the second suggestion effect is executed is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a (FIG. 79 ( B)). Thus, when the countdown effect of the rank-up effect, the first countdown effect, and the second countdown effect are compared, there is a feature that display areas in which the respective countdown effect images are displayed are different from each other.

  Moreover, the following can be said about the number of digits of the number indicated by the countdown effect image related to each countdown effect. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, the number indicated by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank increase effect is a single digit number (see FIGS. 74D to 74G). On the other hand, the number indicated by the first countdown effect image related to the first countdown effect is a three-digit or four-digit number (see FIGS. 76C and 77B). On the other hand, the number indicated by the second countdown effect image relating to the second countdown effect is a one-digit number similar to the number indicated by the countdown effect image relating to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect (see FIG. 79B). . As described above, when the numbers indicated by the countdown effect images related to each countdown effect are compared, the numbers indicated by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect and the numbers indicated by the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect. Is a one-digit number, but only the number indicated by the first countdown effect image related to the first countdown effect is different in the number of digits.

  Moreover, the following can be said about the numerical color of the number indicated by the countdown effect image related to each countdown effect. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, the numeral color of the number indicated by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank increase effect is white (see FIG. 74D). On the other hand, the numerical color of the number indicated by the first countdown effect image related to the first countdown effect is yellow or red (see FIG. 76C). On the other hand, the number color of the number indicated by the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect is the same red as the one of the numbers indicated by the first countdown effect image (see FIG. 79B).

  Moreover, the following can be said about the magnitude | size of the number which the countdown effect image which concerns on each countdown effect shows. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, the number (see FIG. 76B) indicated by the first countdown effect image is the smallest, and the number indicated by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect (FIG. 74 (D )) Is moderate, and the number (see FIG. 79B) indicated by the second countdown effect image is the largest.

  Moreover, the following can be said about the initial value of the number indicated by the countdown effect image related to each countdown effect. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, the initial value of the number indicated by the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect is fixed to “5” (FIGS. 79B and 80B). ), FIG. 80 (E)). On the other hand, the initial value of the number indicated by the first countdown effect image related to the first countdown effect is variable (see FIGS. 76C and 77B). In addition, the initial value of the number indicated by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank increase effect is also variable.

  Moreover, the following can be said about the countdown speed of the number indicated by the countdown effect image related to each countdown effect. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, the number indicated by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect decreases by “1” per second, and the countdown speed is unchanged. Further, the number indicated by the first countdown effect image related to the first countdown effect also decreases by “1” per second, and the countdown speed is unchanged. On the other hand, the number indicated by the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect may be decreased by “1” by 1.3 seconds or decreased by “1” by 0.7 seconds, for example. The countdown speed is variable.

  In addition, the following can be said about the stock function for stocking countdown effects of each countdown effect. That is, the first countdown effect may be executed twice within the same variation, or may be executed three times within the same variation, and the first countdown effect is suspended and execution of the first countdown effect is suspended. There is a function of stocking 1 countdown effect (see FIG. 76C). On the other hand, the countdown effect of the rank-up effect and the second countdown effect do not have a function of deferring execution of the countdown effect and stocking the countdown effect.

(Effects of each countdown effect)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the above three types of countdown effects are compared, each countdown effect image is displayed in a different display area, and when the countdown effect ends, different suggestions An effect can be executed. For this reason, compared to the case where the display area of the countdown effect image is one or the case where there is only one type of effect executed in response to the end of the countdown effect, there are more variations of the effect. High performance can be performed.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the display modes (for example, display position, number of digits, number color, number size) of countdown effect images related to each countdown effect are different from each other. Even if any two of the countdown effects are executed simultaneously, the player can clearly identify these countdown effects. For this reason, it is possible to easily suppress the problem that the original effect cannot be obtained due to the player not being able to recognize that two types of countdown effects are being executed simultaneously. .

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the speed which counts down the number which the countdown effect image (or 1st countdown effect image which concerns on a 1st countdown effect) which concerns on the countdown effect of a rankup effect counts down, and the 2nd which concerns on a 2nd countdown effect The speed of counting down the numbers indicated by the two countdown effect images is different from each other. For this reason, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a problem that the production becomes monotonous due to the countdown production being performed many times, and as a result, the interest of the production is reduced.

[Direction mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, a description will be given of the effect mode during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state. Here, FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram for describing the effect mode in the low probability low base state.

  As illustrated in FIG. 82, a plurality of effect modes including a normal mode, a storm mode, a large storm mode, a rescue zone, and a large chance effect occurrence zone as the effect modes during the first special symbol variation display in the low probability low base state A production mode is available. In these effect modes, for example, the background image displayed on the first display screen 7a, the type of character displayed on the first display screen 7a, the variable effect sound output from the speaker 67, and the like are different from each other.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, usually, the effect is executed in the normal mode during the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol in the low probability low base state. When the first special symbol success / failure determination is performed, as described above, the process of step S4505 in FIG. 52 for setting the variable effect pattern and the process of step S4506 in FIG. 52 for setting the notice effect pattern are performed. Then, based on the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination and the results of these processes, whether or not to perform a mode transition effect of transitioning the effect mode from the normal mode to another effect mode during the effect symbol variation display. In addition, in the case of performing the mode transition effect, it is also determined in which effect mode the effect mode is to be transferred. Then, based on the determination results relating to these effect modes, the effect mode during the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol is controlled.

  The normal mode, storm mode, large storm mode, rescue zone, and large chance effect generation zone have the following characteristics. That is, the normal mode is a basic effect mode that is a basic effect mode and does not suggest that there is a possibility of a big hit. On the other hand, the storm mode is an effect mode that suggests that the hit notification effect is more likely to be executed than the normal mode by making the effect mode different from the normal mode, and its jackpot reliability Is set to about 15%. As illustrated in FIG. 79E, the storm mode is an effect mode that shifts with the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect.

  FIG. 79 (E) illustrates a state in which the effect mode shifts from the normal mode to the storm mode in accordance with the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect performed at the end of the pseudo first-variation effect. When the normal mode effect is executed until the end of the second-stage variable effect, and the effect mode is changed from the normal mode to the storm mode in accordance with the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect performed at the end of the pseudo-second variable effect. There is also.

  In addition, the storm mode is characterized in that there is a case where the storm mode is shifted to a storm mode, which is a higher mode (a storm mode) having a higher hit reliability than the storm mode. Specifically, for example, when the first pseudo-continuous production is executed at the end of the pseudo first-stage variable production (indicating the development to the pseudo-second series), the production mode is changed from the normal mode. The storm mode is changed to the storm mode as the second quasi-continuous production is executed at the end of the pseudo-second-stage fluctuation production (indicating the development to the quasi-third series). A transition pattern for shifting to the mode is an example.

  This large storm mode is an effect mode that suggests that there is a higher possibility that a hit notification effect will be executed than in the normal mode, and the jackpot reliability is set to about 50%. Like the storm mode, this storm mode is an effect mode in which the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is a trigger, and as described above, in addition to the case of shifting from the storm mode, the normal mode is passed through the storm mode. There is also a transition pattern that shifts directly to the storm mode. Specifically, at the final stage of the fluctuating production of the first pseudo sequence (indicating the development to the pseudo second sequence), the production mode is changed from the normal mode to the large storm mode. When the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed (indicating the development to the pseudo third-sequence) at the end of the pseudo-second-sequence variation production, the production mode is changed from the normal mode. There is a transition pattern to shift to the storm mode.

  The rescue zone is an effect mode that suggests that there is a higher possibility that a hit notification effect will be executed than in the normal mode, and the jackpot reliability is set to about 25%. In this rescue zone, a transition pattern that shifts from the normal mode as the first pseudo-continuous effect is executed at the end of the pseudo-first variable operation (indicating the development to the pseudo second continuous), Transition pattern that shifts from the normal mode as the second simulated continuous effect is executed (indicating the development to the pseudo third continuous) at the end of the pseudo second continuous change effect, during the first SP reach (or During the second SP reach), a transition pattern for shifting from the normal mode is prepared when a special symbol corresponding to the rescue zone is displayed on the first display screen 7a.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the special symbol is displayed on the first display screen 7a during the great storm mode, and a transition pattern for transitioning to the rescue zone is triggered by the display of the special symbol. Yes. In this rescue zone, unlike the storm mode for the storm mode, a production mode that is a higher mode of the rescue zone is not prepared, and depending on the display mode of the production image displayed on the third display screen 72a, There is a feature that the reliability changes. Specifically, when entering the rescue mode, an ally character supporting the enemy character who battles with the enemy character is displayed on the third display screen 72a. If the background image of this ally character is red, the jackpot reliability Is about 23%, and when the background image of the ally character is gold, the jackpot reliability is about 50%.

  Therefore, the player enjoys the rescue mode effect while paying attention to the background image of the ally character displayed on the third display screen 72a in addition to the rescue zone effect performed on the first display screen 7a. Is possible.

  The large chance effect occurrence zone is an effect mode that suggests that there is a higher possibility that the hit notification effect is executed than in the normal mode, and the jackpot reliability is set to about 48%. When entering the great chance production zone, there is a feature that the SPSP reach always develops after that. In other words, there is a feature that the effect mode can be shifted to the large chance effect occurrence zone only when a variable effect pattern that develops from other reach effects with relatively low jackpot reliability to SPSP reach is set.

  The large chance effect occurrence zone is an effect mode in which a dedicated stage effect is executed in the large chance effect occurrence zone that can suggest execution of the second great chance notice (see FIG. 67 (M)). There is a feature that when the stage effect stage reaches the upper limit level MAX, a second big chance notice is executed (always) thereafter. For this reason, when the production mode shifts to the large chance occurrence zone, the player can enjoy the stage production while expecting the stage production stage to reach the level MAX. A specific example of this stage effect will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

Further, in the large chance effect generation zone, the stage effect is also ended when a frame flash is generated in which the frame lamp 66 emits gold light and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 67 during the stage effect. There is a feature that a second big chance notice will occur (always) later.
That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the transition to the large chance effect occurrence zone and the second large chance effect is executed later, the stage effect that finally reaches the level MAX or the stage effect One of the effects in which a frame flash <gold> occurs in the middle is executed.

  In addition, when stage production is being performed in the large chance production occurrence zone, a 5-digit number indicating the accumulation of points is displayed, and the fifth and fourth digits of this number finally indicate the same number. In such a case, there is a feature that a hit notification effect is executed (always) thereafter.

[Specific examples of production in the zone where the big chance production occurs]
Next, specific examples of effects in the great chance effect occurrence zone will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 83 and 84 are screen views showing specific examples of effects related to the great chance effect generation zone.

  FIG. 83A illustrates a state in which the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon, and the dynamic display of the effect symbol corresponding to the icon is started. Has been. When a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the display of the effect symbols, the same effect symbols are falsely stopped in the left and right columns, and reach is established (see FIG. 83 (B)). . Thereafter, a first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a is performed (see FIG. 83C). During the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, as illustrated in FIG. 83C, a first effect button image simulating the first effect button 63a and an effective time indicating the remaining time of the effective period. A period gauge and characters “push!” Indicating the content of the operation performed by the player on the first effect button 63a are displayed.

  On the other hand, if the player operates the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, it is notified that the player enters the great chance effect occurrence zone as an operation corresponding effect according to the operation. The “large chance effect occurrence zone” to be displayed is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 83D). When entering the large chance effect generation zone, as described above with reference to FIG. 82, the SPSP reach is surely developed thereafter, so that the effect image constituting the hold icon and the hold icon display area 9c is the first. 1 is erased from the display screen 7a (see FIGS. 83C and 83D).

  Next, an explanatory effect is displayed on the first display screen 7a to display an explanatory note “Aim at level MAX by long-pressing the button!” Indicating the content of the mission to be performed by the player during the great chance effect generation zone (FIG. 83 (E)). Then, the first long press effect in the large chance effect occurrence zone is performed (see FIG. 83F). When the effective period of the first long press effect starts, the third display screen 72a shows that the level 1 image indicating that the level of the player character is level 1 and the level of the player character is level 2. A level 2 image to be displayed, a level 3 image to indicate that the level of the player character is level 3, and a level MAX image to indicate that the level of the player character is level MAX are displayed. At the start, since the level of the player character is the initial level 1, the level 1 image is highlighted as shown in FIG. 83 (F).

  Further, during the effective period of the first long press effect, as illustrated in FIG. 83 (F), the first effect button image simulating the first effect button 63a and the effective time indicating the remaining time of the effective period From the period gauge, the characters “long press!” Indicating the content of the operation to be performed by the player on the first effect button 63a, and a 5-digit number that increases in accordance with the operation of the first effect button 63a The configured point image is displayed. Note that in FIG. 83 (F), points are given according to the number of enemy aircraft that the player has long pressed the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the first long press effect and destroyed by this long press. A state where 138 points are accumulated is illustrated. Further, in order to suggest that the zone has shifted to the great chance production occurrence zone, the characters “large chance production production zone” are displayed in a small size in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 83 (F)). ).

  Note that the following relationship exists between the numerical value indicated by the point image increasing by the long press of the first effect button 63a by the player and the level 1 image to the level MAX image. That is, when the number indicated by the point image is between “0” and “25000”, the level 1 image is highlighted, and when the number indicated by the point image is between “25001” and “50000”, the level 2 image is displayed. Is highlighted and the level 3 image is highlighted when the number indicated by the point image is between “50001” and “75000”, and the number indicated by the point image is between “75001” and “999999”. In some cases, the level MAX image is highlighted.

  Next, when the effective period of the first long-press effect ends, a result effect that notifies the result of the player's long-press operation during the effective period is performed (see FIG. 83 (G)). Specifically, as a result of the player long pressing the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the first long press effect, the number indicated by the point image reaches “38000”, and this number is level 2. Since the value is between “25001” and “50000” corresponding to, “Level 2 reached!” Is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a in order to notify that level 2 has been reached. A large image is displayed (see FIG. 83G).

  In this way, when the result effect for the first long press effect is performed, the second long press effect is performed (see FIG. 83H). During the effective period of the second long press effect, an effect display common to the effective period of the first long press effect is performed. Here, the first display during the effective period of the second long press effect is performed. The level of the player character is level 2 in accordance with the point that the number indicated by the point image reaches “39138” by further pressing the effect button 63a and the first effect button 63a for the first long press effect. Since the level 2 image is highlighted instead of the level 1 image, an effect display different from that during the effective period of the first long press effect is performed (FIG. 83 ( F) and (H)).

  Next, when the effective period of the second long press effect ends, a result effect is provided to notify the result of the player's long press operation during the effective period (see FIG. 83 (I)). Specifically, as a result of the player long pressing the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the second long press effect, the number indicated by the point image reaches “64000”, and this number is level 3 Since it is a value between “50001” and “75000” corresponding to, “Level 3 reached!” Is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a in order to notify that level 3 has been reached. A large image is displayed (see FIG. 83 (I)).

  Thus, when the result effect for the second long press effect is performed, the third long press effect is performed (see FIG. 84A). During the effective period of the third long press effect, an effect display common to the effective period of the second long press effect is performed. Here, the first display during the effective period of the third long press effect is performed. The level of the player character is level 3 in response to the point that the number indicated by the point image reaches “76328” by further pressing the effect button 63a and the first effect button 63a for the second long press effect. Since the level 3 image is highlighted instead of the level 2 image, an effect display different from that during the effective period of the second long press effect is performed (FIG. 83 ( H) and FIG. 84 (A)).

  Next, when the effective period of the third long press effect ends, a result effect is provided that notifies the result of the player's long press operation during the effective period (see FIG. 84B). Specifically, as a result of the player long pressing the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the third long press effect, the number indicated by the point image has reached “76328”, and this number is the level MAX. Since it is a value between “75001” to “999999” corresponding to, “Level MAX reached!” Is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a in order to notify that the level MAX has been reached. A large image is displayed (see FIG. 84B).

  Thus, when the result effect for the third long press effect is performed, the fourth long press effect is performed (see FIG. 84C). During the effective period of the fourth long press effect, an effect display common to the effective period of the third long press effect is performed. Here, the first display during the effective period of the fourth long press effect is performed. The level of the player character is set to the level MAX according to the point that the number indicated by the point image reaches “99641” by further pressing the effect button 63a and the first effect button 63a for the third long press effect. Since the level MAX image is highlighted instead of the level 3 image, an effect display different from that during the effective period of the third long press effect is performed (FIG. 84 ( A) and (C)).

  Next, when the effective period of the fourth long press effect ends, the fifth digit and the fourth digit of the number indicated by the point image at this point indicate the same numerical value (see FIG. 84 (C)). It is a big hit at the time.

  In addition, during the effective period of the fourth long press effect, it is suggested that the level of the player's own character has reached the level MAX, and the level MAX image is highlighted to cause a second big chance notice. Therefore, the development gimmick effect described above based on FIG. 69 (F) is performed at the timing when the effective period of the fourth long press effect is ended (see FIG. 84 (D)). Then, since the level of the player character has reached level MAX, following the development gimmick production, the second great chance notice described above based on FIG. 69 (G) is executed (see FIG. 84 (E)). .

  After that, in the early stage of SPSP reach, a title is displayed to notify that it has been developed to SPSP reach (see FIG. 84 (F)). A first effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 84 (G)) is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, stage effects that can be developed step by step up to any one of the four stages or less with the upper limit being four stages are executed as the effects of the large chance effect occurrence zone. It is possible to foresee that the second big chance notice will be executed thereafter by executing the stage effect that develops up to 4 stages (the level of the player's character reaches the level MAX). If the second big chance notice is executed later, a stage effect that is developed and ended up to the upper limit of four stages is executed, while if the second big chance notice is not executed later, four stages are executed. The stage effect that is developed to the stage below and finished is executed.

  Note that this great chance production zone is a production mode with an extremely high jackpot reliability of about 48%, so it is assumed that the player has produced a stage production that eventually develops to less than 4 stages. However, it is possible to enjoy the game without reducing the sense of expectation that the hit notification effect will be executed.

(Effects of production in the zone where the big chance production occurs)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the large chance effect occurrence zone is an effect mode that suggests that there is a higher possibility that the hit notification effect will be executed than in the normal mode. Depending on the stage effects performed in, it may be predicted that the second big chance notice will be executed. For this reason, it is possible not only to increase the player's expectation for the jackpot, but also to increase the expectation for the occurrence of the second great chance notice by performing the effect in the great chance effect occurrence zone. As a result, a high performance effect can be obtained.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the stage effect that is developed and ended up to the fourth stage in the great chance effect generation zone is executed, the second big chance notice is (always) executed. For this reason, a player who expects the second big chance notice to be executed can expect the stage effect to develop to the fourth stage, and the synergistic effect of the stage effect and the second big chance notice. Therefore, a high production effect can be obtained.

[About group notice]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a “group notice” as a possibility suggesting effect that suggests that a jackpot game may be executed during the variation display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state. There is a case where a notice effect called is executed. This group notice is a movement effect in which a plurality of characters move in a predetermined direction on the first display screen 7a, and a predetermined effect sound that directs the movement of the plurality of characters is output from the speaker 67 along with the movement effect. Is done.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the group notice, a first group notice (see FIG. 85) in which a number of first characters move leftward on the first display screen 7a and a number of first notices. A second group notice (see FIG. 87) in which two characters move rightward on the first display screen 7a can be executed.

<Specific example of group 1 notice>
Hereinafter, a specific example of the first group notice will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the first group notice. FIG. 85A shows the variation of the first special symbol corresponding to the green icon in a state where the icon (green icon) whose display color is green is displayed in the icon display area 9e on the first display screen 7a. A state immediately after the second pseudo-continuous effect (pre-reach pseudo-ream) is executed during the display and the pseudo third-line variable effect is started is illustrated. In this way, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the pseudo third-line variation effect, first, the left symbol (for example, three symbols) is pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 85 (B)), and then left The same right symbol as the symbol (for example, three symbols) is falsely stopped and reach is established (see FIG. 85C).

  Immediately after the reach is thus established, the first group notice is performed (see FIGS. 85D to 85F and FIGS. 85G to 85I). Specifically, a first group notice that produces a movement of a plurality of first characters is displayed while a large number of first characters appear from the right end of the first display screen 7a and run away to the left end. Sound is output from the speaker 67.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 85D to 85F, an icon targeted for the icon between the start and end of the first group notice. When the change effect is not performed, and as illustrated in FIGS. 85 (G) to (I), the icon change effect for the icon is performed between the start and end of the first group notice. Sometimes it is done. In other words, the display mode of the icon may or may not change during the first group notice.

<About icon change production>
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a game ball at the first starting port 20 in a situation where it is not possible to immediately start the special symbol success / failure determination and the special symbol variation display such as during the special symbol variation display or the big hit game. When a prize is won, the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is determined is suspended up to a predetermined number (four in the present embodiment). And when the right of the 1st special symbol success / failure determination is suspended in this way, the same number of on-hold icons as the number of suspensions of the 1st special symbol success / failure determination are displayed in the on-hold icon display area 9c. Each screen of FIG. 85 illustrates a state in which one hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c in order to suggest that the number of holds in the first special symbol success / failure determination is “1”. Yes.

  By the way, the hold icon is normally displayed as a white and circular hold icon (see, for example, FIG. 85A). On the other hand, when the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, an icon change effect in which the display mode of the hold icon (for example, the color and / or shape of the hold icon) changes is provided. It may be done.

  FIG. 86 illustrates the hold icon, the type of icon that can be the icon, the display mode of the icon, and the jackpot reliability of each icon. When the icon change effect for the hold icon is performed, for example, the white hold icon (white icon) is replaced with a blue hold icon (blue icon), a green hold icon (green icon), a red hold icon ( It changes to a hold icon of a display color that suggests a jackpot reliability such as a red icon), a gold hold icon (gold icon), or a rainbow hold icon (rainbow icon). In this embodiment, the white icon does not suggest the jackpot reliability, the blue icon jackpot reliability is set to about 1%, the green icon jackpot reliability is set to about 5%, and the red icon jackpot reliability The reliability is set to about 30%, the jackpot reliability of the gold icon is set to about 75%, and the jackpot reliability of the rainbow icon is set to 100%.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, other than the case where the icon change effect for changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed only once for the one hold icon determined to execute the icon change effect. In addition, an icon change effect that changes the display mode of the hold icon may be performed a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, when one hold icon that is the target of the icon change effect is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, an icon change effect that changes the hold icon from a white icon to a blue icon is performed. After that, there are cases where the icon change effect is performed a plurality of times for one hold icon, such that the hold icon changes from a blue icon to a red icon. In addition, when the hold icon starts to be displayed as an icon other than the white icon (for example, a blue icon) from the beginning, or the hold icon that has started to be displayed as an icon other than the white icon, one or more icon change effects are performed. It may be called.

  Further, when the hold icon shifted from the hold icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e is displayed in the icon display area 9e as the icon, the icon change effect in which the display mode of the icon changes is 1 or It may be performed multiple times. Here, when an icon change effect is compared between the hold icon and the icon, they have the following matching points / differences. That is, there is a coincidence that both the hold icon and the icon can be changed into a blue icon, a green icon, a red icon, a gold icon, and a rainbow icon illustrated in FIG. On the other hand, the icon can change to a green flight icon, a red flight icon, a gold flight icon, and a rainbow flight icon illustrated in FIG. 86, whereas the hold icon changes to these flight icons. There is a difference between the two in that it cannot be obtained.

  Here, the flight icon is an icon simulating a vehicle that can fly, the green flight icon is a green icon simulating a helicopter, the red flight icon is a red icon simulating a propeller aircraft, and the gold flight icon is a large size The rainbow flying icon that imitates a passenger ship is a rainbow icon that imitates a spaceship. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the green flight icon is set to about 25%, the jackpot reliability of the red flight icon is set to about 55%, and the jackpot reliability of the gold flight icon is set to about 78%. The jackpot reliability of the rainbow flying icon is set to 100%.

  As is apparent from the above description, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as an icon change effect for the icon, for example, an icon change effect in which the icon changes from a white icon to a green icon, the icon There may be an icon change effect in which the icon changes from a blue icon to a green icon, an icon change effect in which the icon changes from a green icon to a rainbow icon, and an icon change effect in which the icon changes from a blue icon to a gold icon. In addition, the icon is initially displayed as an icon that is not a flying icon at the beginning of being displayed in the icon display area 9e. For example, the icon is changed from a green icon as an icon change effect for the icon. An icon change effect in which the green flight icon changes, an icon change effect in which the icon changes from a red icon to a red flight icon, and an icon change effect in which the icon changes from a red flight icon to a gold flight icon are performed.

  When the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, the icon change effect is performed one or more times for the hold icon, and the hold icon is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon. The icon change effect is displayed in both the hold icon display area 9c and the icon display area 9e for one icon, such that the icon change effect is performed one or more times for the icon when displayed. May be performed.

  By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the winning is notified by the SPSP reach (see FIG. 67 (N)) which is a highly reliable reach effect, the second effect button operation promotion effect at the end of the SPSP reach. And a hit notification effect (or loss notification effect) is executed in accordance with the operation of the second effect button 63b with respect to the second effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 70). Then, the normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)), the normal long reach (see FIG. 67 (H)), and the first SP reach (see FIG. 67 (I)), which are reach results with lower reliability than the SPSP reach. In the case of notifying the winning in any of the second SP reach (see FIG. 67 (J)), a configuration in which a hit notification effect is executed irrespective of the operation of the second effect button 63b by the player is also employed. ing.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a result of the icon change effect for the icon, the icon is a green flight icon, a red flight icon, a gold flight icon, or a rainbow flight icon. When the icon is changed to the flight icon, a button image change effect (see FIGS. 89 and 90) is performed in which the flight icon changes to the second effect button image used for the second effect button operation promotion effect. Is adopted.

  For this reason, by changing the icon to one of the four types of flight icons illustrated in FIG. 86 while the first special symbol is being displayed, the SPSP reach is eventually developed and the winning is notified. It is possible for the player to recognize that the game is performed, and it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if an icon change effect that changes the hold icon to one of the four types of flight icons is performed, the reach effect is finally changed to the SPSP reach during the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon. Since the player can recognize the flow of reach production as it develops, the interest of the reach production may be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to avoid such a problem, a configuration is adopted in which the icon can be changed to a flight icon, while the hold icon cannot be changed to a flight icon. ing.

(About pre-judgment processing)
Next, a prior determination process for realizing an icon change effect for an icon (hold icon or the icon) will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the first special symbol success / failure determination is put on hold, prior to determining whether or not to execute the jackpot game before the first special symbol success / failure determination is performed. Judgment processing may be performed. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires a special symbol success / failure determination random number in response to the winning of a game ball at the first start port 20, and based on the special symbol success / failure determination random number, If the same special determination process is performed prior to the first special symbol success / failure determination process that is performed at the start of the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol correct / incorrect determination process is executed, is it determined to be “big hit”? It is determined in advance whether or not. Further, based on the variation pattern random number acquired together with the special symbol success / failure determination random number, it is determined in advance which variation pattern will be selected when the first special symbol success / failure determination is executed.

  As described above, when the game control microcomputer 81 performs the pre-determination process in response to the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is appropriate, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the special figure 1 start entry command including the pre-determination result. Transmit to the control board 90. On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect described above based on the prior determination result included in the special FIG. To do. When it is determined that the icon change effect is to be executed, it is determined with which change pattern the display mode of the icon (the hold icon or the icon) is changed, and the icon change effect based on the determination result is displayed on the image control board 100. To run.

(About icon change effects accompanying the first group notice)
When it is determined to execute an icon change effect for the icon, a change pattern for changing the display mode of the icon may be determined immediately after reach establishment. Specifically, for example, a change pattern for changing a green icon displayed as the icon in the icon display area 9e to a gold icon immediately after reach establishment may be determined. On the other hand, when the notice effect pattern for performing the first group notice is set by the notice effect setting process in step S4506 (see FIG. 52) performed at the start of the variation of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon. There is.

  As described above, the execution of the icon change effect of the change pattern for changing the icon from the green icon to the gold icon is instructed immediately after the reach is established, and the notice in the notice effect pattern that executes the first group notice immediately after the reach is established. When a change production start command instructing execution of the production is transmitted to the image control board 100, the icon is changed from a green icon to a gold icon during the period from the start of the first group notice immediately after the reach is established until the end. (See FIGS. 85G to 85I).

  On the other hand, the execution of the notice effect with the notice effect pattern that executes the first group notice immediately after the reach is established, and the execution of the icon change effect that changes the icon from the green icon to another icon is not instructed immediately after the reach is established. Is transmitted to the image control board 100, immediately after the reach is established, the first group notice is performed without the icon change effect of the icon (FIG. 85 (D)). To (F)).

  The case where the first group notice is performed immediately after the reach is established has been described as an example. However, the second group notice may be performed immediately after the reach is established.

<Specific example of group 2 notice>
Hereinafter, a specific example of the second group notice will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 87 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the second group notice. In FIG. 87A, the above-described advanced gimmick effect (see FIG. 67L) is performed in a state where a red icon is displayed as the icon in the icon display area 9e on the first display screen 7a. The situation is illustrated. When this development gimmick effect is performed, in order to make the player expect that the second big chance notice (see FIG. 67 (M), FIG. 69 (G)) will occur, the background image of black color will be reached. A darkening effect is performed in which only the symbol (for example, the left 5 symbol and the right 5 symbol) and the icon are displayed and the other effect images are not displayed (see FIG. 87B).

  If this darkening effect is performed, a second big chance notice may be subsequently performed. If the second big chance notice is not made, a battle with the enemy character is performed in the SPSP reach following the darkening effect. A self-character appearance effect is displayed in which an effect display indicating the appearance of the self-character to be performed is performed (see FIG. 87C).

  Then, immediately after this character appearance effect is performed, the second group notice is performed (see FIGS. 87 (D) to (F) and FIGS. 87 (G) to (I)). Specifically, the second group notice that produces a display showing a state in which a large number of second characters appear from the left end of the first display screen 7a and run away to the right end, and produces a movement of a plurality of second characters. Sound is output from the speaker 67.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 87D to 87F, an icon targeted for the icon from the start to the end of the second group notice. When the change effect is not performed, and as illustrated in FIGS. 87 (G) to 87 (I), the icon change effect for the icon is performed between the start and end of the second group notice. Sometimes it is done. In other words, the display mode of the icon may or may not change during the second group notice. 87 (G) to (I) illustrate how the icon changes from a red icon to a gold flight icon during the second group notice.

  Thus, not only immediately after the reach is established, but also a group notice may be performed immediately before the SPSP reach is started. In addition, based on FIG. 87, the case where the second group notice is performed immediately before the start of SPSP reach has been described as an example. However, the first group notice may be performed immediately before the SPSP reach is started. Further, the group notice can be executed not only after the reach is established or immediately before the SPSP reach is started, but also immediately before the start of the first SP reach or immediately before the start of the second SP reach. However, multiple group notices will not be given within the same variation.

(Characteristics regarding group notice)
As is apparent from the above description based on FIGS. 85 to 87, the presentation control microcomputer 91 changes the display mode of the icon to the first display mode as the group notice is executed during the display of the icon. Can be changed to the second display mode (indicating that the possibility of playing the jackpot game is higher than the first display mode).

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 85D to 85F, the display mode of the icon does not change during the first group notice, whereas in the examples shown in FIGS. 85G to 85I. During the first group notice, the icon changes from a green icon (big hit reliability: about 5%) to a gold icon (big hit reliability: about 75%). In the examples shown in FIGS. 87 (D) to 87 (F), the display mode of the icon does not change during the second group notice, whereas in the examples shown in FIGS. 87 (G) to (I). During the second group notice, the icon changes from a red icon (big hit reliability: about 30%) to a gold flight icon (big hit reliability: about 78%).

  As is clear from these, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the icon changes from the first display mode to the second display mode with the first group notice (or second group notice). The first case (see FIGS. 85 (G) to (I), FIG. 87 (G) to (I)) and the second case (FIGS. 85 (D) to (F) and FIG. 87 (D) that do not change. (See (F)), the first case is characterized by a higher probability that a jackpot game will be executed than the second case.

(Reliability for jackpot announcement)
Next, the jackpot reliability of the group notice will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 88 is an explanatory view illustrating the jackpot reliability of each group notice. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to be able to execute four types of group notices illustrated in FIG. Here, the first group notice is a first group notice (see FIG. 85) in which many first characters appear, and the jackpot reliability is set to about 45%. The second group notice is a second group notice (see FIG. 87) in which many second characters (different from the first character) appear. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is the first group notice. Is set to about 45%.

  In the third group notice (third group notice), immediately after a number of first characters move to the left, a special character (for example, their own character) follows the first characters in the same direction. This is a group notice in which a moving effect display is performed. That is, the first group notice is a group notice of an effect pattern in which the first character is included in a plurality of characters but the own character is not included, whereas the third group notice is a first notice to a plurality of characters. They are different in that it is a group notice of an effect pattern that includes both the character and the player character. Note that the jackpot reliability of the third group notice is set to 100% in this embodiment.

  In the fourth group notice (fourth group notice), immediately after a number of second characters move in the right direction, a special character (for example, the own character) follows the second character in the same direction so as to follow the second character. This is a group notice in which a moving effect display is performed. That is, the second group notice is a group notice of an effect pattern in which the second character is included in a plurality of characters but the own character is not included, whereas the fourth group notice is a second notice to a plurality of characters. They are different in that it is a group notice of an effect pattern that includes both the character and the player character. Note that the jackpot reliability of the fourth group notice is set to 100% in the present embodiment.

  Thus, it is clear from the fact that the jackpot reliability of the first group notice and the second group notice is set to about 45%, and the jackpot reliability of the third group notice and the fourth group notice is set to 100%. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the big hit game is to be executed, the effect control microcomputer 91 can execute four types of group notices from the first group notice to the fourth group notice. On the other hand, the production control microcomputer 91 can execute the first group notice and the second group notice when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the big hit game is not executed. The execution of the group notice and the fourth group notice is impossible.

  Such execution control of group notice can be realized by the following configuration, for example. The ROM constituting the effect control microcomputer 91 stores a group notice execution determination table for determining whether or not to execute the group notice. In this group notice execution decision table, random numbers are associated with jackpots and losers, and more random numbers are associated with jackpots than lost. The ROM constituting the effect control microcomputer 91 stores a winning group notice selection table and a lose group notice selection table for selecting the type when the group notice is determined to be executed. In the winning group notice selection table, random values are associated with four types of group notices, the first group notice to the fourth group notice. On the other hand, in the group notice selection table for losing, random numbers are not associated with the third group notice and the fourth group notice among the first group notice to the fourth group notice, and the first group notice and the second group notice are not associated with each other. A random value is associated with the group notice.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 selects a group notice execution decision random number for determining whether or not to execute a group notice while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, and a group notice selection for selecting the type of group notice. A random number update process for updating various effect random numbers for determining an effect pattern such as a random number is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle. When the production control microcomputer 91 receives the change start command related to the first special symbol success / failure determination, the time point when the change start command is received from the main control board 80 with respect to the group notice execution determination random number updated as appropriate by the random number update process. Is obtained as a random number for the group notice execution decision. Similarly, regarding the group notice selection random number that is appropriately updated by the random number update process, the count value at the time when the change start command is received from the main control board 80 is acquired as the group notice selection random number.

  Next, when the received variation start command includes information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “big hit”, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the obtained group notice execution decision. Whether or not to execute the group notice is determined based on whether or not the random number matches one of the random numbers associated with the jackpot in the group notice execution determination table. On the other hand, when the received variation start command includes information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “losing”, the obtained group notice execution determination random number is stored in the group notice execution determination table. Whether or not to execute the group notice is determined based on whether or not it matches any of the random values associated with the loss.

  And if the microcomputer 91 for effect control includes information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “big hit” in the received variation start command, and it is determined to execute the group notice, The group notice selection random number acquired when the change start command is received is a random value associated with any of the group notices of the first group notice to the fourth group notice specified in the winning group notice selection table. Based on whether they match, one of the first group notice to the fourth group notice is selected. On the other hand, if the received variation start command includes information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “losing” and it is determined to execute the group notice, the variation start command is received. Based on whether the group notice selection random number acquired at this time matches the random number value associated with which group notice of the first group notice to the second group notice specified in the group notice selection table for losing, Select the first group notice or the second group notice.

  As is clear from the above description, in the winning group notice selection table that is referred to when the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure judgment is “big hit”, the first group notice to the fourth group notice are displayed. Since each random number value is associated with each other, any group notice from the first group notice to the fourth group notice can be executed. On the other hand, in the losing group notice selection table that is referred to when the current determination result of the first special symbol success / failure decision is “losing”, a random number value is associated with the first group notice and the second group notice. However, random numbers are not associated with the third group notice and the fourth group notice. Therefore, if the current determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “losing”, the first group notice or the second group notice can be executed, while the third group notice and the fourth group notice are possible. Execution of notice is restricted.

  Thus, the third group notice and the fourth group notice can be selected when the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “big hit”, but is selected when it is “lost”. Therefore, the jackpot becomes rich when the third group notice or the fourth group notice appears.

(Effect by group notice)
According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an icon change effect that changes the display mode of the icon from the first display mode to the second display mode may be executed as the group notice is executed. . For this reason, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed by the synergistic effect of the group notice and the icon change effect targeting the icon, A high production effect can be obtained.

  Further, when the first group notice is executed (for example, see FIG. 85), the icon changes from a green icon (big hit reliability: about 5%) to a gold icon (big hit reliability: about 75%) during the first group notice. If the icon changes to a green hit icon during the first group notice, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed. Further, when the second group notice is executed (see, for example, FIG. 87), the icon changes from a red icon (big hit reliability: about 30%) to a gold flight icon (big hit reliability: about 78%) during the second group notice. ), The jackpot game is easier to execute than when the icon does not change from the red icon during the second group notice. In this way, the jackpot game is easier to be executed when the display mode of the icon is changed in accordance with the group notice than in the case where the icon is not changed. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a high effect as compared with the case of executing an icon change effect for the icon regardless of the group notice.

  In addition, the first group notice and the second group notice can be executed regardless of the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination, whereas the third group notice and the fourth group notice are the first special symbol success / failure. It can be executed only when the determination result of the determination is a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the third group notice and the fourth group notice to be executed rather than the first group notice and the second group notice. Compared to the case where only the group notice is prepared, it is possible to execute the group notice that is rich in production and more interesting.

(Modification regarding group notice)
The following configuration may be adopted for group notice.
That is, in the present embodiment, the case where the group notice can be executed at various timings after reaching the reach during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state has been described, but in the other embodiments, You may employ | adopt the structure which can perform a group notice before the reach establishment in the variation display of the 1st special symbol in a low probability low base state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case has been described in which the display mode of the icon is changed between the start and end of the group advance notice. For example, the display mode of the icon is changed immediately before the start of the group advance notice. Change the display mode of the icon at the same time as the start of the group notice, change the display mode of the icon at the end of the group notice, or change the display mode of the icon immediately after the end of the group notice You may let them.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the icon can be changed to a flight icon while the hold icon cannot be changed to a flight icon has been described as an example. However, in another embodiment, the hold icon is changed to a flight icon. You may employ | adopt the structure which can perform the icon change production to change.

  In addition, here, the case where the possibility suggesting effect is a group notice has been described as an example. However, if the possibility suggesting effect is an effect suggesting that a jackpot game may be executed, other than the group notice It may be a directing. That is, the possibility suggesting effect may be, for example, a first big chance notice (see FIG. 74 (I)) or a second big chance notice (see FIG. 69 (G)). In this case, it is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which the display mode of the icon is changed during the first big chance notice, or the display form of the icon is changed during the second big chance notice. . In addition, the possibility suggesting effect may be an SPSP reach that is a highly reliable reach effect. In this case, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the display mode of the icon is changed during the SPSP reach. Further, the possibility suggesting effect may be a pseudo-continuous effect (see FIG. 79 (E)) that suggests the transition to the storm mode, and even if the display mode of the icon is changed in accordance with the pseudo-continuous effect. Good. Further, the possibility suggesting effect may be a notifying effect (see FIG. 83D) for notifying the entry into the great chance effect occurrence zone, and even if the display mode of the icon is changed during the notifying effect. Good.

[About button image change effects]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the SPSP reach, which is a highly reliable reach effect, is reached and the end of the SPSP reach is reached, the first effect button operation promotion effect (FIG. 69 (I If the player operates the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, a cut-in (see FIGS. 70A to 70C) occurs. Thereafter, a second effect button operation promotion effect (see FIGS. 70D to 70F) is performed, and the player presses the second effect button 63b during the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect. When operated, a hit notification effect or a loss notification effect is performed.

  As is clear from the notations of FIGS. 69 (H) to 69 (I) and the notation of FIG. 70, when the second effect button operation promotion effect start timing is displayed with the icon that is not a flying icon being displayed, While the icon is displayed, the operation promotion image related to the second effect button operation promotion effect is displayed on the first display screen 7a regardless of the icon. Specifically, the operation promotion image here is a second effect button image simulating the second effect button 63b, characters indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b "press!", Remaining time of the effective period It is an effective period gauge showing.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the icon has changed to a flight icon before the second effect button operation promotion effect at the end of SPSP reach is started, the icon is displayed. There is a feature that a button image change effect is performed in which the icon image is moved from the icon display area 9e and changed to an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the second effect button 63b (see FIGS. 89 and 90).

<First Example of Button Image Change Effect>
FIG. 89 is a screen diagram showing a first specific example of the button image change effect. In FIG. 89 (A), a title display suggesting that the player character develops into an SPSP reach (C battle) that battles with the enemy character C in a state where the gold flight icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e. The state of being broken is illustrated. In this way, when the SPSP reach is started and the end stage is reached, the above-described first effect button operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 89B). Specifically, in the state where the gold flight icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e, the first effect button image simulating the first effect button 63a and the remaining valid period during which the operation of the first effect button 63a is effective. A lifetime gauge indicating time is displayed.

  When the first effect button operation promotion effect is performed, at the timing when the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period or when the effective period ends without the first effect button 63a being operated, Cut-in occurs (see FIG. 89C). FIG. 89C illustrates a state in which a gold cut-in is performed using the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a, but the icon display area 9e. The cut-in that occurs in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first effect button operation promotion effect has the following relationship.

  That is, if the icon has changed to a red flight icon or a gold flight icon before developing to SPSP reach, the red cut-in is performed according to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first effect button operation promotion effect. Or there is a relationship that gold cut-in occurs and green cut-in does not occur. As described above with reference to FIG. 86, in the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the red flight icon is set to about 55%, and the jackpot reliability of the gold flight icon is set to about 78%. In contrast, the jackpot reliability of the green cut-in is set to about 7% (see FIG. 71), and if the green cut-in is generated with the red flight icon or the gold flight icon displayed, In addition to significantly reducing the player's expectation for the jackpot, there is a possibility that the presentation effect of displaying a red flight icon or a gold flight icon as the icon will be significantly reduced. And these things may also lead to lowering the player's willingness to operate the second effect button 63b with respect to the second effect button operation promotion effect performed after cut-in. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when the icon has changed to the red flight icon or the gold flight icon before the SPSP reach development, according to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first effect button operation promotion effect. The above-described configuration of generating a cut-in greater than red (not generating a green cut-in) is employed.

  On the other hand, if the icon has changed to a rainbow flight icon (having a jackpot reliability of 100%) before the development of SPSP reach, it will be a big hit when the rainbow flight icon is displayed. A green cut-in, a red cut-in, or a gold cut-in occurs according to the operation of the first effect button 63a with respect to the button operation promotion effect.

  When the icon different from the flight icon is displayed and the SPSP reach is developed, the red cut-in or the gold cut-in is performed according to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first effect button operation promotion effect. If it occurs, there is a relationship that the icon changes to a flight icon that is higher than the red flight icon. In other words, as the icon, for example, a red cut-in (big hit reliability: about 56%) or a red icon (big hit reliability: about 30%) or a red icon (big hit reliability: about 30%) is displayed. When a gold cut-in (big hit reliability: about 81%) occurs, an icon change effect is performed in which the icon changes to a flight icon other than the green flight icon after the cut-in occurs. This will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 89, when a gold cut-in (or red cut-in) occurs while the gold flight icon is displayed as the icon, prior to the second effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 89 (H)). Then, a button image change effect is performed (see FIGS. 89D to 89H). Specifically, after the gold flight icon moves to the right from the icon display area 9e, it turns in the sky and the gold flight icon moves to the center of the first display screen 7a. Display is performed (see FIGS. 89D to 89F). Then, when the gold flight icon moves to the center of the first display screen 7a, an effect display (deformation action) representing a state in which the gold flight icon is broken into two and deformed into a second effect button image is performed. Here, the button image change effect in which the gold flight icon changes to the second effect button image has been described as an example. However, as the icon, a green flight icon, a red flight icon, or a rainbow flight icon is displayed. In addition, a similar button image change effect is performed.

  By the way, when the button image change effect for moving the flying icon from the icon display area 9e is performed, the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e is hidden, and as a result, the button image change effect is performed. After that, there may be a problem that the player cannot visually recognize the display color of the icon. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the following configuration is employed in order to prevent this problem from occurring.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the flight icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e prior to the second effect button operation promotion effect, the operation promotion image related to the second effect button operation promotion effect. And a character indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b “press!” Is displayed in the same color as the flight icon. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 89, when the gold flight icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e prior to the second effect button operation promotion effect, when the gold flight icon deformation action is completed, the gold flight icon is displayed. The second effect button image and a golden character “Press!” Are displayed (see FIG. 89H).

  In addition, if the color of the effective period gauge related to the second effect button operation promotion effect is changed according to the color of the flight icon, the visibility of the effective period gauge is reduced in relation to the display color of the background image. As a result, there is a possibility that the player cannot accurately grasp the remaining time of the effective period. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the second effect button image and the character indicating the operation content are displayed in the same color as the flight icon, while the validity period gauge has a predetermined color (for example, white) regardless of the display color of the flight icon. It is supposed to be used and displayed.

  Thus, the operation promotion image related to the second effect button operation promotion effect is displayed (see FIG. 89 (H)), and if the second effect button 63b is operated within the effective period, the winning notification effect is performed. (See FIG. 89 (see FIG. 89 (I)). Specifically, three effect symbols that form a stop-notification effect or three reach symbols that make a real stop after the three effect symbols that form a double-eyed stop are falsely stopped. Loss notification effect is performed in which the actual stop is performed after pseudo-stop is performed.

<Second specific example of button image change effect>
FIG. 90 is a screen diagram illustrating a second specific example of the button image change effect. In FIG. 89, the case where the flight icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e before the SPSP reach development is described as an example, but here, the icon (for example, a red icon) different from the flight icon is displayed. The button image change effect performed when the SPSP reach is developed will be described.

  In FIG. 90A, a title is displayed that suggests that the player character develops into an SPSP reach (B battle) in which the red character is displayed in the icon display area 9e and battles with the enemy character B. This is illustrated. In this way, when the SPSP reach is started and the final stage is reached, the first effect button operation promotion effect is performed in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 89B (see FIG. 90B). ).

  When the first effect button operation promotion effect is performed, at the timing when the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period or when the effective period ends without the first effect button 63a being operated, Cut-in occurs (see FIG. 90C). FIG. 90C illustrates a state in which red cut-in is performed using the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a.

  By the way, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment develops into SPSP reach with the icon different from the flight icon displayed, and the first effect button 63a for the first effect button operation promotion effect. When a red cut-in or a gold cut-in occurs according to the operation, the icon changes to a flight icon that is equal to or higher than the red flight icon. For this reason, when a red cut-in (or gold cut-in) occurs in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a, an icon change effect that changes the icon from a non-flying icon to a flying icon is performed immediately after that. . Specifically, for example, as illustrated in FIGS. 90D to 90E, lightning strikes directly on the red icon as the icon, and the icon changes from the red icon to the red flight icon by the energy. An icon change effect representing the changing state is performed.

  90D to 90E illustrate a state in which the icon changes from a red icon to a red flying icon (having a higher jackpot reliability), the icon is flying from the red icon to gold. In some cases, the icon changes, or the icon changes from a red icon to a rainbow flying icon. When a green icon is displayed as the icon, the icon changes to a green flight icon, a red flight icon, a gold flight icon, or a rainbow flight icon, which is a flight icon having a higher jackpot reliability than the green icon. Further, when a gold icon is displayed as the icon, the icon changes to a gold flight icon or a rainbow flight icon, which is a flight icon having a higher jackpot reliability than the gold icon.

  In this way, the icon that is not the flight icon changes to one of a plurality of flight icons having a higher jackpot reliability than the icon.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 90, when the icon changes from a red icon to a red flying icon, a button image change effect is performed using the red flying icon (see FIGS. 90F to 90I). This button image change effect is the same effect as the button image change effect described above with reference to FIGS. 89 (D) to 89 (H). Specifically, the red flight icon moves rightward from the icon display area 9e. After the movement, the effect display indicating that the red flight icon moves to the screen center of the first display screen 7a is performed (see FIGS. 90F to 90H). Although not shown in FIG. 90, when the red flight icon is moved to the center of the first display screen 7a, the effect display showing a state in which the red flight icon is broken into two and deformed into a second effect button image. (Deformation action) is performed.

  As described above, when the button image change effect for changing the red flight icon to the operation promotion image related to the second effect button operation promotion effect is performed, the red second effect button image and “Press! "Is displayed in red (see FIG. 90I). If the second effect button 63b is operated within the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, the three effect symbols forming the double eyes are stopped in a false manner, and then the stop notification effect or reach loss A loss notification effect is performed in which the three effect symbols forming the eyes are stopped in a pseudo manner and then stopped.

(Operational effect by button image change effect)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a button image change effect in which the icon changes to an operation promotion image may be executed. For this reason, the icon has both a function that suggests that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and a function that changes to the operation-promoting image. It is possible to improve.

  In the present embodiment, the button image change effect can be executed during the SPSP reach, but the low, such as the normal short reach, the normal long reach, the first SP reach, and the second SP reach, which are performed before the SPSP reach is developed. There is a feature that the button image change effect is not executed during the reliability reach effect. For this reason, compared with the case where a button image change effect is not performed during SPSP reach, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for developing to SPSP reach.

  Further, before developing into SPSP reach, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 68, both the icon and the hold icon are displayed on the first display screen 7a. On the other hand, during the SPSP reach, the icon is displayed on the operation promotion image in a state where the icon is displayed without displaying the hold icon on the first display screen 7a (see, for example, FIGS. 89 and 90). A changing button image change effect is performed. For this reason, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the icon as compared with the case where the hold icon is displayed during the SPSP reach. For example, the button is caused by the player paying attention to the hold icon. It is possible to easily suppress the problem of overlooking the image change effect.

  In the present embodiment, when the second effect button operation promotion effect is performed after the button image change effect is performed, the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e before the button image change effect is performed. Are displayed on the first display screen 7a in a size that suggests the jackpot reliability (see FIG. 71, FIG. 89 (H), and FIG. 90 (I)). For this reason, the player can grasp the degree of jackpot reliability based on the size of the second effect button image, and the button image change effect based on the display color of the second effect button image. It is possible to grasp the display color of the icon (flight icon) before the operation is performed.

(Modified example of button image change effect)
The following configuration may be adopted for the button image change effect.
In other words, in the present embodiment, in response to the operation of the second effect button 63b during the display of the operation promotion image (second effect button image) in which the icon is changed, a winning notification effect is performed as an operation corresponding effect. Although the case has been described, in other embodiments, for example, cut-in may be performed as this operation-compatible effect.

  Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrated the case where the said icon was changed into the 2nd effect button image as an operation promotion image, in other embodiment, the said icon is changed into the 1st effect button image, and this 1st An operation corresponding effect may be performed in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a during the display of the effect button image.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is employed in which the button image change effect is not executed during reach effects other than SPSP reach. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, a configuration in which a button image change effect can be executed even during reach effects other than SPSP reach, such as first SP reach and second SP reach, may be employed.

[Special Reach Production]
Although not shown in FIG. 67, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is a case where it develops from a normal long reach to a special reach production, or it appears to develop to an SPSP reach and develops to a special reach production. . This special reach effect (see FIGS. 91 to 93) is a reach effect that causes the player to operate the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b. During the special reach effect, four effective periods for allowing the player to operate the first effect button 63a and one effective period for allowing the player to operate the second effect button 63b are set. And the display mode of the possibility suggestion image that suggests that there is a possibility that the jackpot game may be executed is updated every time the first effect button 63a is operated in each of the four effective periods. The jackpot reliability is suggested by the final display mode of the sex suggestion image, and then the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is performed according to the operation of the second effect button 63b during the one effective period. Is called.

<Specific examples of special reach production>
Hereinafter, specific examples of special reach effects will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 91 to 93 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of special reach effects. FIG. 91A illustrates a state in which the above-described normal long reach is performed in a state where a red icon is displayed as the icon (based on FIG. 69B or the like). Here, when the variation effect pattern that develops from the normal ring reach to the special reach effect is set at the start of the variation of the first special symbol this time, the following effects are performed.

  That is, first, in order to make it appear that the loss notification effect is performed in the normal long reach, for example, a similar loss effect that performs false stop display of three effect symbols that form a reach loss eye such as “565” is performed (FIG. 91B). )reference). Then, the effect image including the three effect symbols forming these reach-losing eyes is displayed in a reduced size, and an effect effect of rotating the effect image clockwise is performed (see FIGS. 91C to 91D). This development effect includes a success effect that succeeds in development to a special reach effect and a failure effect that fails to develop into a special reach effect.

  Although not shown in the figure, if a variation effect pattern is set in which the failure notification effect is given after the failure effect at the end of normal long reach, the reduced image does not rotate clockwise and the original In addition to returning to the posture, a failure effect is also performed in which the size of the three effect symbols included in the reduced image is also restored, and the three effect symbols are stopped as they are.

  On the other hand, when a variation production pattern that develops from a normal long reach to a special reach production via a success production is set, a state in which the reduced image rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 degrees) is displayed. Successful performance is performed. When this success effect is performed, a title display relating to a special reach effect such as “an opportunity to increase reliability” is performed (see FIG. 91E). Then, following this title display, an explanatory effect is displayed to display a message on the first display screen 7a explaining the content of the operation to be performed by the player, such as “Press the button to increase the reliability!” (FIG. 91). (See (F)). As is clear from the notations of FIGS. 91 to 93, during the special reach effect, the effect display related to the special reach effect is performed without displaying the reach symbol.

  When a predetermined time elapses after the explanation effect is performed, the first operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 91 (G)). The first operation promotion effect is a first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a. The first display screen 7a is a first effect imitating the first effect button 63a. An effect button image and an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the effective period for the first time are displayed. In addition, the special reach effect is performed by the player for a total of five operations, such as causing the player to operate the first effect button 63a four times and then causing the player to operate the second effect button 63b once. Since the operation is not yet performed once, when the first operation promotion effect is performed, until the first operation is performed during the special reach effect, The characters “5 more times” are displayed on the third display screen 72a.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the remaining number of operations to be performed by the player during the special reach effect such as “5 more times” is displayed on the third display screen 72a will be described as an example. May be displayed on the second display screen 71a, or may be displayed on both the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a.

  Next, when the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period related to the first operation promotion effect, the first reliability increase effect is performed (see FIG. 91H). In the first reliability increase effect, a reliability character as a possibility suggestion image such as “00%” is displayed in the center of the first display screen 7a, and the character character uses the light gun to give energy to the reliability character. An effect display indicating the state of increasing the numerical value indicated by the reliability character is performed. In addition, FIG. 91 (H) illustrates the state in which the player character injects energy into the reliability character alone in the first reliability increase effect. Sometimes energy is injected into a character. In the example shown in FIG. 91 (H), since the reliability character indicates a numerical value with a very low jackpot reliability such as “00%”, the reliability character is displayed in blue.

  Thus, when the first reliability increase effect is performed, the first result display effect is performed as the result of the reliability increase effect (see FIG. 91 (I)). FIG. 91 (I) illustrates a state where a reliability character of “06%” indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased to 6% is illustrated, but the reliability character indicates that the jackpot reliability is high. Since it is still very low, a blue reliability character is displayed in the same manner as when the first reliability increase effect is performed.

  FIG. 91 (I) illustrates a state in which a result display effect indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased to 6% is illustrated, but the increase in the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability letter is as follows. It is variable, and the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character increases only to 3% in accordance with the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first operation promotion effect, or the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is 8 In some cases, it may rise to%.

  In addition, there is a correlation between the increase in the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character and the number of characters appearing in the reliability increase effect, and as the number of characters appearing in the reliability increase effect increases, the reliability character increases. There is a relationship that the increase range of the jackpot reliability shown in FIG.

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses after the first result display effect is performed, a second operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 92A). This second operation promotion effect is a first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a, and, similar to the first operation promotion effect, the first effect button image and the effective period The gauge is displayed on the first display screen 7a. And, according to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first operation promotion effect, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character has increased to 6%. A blue reliability character indicating “06%” is also displayed. Here, since there is already one operation for a total of five operations, the character “4 more times” indicating the remaining number of operations to be performed by the player is displayed on the third display. It is displayed on the screen 72a.

  When the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period related to the second operation promotion effect, a second reliability increase effect is performed (see FIG. 92B). In the second reliability increase effect, first, a reliability character indicating “06%” is displayed in the center of the first display screen 7a, and the self character and the first ally character are displayed in the reliability character. An effect display representing a state in which the numerical value indicated by the reliability character is raised in cooperation is performed.

  As described above, when the second reliability increase effect is performed, the second result display effect is performed as the result of the reliability increase effect (see FIG. 92C). FIG. 92 (C) illustrates a state in which a reliability character of “19%” indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased to 19% is illustrated, but the reliability character has a jackpot reliability. Since it is still low, the reliability character indicating the character of “19%” is displayed in blue.

  In the first reliability increase effect (see FIG. 91 (H)), only the player's own character has appeared, so the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character has increased only by 6%. In the second reliability increase effect (see FIG. 92 (B)), since the two characters of the own character and the first ally character have appeared, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is 13% ( = 19%-6%). Thus, as the number of characters appearing in the reliability increase effect increases, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character increases more. Therefore, the player increases the number of characters according to the operation of the first effect button 63a. It is possible to enjoy special reach production while expecting characters to appear.

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses after the second result display effect is performed, a third operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 92D). This third operation promotion effect is a first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a. Similar to the first and second operation promotion effects, the first effect button image The effective period gauge is displayed on the first display screen 7a. And, according to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the second operation promotion effect, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character has increased to 19%. A blue reliability character indicating “19%” is also displayed. Here, since there are already two operations for a total of five operations, the character “3 more times” indicating the remaining number of operations to be performed by the player is displayed on the third display. It is displayed on the screen 72a.

  When the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period related to the third operation promotion effect, a third reliability increase effect is performed (see FIG. 92E). In the third reliability increase effect, first, a reliability character indicating “19%” is displayed in the center of the first display screen 7a. An effect display showing how the numerical value is increased is performed.

  Thus, when the third reliability increase effect is performed, the third result display effect is performed as a result of the reliability increase effect (see FIG. 92F). FIG. 92 (F) illustrates a state in which a reliability character of “27%” indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased to 27% is illustrated, but the reliability character has a jackpot reliability. Since the medium level is indicated, the reliability character indicating the character “27%” is displayed in green.

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses after the third result display effect is performed, a fourth operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 92G). This fourth operation promotion effect is a first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a. Similar to the first to third operation promotion effects, the first effect button image The effective period gauge is displayed on the first display screen 7a. And, according to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the third operation promotion effect, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character has increased to 27%. A green reliability character indicating “27%” is also displayed. Here, since there are already three operations for a total of five operations, the character “2 more times” indicating the remaining number of operations to be performed by the player is displayed on the third display. It is displayed on the screen 72a.

  When the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period related to the fourth operation promotion effect, a fourth reliability increase effect is performed (see FIG. 92 (H)). In the fourth reliability increase effect, first, a reliability character indicating “27%” is displayed in the center of the first display screen 7a, and the player character and the first ally are displayed against the reliability character. An effect display representing a state in which the three characters of the character and the second ally character cooperate to increase the numerical value indicated by the reliability character is performed.

  As described above, when the fourth reliability increase effect is performed, the fourth result display effect is performed as the result of the reliability increase effect (see FIG. 92I). FIG. 92 (I) illustrates a state in which a reliability character of “52%” indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased to 52% is illustrated, but the reliability character has a jackpot reliability. Since it indicates that it is relatively high, the reliability character indicating the character of “52%” is displayed in red.

  In the fourth reliability increase effect (see FIG. 92 (H)), since three characters appear, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is 25% (= 52% −27%). It is rising. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reliability character (possibility suggestion image) indicating that the jackpot game may be executed is displayed during the first special symbol variation display, and the first effect In accordance with the operation of the button 63a, an effect display for changing the possibility suggestion image is performed so that the possibility of the jackpot suggested by the reliability character increases.

  Subsequently, when the fourth result display effect is performed, the reliability character displayed in the center of the first display screen 7a during the result display effect is enlarged and displayed (see FIG. 93A). For this reason, it is possible to make the player feel that the jackpot reliability has increased to 52% by four operations of the first effect button 63a, and the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is 2 Since it is a relatively high value that indicates that it will be a big hit once every time, the player's expectation for the big hit can be improved effectively, and the second production button at the end of the special reach production It is possible to give a strong motivation to the player with respect to operating 63b.

  When the reliability character is enlarged and displayed, an explanation effect is displayed on the first display screen 7a that displays a message explaining the content of the operation to be performed by the player, such as “push the lever and grab the big hit!” 93 (B)). Thereafter, when a predetermined time elapses after the explanation effect is performed, the fifth operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 93C). This fifth operation promotion effect is a second effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the second effect button 63b. The second display button 7b imitates the second effect button 63b on the first display screen 7a. An effect button image, characters indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b “press!”, And an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the fifth effective period are displayed. In addition, here, since there are already four operations for a total of five operations, the character “Last” indicating that the remaining number of operations to be performed by the player is one. Is displayed on the third display screen 72a.

  Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination performed at the start of the variation of the first special symbol this time is “big hit”, the second effect during the effective period related to the fifth operation promotion effect In response to the operation of the button 63b, for example, three effect symbols such as “555” are falsely stopped and then a stop notification effect is performed (FIGS. 93D to 93F). reference). On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination performed at the start of the variation of the first special symbol this time is “lost”, the second effect button during the effective period related to the fifth operation promotion effect In response to the operation of 63b, for example, a loss notification effect is performed in which three effect symbols forming a reach loss eye such as “565” are pseudo-stopped and then stopped (see FIGS. 93 (G) to (I)). ).

(About jackpot reliability of reliability letters)
FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the jackpot reliability of the special reach effect. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability when the display color of the final reliability character displayed in response to the fourth operation of the first effect button 63a is blue is about 15%. Is set. The jackpot reliability when the final reliability character display color is green is set to about 35%, and the jackpot reliability when the final reliability character display color is red is about 35%. Is set to Further, when the final reliability character display color is gold, the jackpot reliability is set to about 75%, and when the final reliability character display color is rainbow, the jackpot reliability is 100%. Is set to

  As is clear from this description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes, for example, a case where the reliability character changes in a change pattern in which the display color of the reliability character finally becomes blue, There is a case where the reliability character changes in a change pattern in which the display color finally becomes gold. In the latter case, there is a higher possibility that the jackpot game will be executed than in the former case. .

  Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is notified by the final display color of the reliability character, so the player intuitively determines how much the jackpot reliability is. It is possible to recognize.

(Operational effect by special reach production)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in accordance with the operation of the first effect button 63a, the reliability character changes so that the possibility of the big hit suggested by the reliability character increases, so that the jackpot game It is possible to make the player feel that the possibility of executing is increased by himself, and it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the effect using the first effect button 63a.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the possibility that a jackpot game is executed differs depending on the change pattern of the reliability character. For this reason, it is possible to make the player pay attention to how the reliability character changes, and it is possible to execute a more effective performance by changing the reliability character.

  In the present embodiment, a hit notification effect or a loss notification effect is executed according to the operation of the second effect button 63b after changing the reliability character. For this reason, the player can operate the second effect button 63b while observing the reliability character after the change and estimating how much the jackpot game is likely to be executed.

(Modifications related to special reach production)
The following configuration may be adopted for special reach production.
In other words, in the present embodiment, a plurality of intermittent effective periods are provided, and the possibility of a big hit suggested by the reliability character increases in accordance with the same number of operations of the first effect buttons 63a as the effective periods. The case where the reliability character is changed as described above has been described. On the other hand, in another embodiment, only one effective period for allowing the player to operate the first effect button 63a is provided, and in accordance with the long press operation of the first effect button 63a during this effective period, You may make it change a character continuously.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the jackpot reliability is suggested by the display color of the final reliability character has been described, but in other embodiments, the jackpot reliability is suggested by the number indicated by the final reliability character. You may make it do. In this case, for example, if the number indicated by the final reliability character is “77” or “100”, the second effect button 63b is always operated in response to the fifth operation promotion effect. It is conceivable to employ a configuration in which a hit notification effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is suggested by the final display color of the reliability character displayed in response to the fourth operation of the first effect button 63a, and the operation of the second effect button 63b immediately after that is suggested. The case where the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed according to the above has been described. On the other hand, in another embodiment, instead of performing the second effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 93C) immediately after the final reliability character is displayed, the final reliability character is displayed. After the display, for example, a configuration that develops one of the reach effects from the first reach to the fourth reach may be adopted. In this case, for example, when the number indicated by the final reliability character is a predetermined number (for example, 70), the fourth reach that has the highest jackpot reliability among the four types of reach production is developed. It is conceivable to adopt the configuration together.

  In the present embodiment, the case has been described in which the greater the number of characters appearing in the reliability increase effect, the greater the increase in the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, a plurality of movable actors such as a first director, a second director, and a third director are provided, and the first director is displayed during the reliability increasing stage. The effect of the second stage acting is greater than the movement of the object, and the degree of increase in the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is larger, and the third stage acting is more active than the second stage acting during the reliability increase effect. It is conceivable to adopt another configuration in which the increase of the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character becomes larger when the accessory is operated.

  Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrated the case where a reliability character was displayed as a possibility suggestion image which suggests that a jackpot game may be performed, a possibility suggestion image is limited to a reliability character. For example, it may be a gauge image in which lighting points increase in response to an operation (continuous hit or long press) of the first effect button 63a in one effective period.

  Up to here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b, and performs the first effect button operation promotion effect and the second effect button operation promotion effect during the special reach effect. explained. On the other hand, in other embodiments, only the first effect button 63a of the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b is provided, and the second effect button operation promotion effect described in the present embodiment is the first. You may make it replace with the production button operation promotion production.

[About lighting effects]
Next, a light emission effect performed using the speaker lamp 671, the first start port lamp 201, and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 95A is a partial front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 for explaining the speaker lamp 671, and FIG. 95B is a game board 2 for explaining the first starter lamp 201. FIG. FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram for describing the characteristics of the light emission effect. FIG. 97 is a time chart showing a specific example of effect control related to the light emission effect.

  As illustrated in FIG. 95 (A), the speaker 67 has a built-in speaker lamp 671 configured to have a plurality of color LEDs with respect to a translucent decorative member provided on the peripheral portion thereof. Yes. FIG. 95A illustrates the speaker lamp 671 emitting light in a predetermined color (for example, blue). The speaker lamp 671 performs various effects using light by changing the lighting and blinking patterns of the color LEDs and changing the emission color of the color LEDs.

  Also, as illustrated in FIG. 95B, a first start port lamp 201 as a panel lamp is provided immediately below the first start port 20 in the game board 2. The first starter lamp 201 is configured to have a plurality of color LEDs, and is incorporated in a translucent decorative member provided directly below the first starter 20. The first starter lamp 201 performs various effects by light by changing the lighting and blinking patterns of the color LEDs and changing the emission color of the color LEDs.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the low-probability and low-base state, the game ball is won at the first start opening 20 and the first game is won according to the prize. There may be a case where a light emission effect using the speaker lamp 671, the first start-up lamp 201, or the like is performed before the one special symbol determination is made. This light emission effect is obtained when a game ball wins a prize at the first start port 20 during the display of the variation of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state, and the right of the first special symbol success / failure determination is put on hold. This is a so-called hold prefetching effect that occurs in In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a light emission effect of a blue blinking pattern that causes the speaker lamp 671 to blink blue is performed as a light emission effect (see FIGS. 96 and 97A), the speaker lamp 671 blinks green. The flashing effect of the green blinking pattern is performed (see FIGS. 96 and 97B), and the flashing effect of the red flashing pattern of flashing the speaker lamp 671 is performed (FIG. 96, FIG. 97C). See).

(Characteristics of blue flashing light emission)
The light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern has a jackpot reliability set to about 7% (see FIG. 96), and the blue blinking of the speaker lamp 671 almost simultaneously with the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 20. The process is started (see FIG. 97 (A)). For this reason, the player sees that the speaker lamp 671 is blinking in blue, and there is a relative possibility that the “big hit” is notified in response to the execution of the held first special symbol success / failure determination. Can be easily recognized.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the speaker lamp 671 is provided at a position away from the first display screen 7a. For this reason, for example, when the player is gazing at the first display screen 7a, there is a possibility that the speaker lamp 671 may not notice that it starts blinking blue. The same applies to the case where the speaker lamp 671 blinks green or the speaker lamp 671 blinks red. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the timing when the speaker lamp 671 starts blinking, the corresponding winning sound corresponding to the blinking color is output from the speaker 67 for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). That is, when the speaker lamp 671 blinks in blue, a blue corresponding winning sound (blue corresponding sound) corresponding to blue is output from the speaker 67. Thereby, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight to the periphery of the speaker 67, and there is an advantage that the player can easily notice that the light emission effect has started.

  In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 97 (A), as the suspension of the first special symbol success / failure determination that triggered the execution of the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern is digested, If the reach effect develops from the pre-reach effect through the normal short reach to the normal long reach during the special symbol variation display, the normal long reach will start before the light emitting effect of the blue flashing pattern starts. Until the start, normal BGM is output from the speaker 67. When the normal long reach is started, the effect sound output from the speaker 67 is switched from the normal BGM to the normal long reach effect sound (NL reach effect sound) related to the normal long reach.

  In this way, when the game is developed into a reach effect where a hit notification effect or a loss notification effect may be performed, the player pays attention to the reach effect (here, normal long reach) performed on the first display screen 7a. It is preferable to do so. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the reach production is developed from the normal short reach to the normal long reach during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is the object of prefetching, at the timing of developing to the normal long reach, The blue blinking of the speaker lamp 671 is terminated. The same applies to the case where the speaker lamp 671 blinks red (or blinks green) before developing into the normal long reach (see FIG. 97C).

  In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 96, when the light emission effect is executed, the first start-up lamp 201 blinks in white so as to synchronize with the blinking of the speaker lamp 671 regardless of the emission color of the speaker lamp 671. To do. The first starter lamp 201 is displayed in the icon display area 9e (related to the variable display of the first special symbol) as the icon indicating the jackpot reliability (a white icon which is a normal icon). When the icon except for (see FIG. 86) is displayed, it has a function of blinking in the same color as the icon. For this reason, for example, when the white icon as the icon changes to a blue icon, the first start lamp 201 blinks in blue, and when the blue icon as the icon changes to a red icon, the first icon The blue blinking of the start lamp 201 changes to red blinking. In addition, when the red icon as the icon changes to a gold flight icon, the red blinking of the first start port lamp 201 changes to gold blinking. Also, during a period in which any one of the flight icons illustrated in FIG. 86 (for example, the gold flight icon) is moved from the icon display area 9e and changed to the second effect button image, the button image change effect is performed. Flashes in the same color as the flight icon.

  For this reason, the player can easily change the display color of the icon based on the light emission color (flashing color) of the first start lamp 201 even during a period when the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 9e. It is possible to recognize.

  On the other hand, when a white icon is displayed as the icon, the first start port lamp 201 does not need to blink in the same color as the icon, and the first start port lamp 201 can have a different role. preferable. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the icon changes from a white icon to a colored icon (such as a blue icon) during execution of the light emission effect, the first change is made until the icon changes to a colored icon. While the starter lamp 201 continues to flash white, if the icon does not change to a colored icon during the execution of the light emission effect, the first starter port until the light emission effect (flashing of the speaker lamp 671) ends. The lamp 201 continues to blink in white.

  As is apparent from the comparison of FIGS. 97A to 97C, when the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern and the light emission effect of red blinking are executed, the speaker 67 is started at the timing when the light emission effect is started. When the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern is executed while the BGM output from the sound source changes, the jackpot reliability is relatively low. There is a feature that the output BGM does not change.

  In addition, when the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern is executed, there is a relatively low possibility that the jackpot will be notified during the change display of the symbol to be read ahead, and the jackpot such as the first SP reach, the second SP reach, and the SPSP reach. It is difficult to develop a reach production with a relatively high reliability.

(Characteristics of green flashing light emission effect)
The light emission effect of the green flashing pattern has a jackpot reliability set at about 23% (see FIG. 96), and the green flashing of the speaker lamp 671 almost simultaneously with the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 20. The process is started (see FIG. 97 (B)). For this reason, the player sees that the speaker lamp 671 is blinking in green, and there is a relative possibility that the “big hit” is notified in response to the execution of the held first special symbol success / failure determination. Can be easily recognized.

  Further, in the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern, a green corresponding winning sound (green corresponding sound) corresponding to green is output from the speaker 67 for a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds) at the timing when the speaker lamp 671 starts blinking in green. The The green corresponding winning sound is a production sound that is louder than the blue corresponding winning sound and is more easily recognized by the player than the blue corresponding winning sound. In addition, when the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern is executed, the first start port is synchronized with the blinking of the speaker lamp 671 (here, green blinking), similarly to the case where the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern is executed. The lamp 201 blinks white. If the icon changes from a white icon to a colored icon during execution of the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern, the first starter lamp 201 continues to blink white until the icon changes to a colored icon. If the icon does not change to a colored icon during execution of the flashing pattern light emission effect, it continues until the green flashing pattern light emission effect ends.

  In addition, the jackpot reliability of the flashing effect of the green flashing pattern is relatively high at about 23%, and as the suspension of the first special symbol success / failure determination that triggered the execution of the flashing effect of the green flashing pattern is digested, A highly reliable reach production with a relatively high jackpot reliability is easy to execute (see FIG. 97B). For this reason, as illustrated in FIG. 97 (B), the first BGM output from the speaker 67 corresponds to the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern at the timing when the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern is started. Changes to special BGM. When the first special symbol to be read ahead in the figure is displayed in a variable manner, when the development from the pre-reach effect to the development gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)) is used as an opportunity, the SPSP reach A battle is output from the speaker 67. The first special BGM that has been changed to the corresponding production sound (corresponding to the development gimmick production) with the start of the development gimmick production, and the A battle production sound (corresponding to the A battle) with the start of the A battle. Change further.

  By the way, when the development gimmick effect is performed, it is preferable that the player pay attention to the first display screen 7a because there is a possibility that a second large chance notice (see FIG. 67 (M)) may be performed after that. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the development gimmick effect is performed from the pre-reach effect (without going through the normal short reach, etc.) during the variable display of the first special symbol that is the prefetch target, the development is performed. At the timing when the gimmick effect is started, the green blinking of the speaker lamp 671 is ended. The same applies to the case where the speaker lamp 671 is blinking red (or blinking blue) before the start of the development gimmick effect.

  In addition, when the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern is executed, there is a relatively high possibility that the jackpot will be notified during the variation display of the pre-read target symbol, and twice during the variation display of the pre-read target symbol. There is a feature that a pseudo-continuous production is performed and it is easy to develop into a pseudo-third series. However, even if the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern is executed, if it does not develop to the pseudo third sequence during the variation display of the pre-read target pattern (if the pseudo continuous effect is not performed once, or the pseudo continuous effect is In this case, the SPSP reach effect is finally developed within the same variation, or the special reach effect (see FIGS. 91 to 94) is developed.

(Characteristics of flashing red flash pattern)
The light emission effect of the red flashing pattern has a jackpot reliability set to about 70% (see FIG. 96), and the red flashing of the speaker lamp 671 almost simultaneously with the winning of the game ball at the first start port 20. The process is started (see FIG. 97C). For this reason, the player sees the speaker lamp 671 blinking in red, and there is a very possibility that the player will be notified of the “big hit” in response to the execution of the held first special symbol success / failure determination. It is possible to easily recognize that the price is high.

  Further, in the light emission effect of the red flashing pattern, a red corresponding winning sound (red corresponding sound) corresponding to red is output from the speaker 67 for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) at the timing when the speaker lamp 671 starts to flash red. The red corresponding winning sound has a volume larger than that of the blue corresponding winning sound or the green corresponding winning sound, and is an effect sound that is more easily recognized by the player than the blue corresponding winning sound or the green corresponding winning sound. In addition, when the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern is executed, the first light emission is synchronized with the red blinking of the speaker lamp 671 as in the case of the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern and the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern. The start lamp 201 flashes white. When the icon changes from a white icon to a colored icon during execution of the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern, the first starter lamp 201 continues to blink white until the icon changes to a colored icon. If the icon does not change to a colored icon during execution of the flashing pattern light emission effect, it continues until the red flashing pattern light emission effect ends.

  In addition, the big hit reliability of the light emission effect of the red flashing pattern is as extremely high as about 70%, and the SPSP as the first special symbol success / failure determination that triggered the execution of the light emission effect of the red flashing pattern is digested. It will develop into an X battle with the highest jackpot reliability in the reach. In other words, the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern has a characteristic that it is not executed if it does not develop into an X battle during the display of the variation of the symbol to be read ahead.

  As described above, when the light emission effect of the red flashing pattern is executed, the X battle develops with high reliability, so that the normal output from the speaker 67 as illustrated in FIG. 97 (C) is performed. The BGM changes to the second special BGM corresponding to the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern at the timing when the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern is started. Then, during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol to be read ahead in the figure, the normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)), the normal long reach (see FIG. 67 (H)), and the first SP reach from the pre-reach effect. When the SPSP reach X battle is developed via (see FIG. 67 (I)), the second special BGM output from the speaker 67 is output as the normal long reach effect sound (NL) with the start of the normal long reach. Reach effect sound), change to the first SP reach effect sound with the start of the first SP reach, and further change to the X battle effect sound (corresponding to the X battle) with the start of the X battle.

  In addition, when the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern is executed, there is a relatively high possibility that the jackpot will be notified, and the battle develops into an X battle during the variation display of the pre-read target symbol. For this reason, the frame lamp 66 (see FIG. 95A) blinks in red as the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern is started.

  As is apparent from the above description, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, normal short reach, normal long reach that can be performed after normal short reach, and normal short reach or normal long reach can be performed. The first SP reach, the second SP reach that can be performed after the normal short reach, and the SPSP reach that can be performed after these four types of reach production can be executed. When one X battle is executed, the speaker lamp 671 flashes in red (an example of a specific color) corresponding to the X battle before the first special symbol variation display is started, and the speaker From 67, a red winning sound is output.

(About processing for realizing the lighting effect)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following processing is performed in order to realize the above-described three types of light emission effects. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the low probability low base state and the game ball is won at the first starting port 20, the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is right is reserved. . As described above, when the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is appropriate is reserved, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the above-described pre-determination process. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires a special symbol success / failure determination random number in response to the winning of a game ball at the first start port 20, and based on the special symbol success / failure determination random number, A similar success / failure determination process is performed prior to the first special symbol success / failure determination process performed at the start of the special symbol variation display, and when the first special symbol success / failure determination process is executed, it is determined to be “big hit”. Whether or not is determined in advance. In addition, when the first special symbol success / failure determination is executed based on the variation pattern random number acquired together with the special symbol success / failure determination random number, which variation pattern is selected (as the variation pattern of the first special symbol). Determine in advance what will happen.

  As described above, when the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs the preliminary determination process in response to the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is determined, the preliminary determination result (the determination result of the first special symbol determination or not) A special figure 1 start entry command including information indicating whether or not “big hit” or information indicating a special symbol variation pattern is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not to execute the light emission effect of the red flashing pattern based on the prior determination result included in the special FIG. 1 start entry command. decide.

  Here, first, the details of the process of setting the variation effect pattern in the variation effect start process (see FIG. 52) performed when the first special symbol variation display is started will be described. When the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the change start command from the main control unit 80, in step S4504 in FIG. 52, the change effect corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command included in the change start command is displayed. The pattern determination table is read from the ROM of the sub control board 90 and set in the RAM of the sub control board 90.

  For example, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 120 seconds, the variation pattern of the effect symbol is different from each other, while the pseudo pattern is developed in the pseudo third series. Different random numbers for each of the multiple variation production patterns that are common to the point that the SPSP reach X battle is developed via normal short reach and normal long reach to notify the winner in that X battle. The associated 120-second variation effect pattern determination table is read from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 and set in the RAM. Also, for example, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 60 seconds, the variation pattern of the production symbol is different from each other, and the pseudo second sequence is developed. Then, a different random number value is associated with each of the plurality of variation effect patterns that are common in that the first SP reach reaches the first SP reach via the normal short reach and the winning is notified by the first SP reach. The 60-second variation effect pattern determination table is read from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 and set in the RAM.

  Then, in step S4505, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation effect determination random number acquired in the process of step S4501 from the variation effect pattern determination table set in the RAM. Select a production pattern.

  In this way, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the presence or absence of the pseudo-continuous effect, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and the reach when the reach effect is executed A variation effect pattern is selected using a variation effect pattern determination table in which a variation effect pattern having a common effect type and flow is defined. Therefore, if the variation pattern to be designated by the variation pattern designation command can be specified in advance, the X battle is performed during the variation display of the first special symbol before the variation display of the first special symbol is started. It is possible to determine whether or not.

  Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the following process in order to determine whether or not to execute the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern. That is, when the production control microcomputer 91 receives the special figure 1 start ball entering command transmitted from the main control board 80, based on the preliminary determination result included in the special figure 1 start ball entering command, The variation pattern of the first special symbol that is to be selected in response to the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is held is determined. Then, referring to the variation effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specified variation pattern, whether or not the SPSP reach effect X battle is performed when the variation effect pattern is selected based on the variation effect pattern determination table. judge.

  The effect control microcomputer 91, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, in addition to the group notice execution determination random number and the group notice selection random number described above, a light emission effect for determining whether or not to execute the light emission effect. Random number update processing for updating various effect random numbers such as execution-determined random numbers is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle. The effect control microcomputer 91 receives from the main control board 80 the emission effect execution decision random number that is appropriately updated by the random number update process when the special figure 1 start entering command related to the first special symbol success / failure determination is received. The count value at the time of receiving the start incoming ball command is acquired as a light emission effect execution determination random number.

  Here, as illustrated in FIG. 96 and FIG. 97C, the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern is a reserved pre-reading effect that suggests the development of the SPSP reach X battle. For this reason, when it is determined that the X battle is not performed based on the variation pattern specified by the prior determination process and the variation effect pattern selection table corresponding to the variation pattern, as described above, the effect control microcomputer 91 Is determined not to execute the light emission effect of the red flashing pattern. On the other hand, when it is determined that the X battle is to be performed, the effect control microcomputer 91 stores the light emission effect execution determination random number acquired when the special figure 1 start entering command is received in the ROM of the effect control board 90. Whether or not to execute the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern is determined based on whether or not it matches any one of the random number values. Specifically, when the acquired light emission effect execution determination random number matches any random value, it is determined to execute the light emission effect of the red flashing pattern, and the acquired light emission effect execution determination random number is not any random value. If they do not match, it is determined not to execute the light emission effect of the red flashing pattern.

  When it is determined that the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern is to be executed, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits a command instructing execution of the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern to the lamp control board 107 and the sound control board 106. On the other hand, the lamp control board 107 synchronizes the red flashing of the speaker lamp 671, the white flashing of the first start lamp 201, and the red flashing of the frame lamp 66, and the audio control board 106 The red corresponding winning sound is output, and the normal BGM output from the speaker 67 is changed to the second special BGM (corresponding to the light emission effect of the red flashing pattern).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern is not executed, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not to execute the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern. Here, as illustrated in FIG. 96 and FIG. 97B, the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern suggests that it develops in the pseudo third series, or does not develop in the pseudo third series. It is a reserved look-ahead effect that suggests the development of a special reach production. For this reason, as described above, the effect control microcomputer 91 changes the first special symbol that is the prefetch target based on the change pattern specified by the prior determination process and the change effect pattern selection table corresponding to the change pattern. During the display, it is determined whether or not two pseudo-continuous productions are performed to develop to the pseudo third sequence, or whether to develop to SPSP reach or special reach production without developing to the pseudo third sequence.

  Here, when it is determined that the production control microcomputer 91 does not develop to the pseudo third series, and does not develop to the SPSP reach or the special reach production without developing the pseudo third series, the green blinking pattern It is determined not to execute the light emission effect. On the other hand, if it is determined that the production control microcomputer 91 develops to the pseudo third series or develops from the pseudo first series (or pseudo second series) to the SPSP reach or the special reach production, the special diagram 1 Based on whether or not the light emission effect execution determination random number obtained when the start ball entering command is received matches one of the random number values stored in the ROM of the effect control board 90, the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern is determined. Decide whether to execute. Specifically, when the acquired light emission effect execution determination random number matches any random value, it is determined to execute the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern, and the acquired light emission effect execution determination random number is the same as any random value. If they do not match, it is determined not to execute the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern.

  When it is determined that the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern is to be executed, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits a command instructing execution of the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern to the lamp control board 107 and the sound control board 106. On the other hand, the lamp control board 107 synchronizes the green blinking of the speaker lamp 671 and the white blinking of the first start-up lamp 201, and the voice control board 106 causes the speaker 67 to output a green corresponding winning sound. The normal BGM output from the speaker 67 is changed to the first special BGM (corresponding to the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern).

  Further, when it is determined that the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern is not executed, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not to execute the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern. As is apparent from the notations in FIGS. 96 and 97A, the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern is a reserved pre-reading effect that does not suggest any effect performed during the variable display of the first special symbol that is the pre-reading target. . For this reason, the production control microcomputer 91 matches the random number value stored in the ROM of the production control board 90 with the light emission production execution determination random number obtained when the special figure 1 start entry command is received. Based on whether or not, it is determined whether or not to execute the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern. Specifically, when the acquired light emission effect execution determination random number matches any random value, it is determined to execute the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern, and the acquired light emission effect execution determination random number is the same as any random value. If they do not match, it is determined not to execute the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern.

  When it is determined that the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern is to be executed, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits a command instructing execution of the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern to the lamp control board 107 and the sound control board 106. On the other hand, the lamp control board 107 synchronizes the blue blinking of the speaker lamp 671 and the white blinking of the first start-up lamp 201, and the voice control board 106 causes the speaker 67 to output a blue winning sound.

  As is apparent from the notation of FIG. 96, in the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern, two effect changes, that is, the output of the blue winning sound and the white blinking of the first start lamp 201 are combined, and the light emission of the green blinking pattern is combined. In the production, the output of the green winning sound, the white blinking of the first start opening lamp 201, and the BGM change are combined, and in the lighting effect of the red blinking pattern, the red winning winning sound is output and the first starting opening. There is a characteristic that the effect change combined in the light emission effect increases as the light emission effect with high jackpot reliability, such as four effect changes of white blinking of the lamp 201, BGM change, and red blinking of the frame lamp 66, are combined. . For this reason, the player can sensuously recognize the jackpot reliability based on the amount of effect change combined in the light emission effect.

  Also, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player wins the enemy character X in X battle and is notified of the jackpot, 4R becomes the first jackpot (see FIG. 6), and after the jackpot game ends. The high and low base state is an advantageous state for a player who can expect a lot of prize balls and frequently wins a small hit until the next big hit. For this reason, the player's expectation for the transition to the high-accuracy low base state is effected by executing the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern that suggests the execution of the X battle that can be a trigger for the transition to the high-accuracy low base state Can be improved.

(Effects of lighting effects)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the speaker lamp 671 (and the frame lamp 66) may emit light in red (an example of a specific color), and the player performs an SPSP reach X battle. Can be recognized in advance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the X battle will be executed before the X battle is started, and the X battle and the speaker lamp 671 (and the frame lamp 66) emit light in red. A high production effect can be obtained by a synergistic effect with the production to be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the speaker lamp 671 (and the frame lamp 66) may emit red light before the variable display of the first special symbol (and effect symbol) for which the X battle is executed is started. For this reason, the speaker lamp 671 (and the frame lamp 66) emits red light (an example of a specific color) from when the first special symbol (and the effect symbol) starts to change until the X battle starts. Compared to the case, the player can recognize that the X battle is executed at an earlier stage, and can obtain a higher performance effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the red winning sound is output from the speaker 67 as the speaker lamp 671 emits red light, the player overlooks that the speaker lamp 671 emits red light. For this reason, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a problem that the player cannot recognize in advance that the X battle is executed.

(Modifications related to lighting effects)
In addition, you may employ | adopt the following structures regarding a light emission effect.
In other words, in the present embodiment, the red blinking of the speaker lamp 671 is started before the variable display of the first special symbol to be prefetched is started (before the held first special symbol success / failure determination is executed). Although the case has been described, in another embodiment, the flashing of the speaker lamp 671 in red may be started after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol to be read ahead.

  Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrated the case where the light emission effect of a red blinking pattern was performed only when X battle was performed during the fluctuation | variation display of the 1st special symbol of prefetching object, in other embodiment, it is. In addition to the X battle, when any SPSP reach is executed, a light emission effect of a red blinking pattern may be executed.

  Further, the light emission pattern and the light emission color of the speaker lamp 671 relating to each light emission effect are not limited to those exemplified in the present embodiment, and other light emission patterns and light emission colors may be used. For example, regarding the light emission effect of the red flashing pattern, the speaker lamp 671 may emit light with a light emission pattern in which the red light emission and white light emission of the speaker lamp 671 are alternately repeated, or the speaker lamp 671 may continuously emit light in red.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the light emitting means (speaker lamp 671 in the present embodiment) is arranged in proximity to the speaker 67 that outputs the production sound will be described. In other embodiments, the light emitting means is the speaker 67. You may arrange | position in the distant position.

[About mini character battle production]
Next, a mini character battle effect performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram illustrating icons that can be acquired in the mini character battle effect. 99 to 101 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the mini character battle effect.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, icon suggestion effects (see FIG. 87 and the like) and pseudo-continuous effects (for example, FIG. 87) are suggested effects suggesting that a jackpot game may be executed. 68), the development gimmick production (see FIG. 67 (L)), the second big chance notice (see FIG. 67 (M)), and the X battle (see FIG. 77 (G)), which are the development opportunities for SPSP reach. Is called. On the other hand, in the mini character battle direction, the mini self character that is the small self character and the mini enemy character that is the small enemy character battle on the first display screen 7a, and the mini self character wins the mini enemy character. In this case, the mini character will acquire an icon for notifying that the suggested effect will be executed, and the icon will be displayed on the first display screen 7a (see FIGS. 99 to 101).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, as icons that can be acquired by the mini character in this mini character battle effect, a hold change icon, a NEXT icon, an extended gimmick effect icon, a second great chance A notice icon and an X battle icon are prepared. Here, the hold change icon is an icon for notifying that the hold icon or the icon change effect for the icon is executed. The NEXT icon is an icon for notifying that the pseudo continuous effect will be executed. The developed gimmick effect icon is an icon for notifying that the developed gimmick effect is executed. The second big chance notice icon is an icon for notifying that the second big chance notice is executed. The X battle icon is an icon for notifying that the X battle is executed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the period during which the “target variation” that is the variation display of the first special symbol that is the target of prefetching is performed, and the variation display of the first special symbol that is performed before the target variation. A mini-character battle effect is performed using “pre-subject variation”. Specifically, the first battle between the mini player character and the mini enemy character is performed in the pre-subject variation immediately before the target variation, and the first battle between the mini player character and the mini enemy character is performed in the target variation. I do. Specifically, it is as follows.

  In FIG. 99 (A), in the state where one hold icon related to the first special symbol success / failure determination is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, an effect design corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e ( And the state where the variable display of the first special symbol) is performed is illustrated. In this manner, when a game ball wins the first starting port 20 in a state where the effect symbol variation display is performed, based on the special symbol success / failure determination random number, the variation pattern random number, or the like acquired in accordance with the winning. The pre-determination process described above is executed. And based on the prior determination result which is the result of this prior determination process, it is determined whether the icon change effect mentioned above is performed.

  FIG. 99B illustrates a state in which it is determined that the icon change effect is executed, and a red icon (see FIG. 86) is newly displayed as the second hold icon in the hold icon display area 9c. . Although details will be described later, when the pre-determination process is executed as described above, whether or not to execute the mini character battle effect is determined based on the pre-determination result, and the mini character battle effect is executed. When determined, the following effects are performed.

  That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 99 (A) and 99 (B), a hold icon (here, a red icon) indicating that the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol that is a prefetch target has been held is a hold icon display area. At substantially the same time as displayed in 9c, the effect symbol display area 7b (an example of the first display area: see FIG. 3) in which the left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol are displayed is narrower than the effect symbol display area 7b. The effect symbol display area 7c (an example of the second display area: see FIG. 99B) is changed. In other words, the display control is switched from the first display control for variably displaying the effect symbol in the effect symbol display area 7b to the second display control for variably displaying the effect symbol in the effect symbol display area 7c. As a result, each effect symbol constituting the three symbol sequences displayed on the first display screen 7a is reduced and displayed. Then, for example, above the effect symbol display area 7c, a mini character battle effect image display area 7d (an example of a third display area: FIG. 99 (B) for displaying a mini player character, a mini enemy character, or the like used for the mini character battle effect. )) Is secured. FIG. 99B illustrates a state in which the mini character and the mini enemy character are displayed in the mini character battle effect image display area 7d almost simultaneously with the mini character battle effect image display area 7d being secured. .

  Next, the second hold icon (here, red icon: hereinafter also referred to as “prefetch target icon”) corresponding to the first special symbol success / failure determination as the prefetch target is performed at the timing when it is newly displayed. When a predetermined time elapses after the display of 1 special symbol and effect symbol is started, for example, the left 5 symbols are pseudo-stopped and the right 8 symbols are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 99C). Then, while the left 5 symbols and right 8 symbols are pseudo-stopped, the middle 3 symbols are pseudo-stopped, and as the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol elapses, these three effect symbols are fully stopped. (See FIG. 99D). Note that the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e is erased from the icon display area 9e immediately before the three effect symbols are stopped.

  Subsequently, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the first special symbol and the three effect symbols are stopped, the first special symbol validity determination corresponding to the first hold icon is executed. Then, a shift process is performed for each hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. Specifically, the first hold icon (white icon) displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon and displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. The prefetch target icon (red icon) is shifted to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the first hold icon. Then, in response to the execution of the first special symbol success / failure determination, the variation display of the first special symbol is started, and at the same time, the variation display of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display area 7c is started (FIG. 99 ( D) and (E)). That is, in the state where the display area where the effect symbol is displayed is changed from the effect symbol display region 7b to the effect symbol display region 7c (state where the effect symbol is reduced), the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The

  In this way, when the pre-target variation immediately before the target variation is started, the first battle between the mini player character and the mini enemy character is started (see FIG. 99E). FIG. 99 (E) shows an example in which the mini character attacks the dinosaur-type mini enemy character with a light gun. When this mini character's attack hits a mini enemy character, a predetermined effect display representing the state is performed (see FIG. 99 (F)). When the mini player character wins, the defeated mini enemy character is erased from the mini character battle effect image display area 7d, and the item is displayed at the position where the mini enemy character was displayed (see FIG. 99 (G)). FIG. 99 (G) illustrates a state in which two NEXT icons for notifying that two pseudo-continuous effects are executed in the target variation are displayed.

  Note that FIG. 99G illustrates a state where two NEXT icons are acquired, but an icon different from the NEXT icon may be acquired. Further, the number of icons acquired in one battle is not limited to two, and there may be a case where one icon is acquired or three or more icons are acquired. Further, in the first battle, the mini character is attacked by the mini enemy character, and as a result, the icon may not be acquired.

  Next, when two NEXT icons are displayed instead of the mini enemy characters, these NEXT icons move to the right region on the first display screen 7a (see FIGS. 99G and 99H). At that time, the state that the mini character wins and is pleased is displayed. The display of each icon in the right region is continued until the corresponding suggestive effect is executed.

  When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the pre-subject change immediately before the target change, for example, in the effect design display area 7c, the left two symbols are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 99 (G)), and then the right 6 The symbol is pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 99 (H)). Then, the next (monster type) mini enemy character that the mini player character battles in the second battle is newly displayed in the mini character battle effect image display area 7d during the scroll display of the middle symbol row. (See FIG. 99 (I)).

  In addition, here, the case where a mini enemy character that fights against the mini-own character in the second battle is displayed at the end of the pre-target change one time before the target change will be described. There may be a case where a mini enemy character fighting with the mini character is displayed in the second battle.

  Subsequently, when the left two symbols are pseudo-stopped and the right six symbols are pseudo-stopped, the middle four symbols are pseudo-stopped, and these three effects are produced as the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol elapses. The symbol is completely stopped (see FIG. 100A). Note that the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e is erased from the icon display area 9e immediately before the three effect symbols are stopped.

  With respect to the pre-subject change immediately before the target change, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the first special symbol and the three effect symbols are stopped, the first corresponding to the prefetch target icon. A special symbol success / failure determination is executed, and a shift process is performed on the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. Specifically, the prefetch target icon (here, the red icon) displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon (see FIGS. 100A and 100B). Then, when the first special symbol variation determination is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol to be prefetched, the variation display of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display area 7c is started ( (See FIGS. 100A and 100B).

  In this way, when the target variation is started, the second battle between the mini player character and the mini enemy character is started (see FIG. 100C). FIG. 100C illustrates a state in which the mini player character attacks the (second) mini enemy character with a light gun. When this mini character's attack hits a mini enemy character, a predetermined effect display representing the state is performed (see FIG. 100D). When the mini player character wins, the defeated mini enemy character is deleted from the mini character battle effect image display area 7d, and the item is displayed at the position where the mini enemy character was displayed (see FIG. 100E). FIG. 100 (E) illustrates a state in which a second big chance notice icon (see FIG. 98) including the characters “Gekiatsu” for notifying that the second big chance notice is executed in the target change is displayed. Has been.

  FIG. 100 (E) illustrates a state in which the second great chance notice icon is acquired, but an icon different from the second big chance notice icon (for example, a development gimmick effect icon, an X battle icon) is displayed. You may win. In addition, the number of icons acquired in two battles is not limited to one, and two or more icons may be acquired. Further, in the second battle, the mini character is attacked by the mini enemy character, and as a result, the icon may not be acquired.

  Next, when the second big chance notice icon is displayed instead of the mini enemy character, the second big chance notice icon moves to the right area on the first display screen 7a (FIGS. 100E and 100F). )reference). Since the two NEXT icons acquired in the first battle are displayed in the right area, the second big chance notice icon is displayed above these icons. In this way, when the icon movement acquired in the second battle is displayed, the mini character battle effect ends, and the mini character battle that represents the appearance of the mini character appearing in the mini character battle effect leaving the first display screen 7a. An end effect related to the effect is performed (see FIG. 100F).

  Thus, when the end effect relating to the mini character battle effect is performed, the first display control for variably displaying the effect symbol in the effect symbol display region 7b from the second display control for variably displaying the effect symbol in the effect symbol display region 7c. The display control is switched to (see FIGS. 100F and 100G). Thereby, each effect symbol which comprises three symbol sequences displayed on the 1st display screen 7a comes to be displayed by the original size. Each icon displayed in the right region of the first display screen 7a continues to be displayed at the same position even after the mini-character battle effect is completed (see FIGS. 100F and 100G).

  When the mini character battle effect ends during the target change, first, the left 6 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 100G), and then the right 4 symbols are pseudo-stopped (FIG. 100 (H )reference). Then, although not shown in the figure, the sliding of these 6 symbols on the left and 4 symbols on the right occurs, and the scroll display of the symbol rows on the left column and the right column is resumed. In this way, when the scroll display of the left and right symbol columns is resumed, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed immediately after that (FIG. 100 (I) and FIG. 101 (A)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 100 (I), an effect representing a situation in which the left 6 symbols, the middle 7 symbols (pseudo-continuous symbols), and the right 4 symbols slowly move toward the effective line. Display is performed. As illustrated in FIG. 101 (A), two NEXT icons displayed in the right region of the first display screen 7a are almost simultaneously with the three effect symbols on the active line. One of them moves to the central area of the first display screen 7a, and the NEXT icon is superimposed on the middle 7 symbols.

  In this way, when the first pseudo-continuous effect is executed with the release of the first NEXT icon stocked in the mini-character battle effect, the pseudo-second continuous variable effect is started (FIG. 101). (See (B)). When a predetermined time elapses after the pseudo second-stage variation effect is started, for example, the left 6 symbols and the right 6 symbols are pseudo-stopped and reach is established (see FIG. 101C). Immediately thereafter, the middle 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped during the reach symbols (here, 6 symbols) (see FIG. 101D). At that time, as illustrated in FIG. 101 (D), the second NEXT icon left in the right area of the first display screen 7a moves to the central area of the first display screen 7a. The NEXT icon is superimposed on the middle 7 symbols.

  Then, when the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed with the release of the second NEXT icon stocked in the mini-character battle effect, the pseudo-third continuous variable effect is started (FIG. 101 (E )reference). In addition, although the case where the pre-reach pseudo-ream and the post-reach pseudo-ream are performed once for each of the two NEXT icons has been described as an example, There may be a case where a pseudo-ream is performed after reaching twice.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating third-stage variation effect, for example, reach symbols (here, 6 symbols) are displayed in the upper left region and upper right region of the first display screen 7a. The development gimmick effect is executed in a state where the simulation is stopped (see FIG. 101 (F)). FIG. 101 (F) illustrates a state in which the above-described advanced gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)) is performed in a state where a red icon as a prefetch target icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e. ing. When this development gimmick effect is performed, a darkening effect (see FIG. 87 (B)) is performed (see FIG. 101 (G)) that makes the player expect that a second big chance notice will occur.

  When this darkening effect is performed, there are a case where the second large chance notice is performed and a case where the second large chance notice is not performed. Since the second big chance notice icon is displayed, the second big chance notice is always executed following the darkening effect. Specifically, the second large chance notice icon displayed in the right area of the first display screen 7a moves to the center area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 101 (H)), and the second When the large chance notice icon is displayed in the central area for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the above-described second big chance notice is executed based on FIG. 67 (M) and FIG. See I)).

  As described above, when the second great chance notice is executed, the SPSP reach is developed, and the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed in the SPSP reach.

  As is apparent from the above description, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first display is performed over the period in which the pre-subject change before the target change is performed and the period in which the target change is performed. When the second display control for variably displaying the effect symbol is performed in the effect symbol display area 7c of the screen 7a, the big hit game is executed by using the mini character battle effect image display area 7d different from the effect symbol display area 7c. It is possible to execute a notice effect (in this embodiment, a mini character battle effect) for notifying that a suggestion effect suggesting that there is a possibility of being performed.

(About processing to realize mini character battle production)
Next, a process executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to realize a mini character battle effect will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is won at the first start port 20 during the display of the variation of the first special symbol and the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is held, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the above-described pre-determination process based on the special symbol success / failure random numbers, the variation pattern random numbers, etc. acquired in accordance with the winnings, and sends the special figure 1 start pitching command including the pre-determination results to the sub-control board. 90. On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not to execute the mini-character battle effect based on the prior determination result included in the special figure 1 start entering command.

  Here, the mini-character battle effect in the present embodiment is a notice effect that is performed using two variations: a target variation and a pre-subject variation one before the target variation. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the special figure 1 start entry command transmitted from the main control board 80, the special figure 1 start entry command displays the second and subsequent hold icons. It is determined whether the command is an instruction. Here, when it is determined that the command is not for instructing the display of the second and subsequent hold icons, that is, when the command is for instructing the display of the first hold icon, the first battle of the mini character battle effect is performed. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines not to execute the mini character battle effect.

  On the other hand, if the microcomputer 91 for effect control determines that the received special figure 1 start incoming command is a command for instructing display of the second and subsequent hold icons, it is included in the special figure 1 start incoming command. The variation pattern of the first special symbol to be selected is determined based on the preliminary determination result, and the first special symbol determination that is held is performed based on the preliminary determination result. Then, with reference to the variation effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specified variation pattern, when the variation effect pattern is selected based on the variation effect pattern determination table, the pseudo-continuous effect, the development gimmick effect, the second big chance notice And at least one of the X battles is determined. Further, as described above, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect, and when it is determined to execute the icon change effect, the target change or the target immediately before the target change is determined. It is determined whether or not a change pattern for changing the icon display mode is set in the previous variation.

  Here, if none of the pseudo-continuous effect, the development gimmick effect, the second chance notice, the X battle, and the icon change effect (in the target change or the previous target change), the mini character temporarily Even if a battle production is performed, only a mini character battle production in which the mini character loses both times in two battles can be performed. For this reason, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the pseudo-continuous effect, the development gimmick effect, the second great chance notice, the X battle, and the icon change effect (in the target change or the previous target change). If it is determined that there is no mini character battle effect, it is determined not to be executed.

  In addition, as the production pattern of the mini character battle production, the first production pattern in which the mini player character wins in both of the two battles, and the mini player character wins in the first battle and defeats in the second battle. A second effect pattern and a third effect pattern in which the mini character loses in the first battle and wins in the second battle are prepared. Therefore, when any one of the above effects is executed, a mini character battle effect can be executed.

  On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not to execute the mini-character battle effect in addition to the group notice execution decision random number, group notice selection random number, and light emission effect execution decision random number described above in the random number update process described above. The process of updating the random number for determining the mini-character battle effect for performing is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle. When the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the special figure 1 start entering command relating to the first special symbol success / failure determination, the special control board 80 receives the special character from the main control board 80 regarding the mini character battle effect execution decision random number that is appropriately updated by the random number update process. The count value at the time of receiving the 1 start entry command is acquired as a mini character battle effect execution decision random number.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 has any one of the pseudo-continuous effect, the development gimmick effect, the second big chance notice, the X battle, and the icon change effect (in the target change or the previous target change). If it is determined that the mini character battle effect execution determination random number obtained when the special figure 1 start entry command is received matches with any of the random number values stored in the ROM of the effect control board 90 Based on whether or not, it is determined whether or not to execute the mini character battle effect. Specifically, if the acquired mini-character battle execution execution random number matches any random value, it is determined that the mini-character battle execution execution is executed, and the acquired mini-character battle execution execution determination random number matches any random value. If not, it is determined not to execute the mini character battle effect.

  Here, when it is determined that the mini character battle effect is executed, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an effect pattern of the mini character battle effect. For example, if any one of the suggested effects to be executed is a pseudo-series effect, a development gimmick effect, a second chance announcement, an X battle, and an icon change effect, the mini character is the first battle. After winning the icon and acquiring an icon for notifying that the suggested performance will be executed, after the second production pattern that is defeated in the second battle, or after the mini character is defeated in the first battle In the second battle, the second effect pattern is set to acquire an icon for notifying that one of the suggested effects will be executed by winning. On the other hand, when there are a plurality of suggested effects to be executed, the first effect in which the mini character wins both of the two battles and acquires an item for notifying the execution of each suggested effect in each battle. Set the pattern.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits a command instructing execution of the mini character battle effect including setting information indicating the effect pattern of the mini character battle effect to the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. To do. On the other hand, the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106 perform effect control necessary for realizing the instructed mini character battle effect.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, to what extent there is a possibility that the first big chance notice (see FIG. 74 (I)) is executed due to the rank-up effect (see FIGS. 72 to 74). It is suggested. On the other hand, if an icon for notifying that the first big chance notice is executed is displayed in the mini character battle effect, the function of the rank increase effect is greatly impaired, and the interest of the rank increase effect is remarkably increased. It may be reduced. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an icon for notifying that the first big chance notice is executed is not displayed in the mini character battle effect.

(Effects of mini character battle production)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the effect symbol is variably displayed in the effect symbol display area 7c of the first display screen 7a, the mini character battle effect image display (different from the effect symbol display area 7c) is performed. Using the area 7d, a notice effect (in this embodiment, a mini-character battle effect) for notifying that the suggestive effect (which suggests that a jackpot game may be executed) is executed. For this reason, the mini character battle effect can be executed without hindering the fluctuation display of the effect symbol, and the synergistic effect of the variable effect that displays the effect symbol in a variable manner and the mini character battle effect provides a highly interesting effect. It is possible to execute.

  In addition, according to such a gaming machine, a period during which the first special symbol is variably displayed in a state in which the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is retained (period in which pre-target variation is performed), and the first special symbol A mini-character battle effect is executed over a period in which the first special symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the determination of whether or not the symbol is determined (period in which the target variation is performed). For this reason, compared to the case of performing a mini character battle effect using only the latter period, the mini character battle effect is less subject to time restrictions and can execute a variety of mini character battle effects with a longer effect execution time. It is.

(Modifications related to mini character battle production)
In addition, you may employ | adopt the following structures regarding a mini character battle production.
In other words, in the present embodiment, the execution of the suggestion effect is performed based on the results of the two battles in total, such as performing the first battle with the pre-target variation immediately before the target variation and performing the second battle with the target variation. Explained the case of prior notice. On the other hand, in another embodiment, the battle may be performed only once in either one of the target fluctuation and the pre-target fluctuation immediately before the target fluctuation. Further, for example, a total of three battles may be performed using the target variation, the pre-target variation just before the target variation, and the pre-target variation two times before the target variation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first battle is defeated and the second battle is developed has been described as an example. However, when the first battle is defeated, the second battle is not developed. Good. In addition, when adopting a configuration that performs a total of three battles as described above, if the second battle is defeated, it will not develop into a third battle, but if the first battle is defeated It is conceivable to adopt a configuration that does not develop into the second and subsequent battles.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbol display area 7b is a holding icon display area 9c and a display area above the icon display area 9e, and the effect symbol display area 7c is centered on the approximate center of the first display screen 7a. The case where the effect symbol display area 7b is a reduced display area and the mini character battle effect image display area 7d is an upper area of the effect symbol display area 7c has been described as an example. The size and position are not limited to those exemplified in the form.

  Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrated the case where an item is displayed after performing a battle in the mini character battle effect image display area 7d (notifying that the suggestion effect is executed), in other embodiments, the battle is performed. One or a plurality of items may be displayed without performing. That is, the notice effect for notifying that the suggestion effect is executed is not limited to the effect for notifying the execution of the suggestion effect according to the result of the battle. For example, in the case of developing into an X battle, the enemy character X Other notice effects (related to the suggestion effect) may be displayed.

[Specific example of variation display of production design]
Hereinafter, a specific example of the effect symbol variation display will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105. Here, FIGS. 102 to 105 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the effect symbol variation display.

  Up to this point, for the convenience of explanation that the description related to the variation display of the effect symbol is not more complicated than necessary, the explanation regarding the variation effect has been given on the assumption that each effect symbol is composed of only numbers. Each effect symbol constituting the symbol sequence includes a number representing a number different from other effect symbols, a character image indicating a character corresponding to the number, and a vertically long panel image functioning as a background of the number and the character image. (See FIG. 102A).

  FIG. 102 (A) shows a “835” spot that informs that the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is lost in a state where three hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. The state where three effect symbols are fully stopped is illustrated. When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the three effect symbols are stopped, the first special symbol corresponding to the first hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is determined. The determination is executed, and in response to this, the variable display of the first special symbol and the scroll display of the three symbol rows are started (see FIG. 102B). Accordingly, the first hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e, and the remaining hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 9c are shifted to the icon display area 9e. Shift processing is performed (see FIGS. 102A and 102B).

  When a predetermined time elapses after the first special symbol variation display and the three symbol row scroll display are started, for example, the left four symbols are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 102C). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 102 (C), when the left four symbols are displayed when the scroll speed of the left symbol row gradually decreases to “0”, the left four symbols are displayed. Are rotated alternately in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions with the scroll direction (downward direction) of the three symbol rows as the axial direction. Along with this, the number “4” constituting the left four symbols makes one rotation counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, and although not shown in the figure, the character image constituting the left four symbols shows The character D performs a predetermined action.

  In this way, when the number “4” constituting the left four symbols makes one rotation counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, the number “4” constituting the left four symbols and the character D are shown thereafter. The character image and the panel image constituting the left 4 symbols are integrated and rotated alternately clockwise and counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, thereby continuing the pseudo stop of the left 4 symbols ( (See FIG. 102D).

  When a predetermined time elapses after the left four symbols are pseudo-stopped, for example, the right six symbols are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 102D). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 102D, when the scroll speed of the right symbol row gradually decreases to “0”, for example, the right six symbols are displayed, Panel images constituting the pattern are alternately rotated clockwise and counterclockwise with the scroll direction as an axial direction. Along with this, the number “6” constituting the right 6 symbol rotates once counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, and although not shown in the figure, the character image constituting the right 6 symbol shows The character F performs a predetermined action. Then, when the number “6” constituting the right 6 symbol makes one rotation counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, the number “6” constituting the right 6 symbol, the character image indicating the character F, And the panel images constituting the right 6 symbols are integrally rotated in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction with the scroll direction as the axial direction, thereby continuing the pseudo stop of the right 6 symbols (FIG. 102 ( E)).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses after the right six symbols are pseudo-stopped, the middle one symbol is pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 102E). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 102E, when the scroll speed of the middle symbol row gradually decreases to “0”, for example, when one middle symbol is displayed, Panel images constituting the pattern are alternately rotated clockwise and counterclockwise with the scroll direction as an axial direction. Along with this, the number “1” constituting the middle symbol makes one rotation counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, and although not shown in the figure, the character image constituting the middle symbol is shown. Character A performs a predetermined action. When the number “1” constituting the middle symbol is rotated once counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, the number “1” constituting the middle symbol, the character image indicating the character A, In addition, the panel images constituting the middle symbol are integrally rotated in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction with the scroll direction as the axial direction, whereby the pseudo stop of the middle symbol is continued.

  Here, the current determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “losing”, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is a variation pattern with a short variation time for executing the loss notification effect without executing the reach effect. If set, the left 4 symbols, the right 6 symbols, and the middle 1 symbol that have been pseudo-stopped are stopped as they are, and a loss is notified (see FIG. 102F).

  As described above, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the three effect symbols indicating the “416” breakage are stopped, the first one displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. First special symbol success / failure determination corresponding to the hold icon is executed, and in response to this, scroll display of the first special symbol and the three symbol rows is started (see FIG. 102 (G)). Accordingly, the first hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e, and the remaining hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 9c are moved to the icon display area 9e. Shift processing for shifting is performed (see FIGS. 102F and 102G).

  When the first hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon, immediately after that, the icon (here, the white icon) is changed to a green icon, for example. A change effect may be performed (see FIGS. 102G and 102H).

  When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol and the scroll display of the three symbol rows corresponding to this icon (here, the green icon), for example, the left six symbols are pseudo-stopped (FIG. 102 ( I)). More specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 102 (I), when the scroll speed of the left symbol row gradually decreases to “0” and, for example, the left six symbols are displayed, Panel images constituting the pattern are alternately rotated clockwise and counterclockwise with the scroll direction as an axial direction. Along with this, the number “6” constituting the left 6 symbol makes one rotation counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, and although not shown in the figure, the character image constituting the left 6 symbol shows The character F performs a predetermined action.

  In this way, when the number “6” constituting the left 6 symbol makes one rotation counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, the number “6” constituting the left 6 symbol and the character F are shown thereafter. The character image and the panel image constituting the left 6 symbols are integrally rotated in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions with the scroll direction as the axial direction, thereby continuing the pseudo stop of the left 6 symbols ( (See FIG. 103A).

  When a predetermined time elapses after the left six symbols are pseudo-stopped, for example, the right two symbols are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 103A). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 103 (A), when the scroll speed of the symbol row in the right column is reduced to multiplication and becomes “0”, for example, the right 2 symbols are displayed, the right 2 symbol is displayed. The panel image and the character image constituting the symbol swing up and down. Along with this, the number “2” constituting the right two symbols makes one rotation counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction. Then, immediately after that, the right two symbols slip, the scroll display of the right symbol row is resumed (see FIG. 103 (B)), and the pseudo-continuous effect occurs immediately after that (FIG. 103 (C) ˜). (See (E)). Specifically, an effect display showing a state in which the scroll speed of the right-side symbol row and the middle-row symbol row rapidly decreases and the right 2 symbols and 7 middle symbols (pseudo-continuous symbols) descend together. Is performed (see FIGS. 103C and 103D). At the same time as these symbols move to approximately the same height as the left six symbols, the left six symbols and right three symbols are hidden, and the middle seven symbols are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 103 (E)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 103 (E), the panel image and character image constituting the middle 7 symbols swing vertically, and the number “7” constituting the middle 7 symbols is scrolled. One turn counterclockwise with the direction as the axial direction.

  When the first pseudo-continuous effect is performed in this way, the scroll display of the three symbol sequences is resumed, and the pseudo second-stage variable effect is started (see FIG. 103 (F)). Subsequently, when a predetermined time elapses after the pseudo second-stage variation effect is started, for example, the left four symbols are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 103 (G)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 103 (G), when the scroll speed of the left symbol row gradually decreases to “0”, the left four symbols are displayed, and the panels constituting the left four symbols. As the image rotates alternately clockwise and counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, the number “4” constituting the left four symbols makes one rotation counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction. To do. At that time, although not shown in the figure, the character D indicated by the character image constituting the left four symbols performs a predetermined action. After that, the number “4” constituting the left four symbols, the character image indicating the character D, and the panel image constituting the left four symbols are integrated into the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction with the scroll direction as the axial direction. By alternately rotating to the left, the pseudo stop of the four left symbols is continued (see FIG. 103H).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses after the left 4 symbols are pseudo-stopped, for example, the right 4 symbols are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 103 (H)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 103 (H), the right 4 symbols are displayed when the scroll speed of the right symbol row gradually decreases to “0”, and the panels constituting the right 4 symbols are displayed. As the image rotates alternately clockwise and counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, the number “4” constituting the right 4 symbols makes one rotation counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction. To do. At that time, although not shown in the figure, the character D indicated by the character image constituting the right four symbols performs a predetermined action. After that, the number “4” constituting the right 4 symbol, the character image indicating the character D, and the panel image constituting the right 4 symbol are integrated into the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction with the scroll direction as the axial direction. The pseudo-stop of the right four symbols is continued by rotating alternately.

  Thus, when the same four symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped and reach is established (see FIG. 103 (H)), an area for displaying the effect image related to the reach effect is displayed at the center of the first display screen 7a. In order to ensure, the left 4 symbols shift to the left and the right 4 symbols shift to the right (see FIG. 103 (I)). Then, the numbers, character images, and panel images that make up the left 4 symbols are swung up and down together, and the numbers, character images, and panel images that make up the right 4 symbols are swung up and down together. A predetermined normal short reach is performed in the moved state (see FIG. 104A).

  At the end of this normal short reach, a long development suggestion effect suggesting the development to normal long reach is performed in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 69 (A) (see FIG. 104 (B)). There is a case where reach production develops into normal long reach (see FIG. 104C). When developing into this normal long reach, the production pattern composed of numbers, character images, and panel images is composed of only numbers that are larger than when composed of numbers, character images, and panel images. It is displayed on the first display screen 7a as a symbol. In FIG. 104 (C), an effect that a predetermined character expects a uniform pattern in a state in which the left 4 symbols (consisting only of numerals) and the right 4 symbols swing up and down as the reach symbols. A state in which the display is performed is illustrated.

  Next, during this normal long reach, the above-mentioned predetermined character uses a storm symbol, which is a special symbol for notifying that the production mode shifts from the normal mode to the storm mode with the execution of the pseudo-continuous production. (See FIG. 104D). When this storm symbol is displayed, a post-reach pseudo-run as a second pseudo-run effect in the current design change occurs, and a pseudo third-run change effect is started (see FIG. 104 (E)). . Although not shown in FIG. 104, when the mode is shifted to the storm mode, the characters “storm mode” are displayed on the third display screen 72a (see FIG. 79E).

  When a predetermined time elapses after the development of the pseudo third series, the left three symbols and the right three symbols are pseudo-stopped and reach is established (see FIG. 104 (F)). In the state where this reach is established, since the reach performance with high hit reliability is higher than the normal short reach such as the normal long reach, the first SP reach, and the second SP reach, the number “3”, the character The three symbols composed of the character image indicating C and the panel image are pseudo-stopped so as to swing up and down as a reach symbol.

  Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the establishment of the reach, a development effect that leads to the first SP reach is performed (see FIGS. 104 (G) to (I)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 104 (G), first, the number “3” constituting the left three symbols rotates clockwise about the scroll direction as the axis direction, and the left three symbols are configured. Similarly, the character image and the panel image are rotated twice in the clockwise direction about the scroll direction, and an effect display representing a state in which the character image and the panel image are separated from the number “3” is performed. Along with this, the number “3” constituting the right 3 symbol makes one clockwise rotation with the scroll direction as the axial direction, and the character image and the panel image constituting the right 3 symbol also have the scroll direction as the axial direction. An effect display representing a state in which the character image and the panel image are separated from the number “3” is performed twice in the clockwise direction.

  When the character image and the panel image are separated from the left 3 symbol and the right 3 symbol in this way, as shown in FIG. 104 (H), these images fade out from the first display screen 7a. The left three symbols and the right three symbols composed only of the numeral “3” are enlarged and displayed. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 104 (I), in the process of moving to the upper left area of the first display screen 7a while the left three symbols are reduced, the scroll direction is rotated once in the clockwise direction about the axis direction. In the process of moving to the upper left area, and simultaneously moving to the upper right area of the first display screen 7a while reducing the right three symbols, the scroll direction is set to the clockwise direction to make one clockwise rotation and then the upper right area. Move to the area. The reach symbol moved to the upper left area and the upper right area on the first display screen 7a is displayed in a pseudo stop manner by rotating clockwise and counterclockwise with the scroll direction as an axial direction. This false stop display of reach symbols is continued until the end of SPSP reach (see FIGS. 70 and 71).

  By the way, if the reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) composed of numbers, character images, and panel images are reduced and displayed as they are in the upper left area and upper right area, respectively, the numbers that make up the reach pattern May become unnecessarily small, and as a result, the player may not be able to easily recognize which effect symbols have been reached. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the character image and the panel image are separated from the effect symbol composed of numbers, the character image, and the panel image, and the effect symbol consisting only of the numbers is reduced and displayed as the reach symbol. I am going to do that.

  When the left symbol and the right symbol as the reach symbols are reduced and displayed in the upper left region and the upper right region of the first display screen 7a, the first SP reach is executed using the central region of the first display screen 7a. (See FIG. 105A). As illustrated in FIG. 105 (A), with the development to the first SP reach, the effect icon (the pedestal of each hold icon in the present embodiment) constituting the hold icon and the hold icon display area 9c is erased. The Here, for example, when the variation effect pattern that develops from the first SP reach to the X battle is set, the following effects are performed. That is, for example, when the end of the first SP reach is reached, a similar losing effect is performed in which a middle symbol (here, four symbols) different from the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped in the central area of the first display screen 7a (FIG. 105). (See (B)).

  When this similar loss effect is performed, although not shown in FIG. 105, it is assumed that three effect symbols indicating the “343” reach loss eye are actually stopped, and the central area of the first display screen 7a is displayed. There may be a case where the characters “roulette chance” are displayed (see FIG. 80H). When this “roulette chance” character is displayed, a development destination selection effect for selecting the type of SPSP reach as the development destination is performed (see FIG. 105C). This development destination selection effect is as described above based on FIG.

  When the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period related to the development destination selection effect, one of the four panels related to the development destination selection effect (here, the X battle panel) is highlighted. In accordance with the end of the development destination selection effect, the development suggestion effect is performed in which the highlighted panel is enlarged and displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 105D). .

  In this way, when the development destination suggestion effect that suggests development to any one of SPSP reach (here, X battle) is performed, the above-described development gimmick effect is performed based on FIG. 105 (E)). Then, although not shown in FIG. 105, the darkening effect described above is performed based on FIG. 87 (B) and the like, and then the second big chance notice described above is executed based on FIG. 69 (G) and the like. (See FIG. 105 (F)). FIG. 105 illustrates the case where the second great chance notice is performed following the darkening effect, but following the darkening effect (not the second big chance notice), the own character appearance notice (see FIG. 87 ( C) may be performed, and the former has a higher jackpot reliability than the latter.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination in the low-probability low-base state is that a lot of winning balls can be obtained until the next jackpot due to frequent hitting after the jackpot game ends. When the 4R first big hit (see Fig. 6) is entered, the player will win the enemy character X in the X battle, and after the big hit game ends, In the case of the 4R second big hit (see FIG. 6) to be transferred, a configuration is adopted in which X battle itself is not performed even when developing to SPSP reach, that is, another battle of SPSP reach is performed. ing. In addition, in the low probability low base state, when the big win of 7 symbols is reached, a configuration is always employed in which the game always shifts to the high probability low base state after the big hit game ends.

  For this reason, if the game is developed into an X battle in a state where a reach symbol other than 7 symbols (here, 3 symbols) is displayed in the upper left region and the upper right region of the first display screen 7a, the title of the X battle When the display (see FIG. 105 (G)) is performed, the reach symbol is changed to 7 symbols (see FIGS. 105 (F) and (G)). 105 (F) and 105 (G) illustrate how the reach symbol changes from 3 symbols to 7 symbols.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol success / failure determination in the low probability low base state is 4R first big hit (see FIG. 6), normal short reach, normal long reach, There may be a case where a hit notification effect is performed in a battle other than the X battle of the first SP reach, the second SP reach, and the SPSP reach, in which the symbols other than 7 symbols are arranged. In these cases, when the 4R jackpot game is being played, a battle between the player character and the enemy character (for example, the enemy character X) is performed, and the transition to the high probability low base state after the jackpot game ends. (In order to notify) A victory effect representing the situation where the player wins in the battle is performed. On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination result in the low probability low base state is 4R second jackpot (see FIG. 6), the same battle is performed during the 4R jackpot game. In order to shift to the low-probability and high-base state without shifting to the low base state, a defeat effect that represents a situation where the player's character is defeated in the battle is performed. Also, if your character wins the enemy character X in the X battle, there is no need to perform the above victory effect during the jackpot game, so during the jackpot game, the battle between your character and the enemy character Different predetermined jackpot effects are performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a reach battle other than 7 symbols is displayed in the upper left region and the upper right region of the first display screen 7a, the battle is developed into an X battle. In doing so, a symbol change effect that changes the reach symbol to 7 symbols is performed, but in other embodiments, the following symbol change effect may be performed. That is, regarding the title display of the X battle, the title of “VS enemy character X” is displayed without displaying four stars indicating the winning expectation degree of the player character. After erasing this title, it displays four stars indicating the victory expectation of the player's character, and gradually expands while moving the left and right symbols downward (for example, up to the height of four stars). In the process of this enlarged movement display, the two reach symbols are changed to seven symbols. When the enlarged movement display is completed, 7 symbols are displayed as reach symbols in the upper left area and upper right area of the first display screen 7a.

  When the reach symbols displayed in the upper left region and the upper right region of the first display screen 7a are changed to seven symbols without changing the display position as in the present embodiment, for example, a game When the player is gazing at other parts of the first display screen 7a, the player is not aware of the symbol change effect in which the reach symbol changes to 7 symbols, and a sufficient effect of the symbol change effect cannot be obtained. Can be considered. On the other hand, if the symbol change effect accompanying the enlarged movement display described above is performed, the player can easily notice that the symbol change effect is being performed, and a sufficient effect of the symbol change effect cannot be obtained. It is possible to effectively suppress such a problem.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 105, when the X battle is started, an X battle reach effect image representing a state in which the own character and the enemy character X develop battles is displayed on the first display screen 7 a during the X battle ( (See FIG. 105 (H)). Then, when the end of the X battle is reached, the first effect button operation promotion effect is performed as described above based on FIG. 69 (I) and the like (see FIG. 105 (I)). The effect after the first effect button operation promotion effect is performed is the same as the effect described based on FIGS.

  As is apparent from the above description based on FIGS. 102 to 105, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, 1 symbol to 9 symbols which are effect symbols constituting the left, middle, and right symbol patterns. However, it is configured to have numbers, character images, and panel images, and when the effect symbol is pseudo-stopped, the numbers constituting the effect symbol rotate counterclockwise about the scroll direction as an axial direction. Along with this, the panel images constituting the effect symbols are alternately rotated clockwise and counterclockwise with the scroll direction of each symbol row as the axial direction, and the character indicated by the character image performs a predetermined action.

(Effects by changing the design symbols)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the effect symbol is displayed in a false stop, the numbers constituting the effect symbol are different from the fluctuation direction (scroll direction) in the first direction (the scroll direction is the axial direction). The counterclockwise direction), the player can easily recognize that the effect symbol is pseudo-stopped. Also, for example, compared to a case where the effect symbol is pseudo-stopped by simply swinging the effect symbol. Thus, it is possible to improve the interest of the production using the production design.

  In addition, when the effect symbol is displayed in a pseudo-stopped manner, the numbers, character images, and panel images constituting the effect symbol operate in different directions, so that when these components of the effect symbol fluctuate in the same direction In comparison, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the production using the production design.

(Variation related to variation display of production design)
It should be noted that the following configuration may be adopted with respect to the variation display of the effect symbol.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the effect symbol is pseudo-stopped, the number constituting the effect symbol has been described to rotate once counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axis direction, but the rotation angle of the number is 360 degrees. It is not limited. That is, for example, when an effect design composed of a number that is directed diagonally to the right is falsely stopped, the pachinko is rotated by, for example, 10 degrees counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction. The rotation angle of the numbers may be a small angle, such as facing the front of the gaming machine 1. Conversely, when the effect symbol is pseudo-stopped, it may be rotated by an angle larger than 360 degrees, such as rotating the numerals constituting the effect symbol twice.

  Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrated the case where the rotation direction of the number which comprises a production | presentation symbol was a counterclockwise direction (with the scroll direction as an axial direction), the rotation direction of a number is the scroll direction as an axial direction. Other directions such as a clockwise direction may be used.

  Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrated the case where the character image and the panel image were added to all the production | presentation symbols of 1 symbol-9 symbols which comprise each symbol row | line, in other embodiment, 1 symbol-9 A configuration may be employed in which a character image or a panel image is added to a part of the effect design of the design, and a character image or a panel image is not added to the remaining effect images.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the effect image is composed of numbers, character images, and panel images has been described, but the effect design may be composed of numbers and character images (not including panel images). . In this case, when the effect symbol is pseudo-stopped, a predetermined action is performed on the character indicated by the character image that constitutes the effect symbol, and the numbers constituting the effect symbol are counterclockwise (with the scroll direction as the axial direction). One example is to perform display control such as one rotation.

  In addition, the effect symbols constituting the left and right symbol columns may be effect symbols composed of only numbers, and the middle symbol string may be effect symbols composed of numbers and character images. In this case, when the stage design in the left row is pseudo-stopped, the number is moved in a direction different from the scroll direction, and when the stage design in the right row is pseudo-stopped, the number is moved in a direction different from the scroll direction. It is conceivable to perform display control such that when the effect design of the column is stopped in a pseudo manner, the number is moved in a direction different from the scroll direction and the character is caused to perform a predetermined action.

  Further, when the symbol row is scroll-displayed, an effect symbol composed of numbers that do not have a character image is displayed, and when the effect symbol is pseudo-stopped, the character image is displayed on the numbers constituting the effect symbol. You may employ | adopt the structure of adding. In this case, when the effect symbol is pseudo-stopped, the number constituting the effect symbol is operated in a direction different from the scroll direction, and at the same time, a character action indicated by the character image added to the number is caused to perform a predetermined action. It is conceivable to perform control.

[Other aspects]
In the present embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the effect symbol display unit are set according to the game state as a special symbol (the first special symbol described later or The display is changed in synchronization with the change display of the second special symbol. That is, one effect symbol (three digits) is displayed on the effect symbol display unit, and is synchronized with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the gaming state, thereby synchronizing with the first special symbol. And a case of being synchronized with the second special symbol. Instead of such a mode, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the fluctuation display of the first effect symbol is synchronized with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and the second effect symbol is changed to the second special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display. Further, when both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one special symbol) set as the main subject of the game in the gaming state is largely displayed (main subject) And the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (the other special symbol) that is not the main subject of the game may be displayed small. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. Also, not always displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol, but displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol according to the gaming state and the game situation, and the first There may be a case where one of the effect symbol and the second effect symbol (the main symbol) is displayed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the gaming machine described above, a “variable entrance” that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter, and a state where the game ball cannot enter, “Special game execution means” capable of executing a special game that allows the variable entrance to enter a ball when the result of the 1-win / no-go determination or the second win-win determination is successful. Further, the “second starter” may be a variable starter that can be changed between the first mode and the second mode in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first mode. In addition, a game state (first game state) in which a game ball enters the variable start port has a predetermined frequency, and a game in which a game ball enters the variable start port is higher than the game state. “Game state setting means” for setting the state (second game state) can be provided. Here, “predetermined frequency” includes zero.

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of times of opening the first grand prize port or the second grand prize port in one round is set to one, but a plurality of times of opening the first grand prize port or the second grand prize port in one round are set. It is also possible to have a round of different opening times. In the present embodiment, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are control processes that can be changed simultaneously. However, the second special figure hold is prioritized over the first special figure hold. Also, a so-called special figure 2 priority control process, a control process in which the first special figure hold is prioritized over the second special figure hold, or a so-called special figure 1 priority control process may be used. Also, the priority order is not set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are digested in order from the oldest stored one. Control processing, that is, control processing of so-called order of entering (memory order) digestion may be used.

  Also, it is a type of pachinko gaming machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and can enter a game ball that can enter and a game ball can enter There is a large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry impossible state, and if the result of the determination of success or failure based on the entry to the starting opening is a small hit, the large winning opening is made available for a predetermined time. This is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed when a game ball enters a big winning opening in a ball ready state and the game ball passes through a specific area, and a big hit game is executed. This pachinko gaming machine is called a so-called “1 type 2 type mixing machine”. When the result of the determination of success / failure based on the ball entering the start opening becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without passing through a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, it is possible to generate a high base state that increases the frequency of entering game balls into the start opening. Moreover, it has a 1st starting port and a 2nd starting port, and it shall generate | occur | produce the high base state which raises the entrance frequency to the 2nd starting port. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

  In the above-described embodiment, the probability of hitting can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by the non-operation / operation of the probability variation function. Is not limited to this. For example, three or more types of probabilities can be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). Also good. Furthermore, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. A plurality of types of probability conditions that define the relationship between a low probability and a high probability are provided, and any one of the plurality of types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable), for example, when the gaming machine is turned on. Also good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) stored in the special figure holding storage unit is read and the read acquired random number value (acquired information) is determined for the prior determination based on the starting entrance. Although (pre-determination) is performed ("starting ball entry process (S205)", see FIGS. 11, 13, etc.), the pre-determination method is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure holding storage unit, an area (acquisition information storage means) for storing acquisition information (that is, acquisition information acquired based on starting entry) to be subjected to prior determination is stored in the main control unit and sub-control. The acquired information stored in the storage area (preliminary determination storage unit) may be determined (preliminary determination). In this case, it is possible to erase the acquisition information (acquisition information stored in another storage area) used for the preliminary determination by storing the result of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit. Or it is good also as what pre-determines about the acquisition information acquired based on starting entrance instead of pre-determining about the acquisition information memorize | stored in the special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part. That is, it may be determined in advance before the acquired information is stored in the special figure storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquisition information to be subject to prior determination separately from the special figure storage unit, and it is also necessary to read out the acquisition information stored in the special figure storage unit for the preliminary determination. Absent.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the production mode D (state C, specific game state), when a specific period is started under a situation where three or more small hits are continuously stored, during the specific period Is a display of the winning ball number image S and the additional display of the winning ball count image C2 (second profit effect) based on the winning at the big winning prize winning opening etc., and when the specific period ends, An effect is provided in which the number of winning prize balls indicated by the ball count image C2 is added (summed) to the number of winning prize balls (total number of winning prize balls, total number of winning prize balls) of the winning ball count image C1. It was. On the other hand, when a new second special figure hold (entrance to the third start port 26) occurs during a specific period, and the hold is determined to be a small hit hold by a prior determination (hold prefetch) The specific period currently being executed may be extended. For example, it is assumed that a specific period is started in a situation where four small hit holds are continuously stored, and two small hit holds are digested after the start. At this time, the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “2”. Under that circumstance, if a new second special figure hold occurs and the special figure 2 hold ball count becomes “3” and it is determined in advance that the hold is a small hit hold, a specific period counter (see S5005) “+1” (add 1). Thus, the specific period is extended until the newly generated (stored) small hit hold is digested and the small hit game related to the small hit hold is completed. Alternatively, after the start of a specific period, two special hits have been digested and the special figure 2 reserve ball count is "2". It is assumed that the second special figure hold and the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 hold ball number “4” occur in succession. Then, the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 hold ball number “3” is a release hold, and the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 hold ball number “4” is a small hit hold beforehand. Assume that it has been determined. In this case, by incrementing the specific period counter (see S5005) by “+2” (added by 2), the small hit hold corresponding to the special figure 2 number of held balls “4” is consumed, and the small hit variation and the small hit game are completed. Until then, the specific period can be extended. In this way, by extending the specific period after the start of the specific period, a period in which the display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display (second profit effect) of the prize ball count image C2 is performed. Since it extends, it becomes possible to raise the effect effect of profit production more.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the two conditions of (1) three or more small hits hold continuously stored and (2) winning the start lottery of the specific period are determined based on the start of the specific period. However, the start condition for the specific period is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of (for example, two or more) small hits hold are stored although they are not continuous, and a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more) small hits hold is stored regardless of whether they are continuous or not. It is good also as a start condition of a specific period. In this case, the start condition of the specific period is relaxed compared to the embodiment, and the specific period is more likely to occur (easily started). Moreover, it is good also considering only the start condition of a specific period as (1) among (1) and (2) mentioned above.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a big hit that triggers setting of the state C (highly accurate low base state) occurs, the mode selection period for selecting the effect mode of the state C before shifting to the state C When the big hit is 4R big hit (4R first big hit, 4R fourth big hit), the mode selection period occurs during the big hit game ending period, and the 15R big hit (15R first big hit) In the case of 3 big hits, the mode selection period is assumed to occur in a predetermined round game (in this embodiment, from the start of 14R to the middle of 15R). On the other hand, if the number of jackpot rounds that triggers the setting of state C is one type of 10 rounds, for example, if the gaming state when the 10R jackpot occurs is state A (left-handed game), the ending period A mode selection period may occur during a predetermined round game (for example, 9R start to 10R midway) if a mode selection period occurs during state B or C (right-handed game). Among these, in the latter case, in the round before the mode selection period occurs, notification that the mode selection period starts from the next round (notification before selection period start) may be performed. In addition, the generation time when the mode selection period is generated in the round game during the big hit game, that is, the round that becomes the mode selection period is not limited to the embodiment, for example, from 5R start to 6R end. It may be generated in any round such as only the last round. Further, when the mode selection period is generated during the jackpot ending period, a notification that the mode selection period will be started (notification before the start of the selection period) is performed in the round effect of the final round before the ending period starts. It may be.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned Example, presentation mode selection (selection of presentation mode C or D) in the mode selection period was enabled based on operation of the presentation button. On the other hand, the production mode selection in the mode selection period may be automatically selected from among a plurality of production modes determined in advance by lottery or the like on the sub-control side. In this case, for example, with the start of the mode selection period, a roulette image (one aspect of the mode selection screen) is displayed on the display screen of the image display device, in which a plurality of presentation modes are divided into roulette shapes. An effect (roulette effect) in which one effect mode is determined (selected) by roulette lottery may be performed as an effect during the mode selection period (mode selection effect). In the present embodiment, there are two types of effect modes in state C (effect modes C and D), but three or more effect modes may be selected from among them.

  In addition, the aspect related to the variation display of the effect symbol shown in the above-described embodiment (variation aspect, stop aspect, reach effect aspect, etc.), the effect executed with the small hit in the state C (effect modes C, D) (Small-look prefetching effect, first profit effect, second profit effect, etc.), notice effect in display mode D (display of notice image), notification screen related to mode selection period, mode selection screen, etc. Various aspects of the effects are merely examples, and the aspects of the effects according to the present invention are not limited to the examples.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a preview image is displayed in the effect mode D, the preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a (the preview image display area U) of the image display device 7. On the other hand, you may comprise so that a preview image may be displayed on other image display apparatuses with which the said game machine is equipped, such as the display screen 71a of the 2nd image display apparatus 71, and the display screen 72a of the 3rd image display apparatus 72. . Further, in addition to the image display device composed of a liquid crystal display, other display means (effect display device) for other effects such as a dot display and a drum display are provided, and the display mode is used for the above-described effect mode D. A notice effect corresponding to the display of the notice image may be executed.

[Others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification are disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference invention 1)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that includes a display means for performing variable display of identification information, and based on the display result of the variable display being a specific display result, a special game advantageous to a player can be executed. Yes. In this type of gaming machine, it is possible to indicate (notify) the result of the variable display to the player by the display mode of the identification information displayed (derived display) when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. (For example, refer to JP 2008-370A).

  In the gaming machine having the display means as described above, the player proceeds with the game while paying attention to the identification information displayed on the display means. However, the player feels bored of the game while the display of the variation of the identification information is repeated many times, making it difficult to maintain interest in the game. The present invention 1 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to realize display of a new aspect that attracts the player's interest with respect to the display of identification information, and to improve the game entertainment. It is to plan.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 for solving the above-described problems is
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition and notifying the result of variable display in accordance with the display mode of identification information when the variable display is stopped,
Fluctuation display means capable of displaying identification information fluctuation display,
The fluctuation display means includes
When the variable display of the identification information is stopped, the variable display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode.
The stop mode at the time of stopping the variable display can be varied depending on the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display.

  According to such a gaming machine, the variable display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode when the variable display is stopped while the variable display means performs the variable display of the identification information. The stop mode can be made different depending on the display mode of the identification information to be displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped. For this reason, the player pays attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information stops, and can guess the display mode of the identification information displayed (derived display) thereafter. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the stop mode when the variable display is stopped, and to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of reference invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 1-1 described above,
The identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols,
As a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, at least a first stop mode in which the stop order of the plurality of symbols is a predetermined first stop sequence, and a stop order of the plurality of symbols is the first stop sequence. A second stop mode that is a second stop order different from the stop order,
As a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, at least a first display mode that triggers execution of a predetermined special game and a second display that triggers execution of another special game different from the predetermined special game And a third display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game,
The fluctuation display means includes
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the first stop mode,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the second display mode or the third display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols, and the variation display of the identification information is performed by the variation display of these symbols. In such a configuration, as a stop mode when stopping the variation display of the identification information, that is, a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the plurality of symbols, at least the stop order of the plurality of symbols is the first stop order. Identification information when the variable display is stopped, and the second stop mode is different from the first stop sequence (first stop mode). As a display mode of (a plurality of symbols), at least a first display mode that triggers execution of a predetermined special game, a second display mode that triggers execution of another special game different from the special game, and a special game And a third display mode that does not become an execution opportunity. Then, when the display mode of the identification information (plural symbols) to be displayed (derived display) by the stop of the variable display is the first display mode, the variable displays of the multiple symbols are displayed in the first stop order ( In the case of the second display mode or the third display mode, it is possible to stop the variable display of multiple symbols in the second stop order (second stop mode). Is possible. Therefore, the player can infer the type of special game that can be executed, whether or not it is executed, and the possibility, etc., through the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stop mode when the change display of the identification information stops, and to give a sense of expectation for the subsequent special game.

The gaming machine of reference invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 1-2 described above,
As a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, it further has a fourth display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game,
As a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, it further has a third stop mode in which the stop timings of the plurality of symbols are substantially the same,
The fluctuation display means includes
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the fourth display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode or the third stop mode. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, as a display mode of the identification information (plural symbols) that will be displayed (derived display) when the variable information of the identification information (plural symbols) is stopped, the special game is executed. In the case where the display mode of the identification information (plural symbols) that has the fourth display mode that is not triggered and is displayed (derived display) by the stop of the variable display is the fourth display mode, In the second stop mode or the third stop mode in which the stop timings (stop timings) of the plurality of symbols are substantially the same, the variable display of the plurality of symbols can be stopped. For this reason, a mode (third stop mode) that can immediately recognize that there is no possibility of executing the special game is included in the stop mode of the variable display when the display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game is derived and displayed. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting the execution of the special game while diversifying the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped.

The gaming machine of reference invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 1-2 or reference invention 1-3 described above,
A predetermined effect display is executed when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the variation display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, that is, the display mode of the identification information displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display is the first display mode. In this case, a predetermined effect display is executed in accordance with this. For this reason, the identification information is displayed (derived display) in the first display mode, that is, the player can be shown with an emphasis on the execution of the special game triggered by the display of the first display mode. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect when the variation display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 1-2 to Reference Invention 1-4 described above,
Equipped with a state control means capable of controlling the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information is performed,
The gaming state has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
The second gaming state is characterized in that, compared to the first gaming state, the display mode of identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is more frequently the first display mode. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state are provided as the gaming state when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the second gaming state is the first gaming state. Compared to the above, the display mode of the identification information displayed by the stoppage of the variable display is frequently changed to the first display mode. That is, in the second game state, the execution frequency of the special game (predetermined special game) that is triggered by the display of the first display mode is higher than that in the first display mode. For this reason, in the 2nd game state, the frequency that the change display of identification information stops in the 1st stop mode becomes high. Thus, in the second gaming state, the player is focused on whether or not the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, and the expectation for the special game triggered by the display in the first display mode is obtained. It becomes possible to talk.

The gaming machine of reference invention 1-6 is the gaming machine of reference invention 1-5 described above.
As the types of symbols constituting the identification information, at least the first symbol type and the second symbol type,
The first display mode is composed of symbols of the second symbol type among the first symbol type and the second symbol type,
At least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first gaming state is set as the second symbol type in the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, at least the first symbol type and the second symbol type are included as the symbol types constituting the identification information, and among these first symbol type and second symbol type, The first display mode is configured by the symbols of the second symbol type, and at least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first gaming state is set as the second symbol type in the second gaming state. It has become a thing. For this reason, in the 1st game state, since it is a symbol of the 1st symbol type, the symbol which cannot constitute the 1st display mode changes into the symbol which can constitute the 1st display mode by becoming the 2nd gaming state. Will be. Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player pay attention not only to the stop mode when the variable display of identification information stops but also to the symbol type.

  According to the above reference invention 1, regarding the display of identification information, it is possible to realize a display of a new aspect that attracts the player's interest, and to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference invention 2)
Conventionally, when the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, it is possible to enter the game ball into the variable entrance (for example, the big prize entrance), and the game ball enters the variable entrance Based on the above, there is known a gaming machine in which a predetermined gaming profit (for example, a prize ball) is given to a player. In this type of gaming machine, the amount of game profit given in response to the entry of the game ball into the variable entrance, that is, the amount of game profit that the player will acquire (acquired profit amount) is predetermined. Is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-35664).

  However, the display of the earned profit amount as described above has already been adopted by many gaming machines, resulting in a lack of freshness. This reference invention 2 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to realize a new aspect of the effect as an effect of displaying the acquired profit amount, and to improve the game entertainment. .

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A variable entrance that can change between a state in which a game ball cannot enter and a state in which it can enter,
Profit granting means capable of giving a predetermined game profit based on the entrance to the variable entrance,
Profit presentation execution means capable of executing a profit presentation that displays the amount of profit earned when a gaming profit is granted by the profit granting means;
State control means capable of controlling the gaming state,
The state control means is capable of controlling a gaming state to a specific gaming state based on establishment of a control condition,
The profit effect executing means includes at least a first profit effect for adding and displaying the acquired profit amount based on the entrance to the variable entrance in the specific gaming state, and the specific period in the specific gaming state. It is possible to execute a second profit effect that adds and displays the acquired profit amount on the basis of the entrance to the variable entrance.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a game ball enters a variable entrance when controlled to a specific game state, and a predetermined game profit is given to the player accordingly, At least two types of effects, a first profit effect and a second profit effect, can be executed as effects (profit effects) for displaying the amount of game profit to be granted (acquired profit amount). Is executed during a specific period in a specific gaming state. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest to the profit effect executed based on the entrance to the variable entrance in the specific gaming state, and to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of reference invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 2-1 described above.
The profit effect execution means can execute the first profit effect on a predetermined first display unit without executing the second profit effect during a period other than the specific period, and the first profit during the specific period. The second profit effect can be executed on the predetermined second display unit without executing the effect,
After the end of the specific period, an effect of adding and displaying the acquired profit amount displayed on the second display unit by the second profit effect in the specific period to the acquired profit amount displayed on the first display unit. It is characterized by being executable.

  According to such a gaming machine, during the specific gaming state, in a period other than the specific period, the first profit effect is executed on the first display unit based on the entrance to the variable entrance, and in the specific period, The second profit effect is executed on the second display unit based on the entrance to the variable entrance. Further, when the specific period ends, the first profit effect is performed on the acquired profit amount (the acquired profit amount displayed on the second display unit) added and displayed by the second profit effect executed in the specific period. An effect of adding (displaying) the acquired profit amount displayed on the first display unit is executed. Thereby, it is possible to increase the effect effect of the profit effect by changing the display mode of the acquired profit amount in the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine of reference invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 2-1 or reference invention 2-2 described above.
Acquisition information storage means capable of storing acquisition information acquired based on establishment of acquisition conditions;
An identification information display means capable of executing a variable display of the identification information based on the acquired information;
Pre-determination means capable of performing pre-determination as to whether or not the acquired information is specific acquired information before execution of the variable display,
Based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, it is possible to enter the variable entrance.
The specific acquisition information is acquisition information for deriving the specific display result as a display result of the variable display,
The specific period is a period that can be started when a predetermined number of specific acquisition information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit as a result of the preliminary determination in the specific gaming state. It is what.

  According to such a gaming machine, the acquired information acquired based on the establishment of the acquisition condition can be stored, and the variable display of the identification information can be executed based on the acquired information. Prior to the execution of the variable display, it is possible to determine in advance whether or not the acquired information is the specific acquired information. If the acquired information is the specific acquired information, the variable display based on the specific acquired information is displayed. As a result, a specific display result is derived, and using this as a trigger, it is possible to enter the variable entrance. The specific period in the specific game state is a period that can be started in a situation where a predetermined number of specific acquisition information is stored. That is, it is a period that can be started in a situation in which it is determined that it is possible to enter the variable entrance with a predetermined number of pieces of specific acquisition information. Thereby, during the specific gaming state, it is possible to secure an execution opportunity of the second profit effect accompanying the start of the specific period, and to increase the effect effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine of reference invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 2-3 described above,
The specific period ends after it is possible to enter the variable entrance with the specific acquisition information stored in the acquisition information storage means at the start of the specific period. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, the specific display result is derived through the execution of the variable display based on the specific acquisition information stored at the start of the specific period, and based on this, the entrance to the variable entrance After the period becomes available, the specific period ends. Thereby, it is possible to increase the certainty that the second profit effect is executed during the specific period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 or Reference Invention 2-4 described above.
The pre-determination means can execute the pre-determination during the specific period,
The specific period is extended based on a new determination result indicating that the information is specific acquisition information by the prior determination during the specific period.

  According to such a gaming machine, prior determination can be performed even during a specific period, and prior determination is performed for acquired information newly acquired during the specific period, and the acquired information is specific acquired information. When the determination result is obtained, the specific period is extended. Thereby, since the period during which the second profit effect is executed is extended, the effect effect of the profit effect can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 2-3 to Reference Invention 2-5 described above.
In the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect based on the determination result that the specific acquisition information is obtained by the prior determination,
When a predetermined effect is executed, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed is different depending on the number of pieces of specific acquisition information stored at that time.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the specific gaming state, the predetermined effect can be executed based on the result of the prior determination that the acquired information is the specific acquired information. The effect mode differs depending on the number of stored specific acquisition information when the predetermined effect is executed. As a result, during the specific game state, it is possible to achieve the effect effect by the profit effect and the predetermined effect, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the specific game state.

  According to the reference invention 2 described above, it is possible to realize a novel aspect of production as an effect of displaying the acquired profit amount, and to improve the game entertainment.

(Reference invention 3)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine that performs a variable display of identification information and can execute a special game based on the display result of the variable display being a specific display result is widely known. In this type of gaming machine, there is one configured such that any one of a plurality of effect modes can be selected by a manual input operation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). As the time when the effect mode can be selected, for example, it can be set at various times such as when the identification information is changed, the standby screen (demo screen) is displayed, and the special game (for example, the big hit game) is displayed. Is possible. In addition, in the configuration in which the effect mode can be selected during the special game, the effect mode after the special game is selected (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-17495).

  However, in the conventional configuration in which the effect mode after the special game can be selected during the special game, the generation mode of the selectable time and the notification mode indicating the generation are uniform, and there is a problem that the freshness is lacking. there were. This reference invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to select a presentation mode after a special game in a novel manner, and to improve the game entertainment. .

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A variable entrance that can change between a state in which a game ball cannot enter and a state in which it can enter,
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game based on the display result of the variation display of the identification information being a specific display result,
The special game is composed of a predetermined number of round games,
A gaming machine configured to enable entry into the variable entrance in the round game,
As a production mode when the variable display of identification information is performed, it has a plurality of production modes,
A selection period generating means capable of generating a selection period in which a presentation mode after the special game is ended can be selected from the plurality of presentation modes at a predetermined time after the start of the special game;
A first notification means for performing a notification before the start of the selection period in the round game before the predetermined round game when the selection period is generated in the predetermined round game during the special game. To do.

  According to such a gaming machine, at a predetermined time after the special game is started, it is possible to generate a selection period in which the effect mode after the special game is ended can be selected from a plurality of effect modes. When the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the special game, notification before the selection period starts is performed in the round game before the predetermined round game. For this reason, it is possible to select the production mode in the predetermined round game during the special game (the selection period occurs), and in advance in the previous round game, the production mode selection period It is possible to select a production mode in a novel manner, such as the occurrence (start). As a result, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the selection of the effect mode after the special game, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In the selection of the effect mode in the selection period, for example, a manual selection in which a player selects and inputs one of a plurality of effect modes using a predetermined input unit provided in the gaming machine, or a plurality of effect modes can be selected. Automatic selection in which any one is automatically selected is included.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-1 described above.
Second notification means for performing notification during the selection period in the predetermined round game when the selection period is generated in the predetermined round game during the special game;
When the predetermined round game ends and the next round game starts, third notification means for performing notification before the end of the selection period,
The selection period ends during the round game in which the notification by the third notification means is performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the selection period of the production mode occurs in a predetermined round game, the predetermined round game is notified during the selection period, and then the predetermined round game ends and the next round game Is started, the notification before the end of the selection period is performed in the round game (the round game next to the predetermined round game). The selection period ends during the round game in which the notification is made before the selection period ends (during the next round game after the predetermined round game). For this reason, when the selection period of the production mode occurs in a predetermined round game, a notification (notification by the first notification means) before the selection period performed in the round game before the predetermined round game, and the predetermined A special game is provided by notification during the selection period (notification by the second notification means) performed in the round game and notification before the end of the selection period (notification by the third notification means) performed in the next round game of the predetermined round game. It becomes possible to prompt the player to select a later production mode. In this way, by adopting a new notification mode in which the player is prompted to select a production mode after a special game over a plurality of round games, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the production mode selection. . In addition, the selection period of the production mode is from the start of the predetermined round game to the middle of the next round game, and the above-mentioned notification is performed from the start to the end of the selection period, so that the player can select the production mode. It becomes possible not to miss the opportunity of selecting the production mode without noticing the occurrence of the period.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-1 or reference invention 3-2 described above.
Equipped with a state control means capable of controlling the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information is performed,
The gaming state has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
When the special game is executed when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the first gaming state, and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the second gaming state. The generation period of the selection period differs depending on whether the special game is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the special game is executed when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the first game state, and the second game is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The generation time of the production mode selection period differs depending on the state in which the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the state and the special game is executed. As a result, it is possible to select a production mode in a new manner, such as making the subsequent presentation mode selectable time different depending on the gaming state when the specific display result is derived, and to prevent the production mode selection from becoming monotonous. Is possible.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-3 described above.
When the special game is executed when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result in the first game state, the selection period occurs after all the round games constituting the special game are completed. An announcement will be made during the selected period,
When the special game is executed when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result in the second game state, the selection period is generated in a predetermined round game during the special game. Is.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a special game is executed when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the first gaming state, all of the round games constituting the special game are finished. Later, a selection period of the production mode occurs, and notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the special game is executed when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, the predetermined round game in the special game is executed. In this case, a notification period by the first notification means (notification before the start of the selection period), a notification by the second notification means (notification during the selection period), and a second notification mode are generated. 3 Notification by the notification means (notification before the end of the selection period) is performed. For this reason, when the specific display result is derived in the first game state and the special game is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the production mode after the end of all the round games, and the game state is changed to the second game state. When the specific display result is derived and the special game is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the production mode before all the round games are completed. Thereby, it becomes possible to change the mode of effect mode selection depending on whether the gaming state when the specific display result is derived is the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and the player has a different impression. Can be given.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-4 described above,
The special game has a plurality of types of special games,
The generation period of the selection period differs depending on the type of special game to be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the generation time of the effect mode selection period differs depending on the type of special game executed based on the display result of the variable display being the specific display result. As a result, it is possible to select an effect mode in a novel manner in which the effect mode selectable period varies depending on the type of special game to be executed, and it is possible to prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-5 described above.
As the plurality of types of special games, at least a first special game and a second special game having a larger number of round games than the first special game,
When the first special game is executed, the selection period is generated after all the round games constituting the first special game are finished, and notification during the selection period is performed,
When the second special game is executed, the selection period is generated in a predetermined round game during the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the first special game having a relatively small number of round games constituting the special game is executed, all of the round games constituting the first special game are completed. Later, a selection period of the production mode occurs, and notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the second special game having a relatively large number of round games constituting the special game is executed, the selection mode of the effect mode occurs in the predetermined round game in the second special game. In this case, notification by the first notification means (notification before the start of the selection period), notification by the second notification means (notification during the selection period), and notification by the third notification means (before the end of the selection period) Notification) is performed. For this reason, when the first special game (special game with a relatively small number of round games) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select a production mode after the end of all the round games. When a game (a special game with a relatively large number of round games) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select an effect mode before all the round games are completed. As a result, it is possible to change the mode of effect mode selection between when the first special game is executed and when the second special game is executed, and it is possible to give a different impression to the player. Become.

  According to the above reference invention 3, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by selecting the effect mode after the special game in a novel manner.

(Reference invention 4)
Further, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), the second start port is a variable start port, and the entrance frequency is lowered in the low base state and the entrance frequency is increased in the high base state. In the low base state, there is a game aiming at the first start port, and in the high base state, there is a game aiming at the second start port. In addition, there has been a gaming machine that performs a so-called right-handed game in which a game is aimed at the right area of the game area when a big hit game or a high base state is reached. In such a gaming machine, in the low base state, a left-handed game is played, and once the advantageous state is reached, the right-handed game is played until the advantageous state ends, and the game in the advantageous state is sharpened. Met.

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is difficult to say that various entrances are simply arranged in the right-handed area, and that an efficient game can proceed. In view of the above-mentioned circumstances, unlike conventional gaming machines, by arranging various entrances at predetermined positions in a predetermined game area, it is possible to diversify the game and increase the game efficiency. In addition, a gaming machine that enhances the interest of gaming is provided.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
A specific start opening where game balls can enter,
A variable start port that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state;
A first variable entrance that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
Specific identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the specific start opening;
Identification information for variably displaying based on the ball entering the variable start port;
When the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which the variable start port is in the second state;
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode, special game execution means for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready to enter,
And a specific start port, a first variable entrance, a variable start entrance, and a second variable entrance from the upstream of the game area.

  According to such a gaming machine, the specific start port, the first variable entrance port, the variable start port, and the second variable entrance port are provided at predetermined locations in the game area, and these are provided upstream of the game area. The specific start port, the first variable entrance port, the variable start port, and the second variable entrance port are arranged in this order from the downstream. Thereby, the progress of an efficient game is enabled.

  Specifically, in order to smoothly advance the game, it is necessary to first set the variable start port related to the execution of the special game to the second state (open state). Place at the top of the ball opening. Thereby, first, the possibility that the variable start port is set to the second state (open state) is increased. In addition, since the game ball that has entered (passed through) the specific starting port is a gate type (gate 28) that flows down the game area thereafter, the subsequent game proceeds smoothly. In addition, since the first variable entrance is arranged downstream of the specific start entrance, the entrance when the special game is executed can be quickly performed, and a large amount of game balls can be obtained in a short period of time. In addition, by providing the first variable entry opening upstream of the variable start opening, the game ball enters the variable start opening that is in the second state during the special game, and the first variable entry opening is connected to the first variable entry opening. It is also possible to prevent a situation where entry is hindered.

  In addition, by arranging the variable start opening downstream of the first variable entry opening, the variable start opening in the second state is provided except for the case where the first variable entry opening is ready for entry in a special game. It is possible to enter the game balls that flow down prior to other entrances. As a result, it is possible to prevent as much as possible that the ball does not enter the variable start port even though the variable start port is in the second state. In addition, by placing the second variable entrance into the downstream of the variable start entrance, the game ball enters the second variable entrance based on the change between the first state and the second state of the variable start entrance. The frequency will change, and it will be possible to add a variety of games. Thereby, it is possible to diversify game play while providing smooth game progress.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 4-1,
As the special mode, it has a first special mode and a second special mode,
As the special game, there are a first special game and a second special game,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special mode, the first special game is executed, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special mode, the second special game is executed,
The first special game has more game profits that can be obtained than the second special game.
The first variable entrance is in a state in which entry is possible in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state in which entry is possible in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special mode and the second special mode are provided as the special information game stop display mode, and the first special game and the second special mode are displayed. 2 special games. Then, the first special game is a special game with more game profits that can be obtained than the second special game. In the first special game, the first variable entrance is set in a state in which it can enter (open state), and the second special game. Then, the 2nd variable entrance is made into a state in which entrance is possible.

  Specifically, first, in order to set the variable start port to the second state (open state), the specific start port according to this is arranged at the most upstream of these entrances. Next, by arranging the first variable entrance at the downstream of the specific start entrance, the entrance when the first special game with a large game profit amount is executed is made quick, and a large amount of game balls can be obtained in a short period of time. Allows acquisition. Next, the variable start port is arranged downstream of the first variable entry port, so that the variable state of the second state is variable except when the first variable entry port is ready for entry in a special game. It is possible to cause the game ball that flows down to enter the starting port with priority over other entrances. In addition, the second variable entrance that is in a state in which it is possible to enter in the second special game with a small amount of game profit can be arranged downstream of the variable start port, and various games can be added. Thereby, it is possible to diversify game play while providing smooth game progress.

In addition, as a 1st special aspect and a 2nd special aspect, a different stop symbol can be illustrated, for example. In addition, as the first special game and the second special game, for example, special games having different execution modes (number of rounds, opening time, obtainable profit, and variable entrance to be opened) can be exemplified.

The gaming machine of reference invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 4-2.
A first game state in which a game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port at a higher frequency than the first game state. It has a game state setting means that can be set,
In the second gaming state, a game ball is made to enter the variable start port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side of the variable start port. By making entry difficult,
When the second special game occurs, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is higher in the first game state than in the second game state. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to set a first gaming state in which the frequency of entering a game ball into the variable start port is low and a second gaming state in which the pitching frequency is higher than the first gaming state. Since the variable start port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in a state in which it is possible to enter (open state) in the second special game, the second variable entrance is more in the first game state than in the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering is high. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entering the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game, and enhance the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of the reference invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of the reference invention 4-3.
The game profit obtained by entering the second variable entrance is more than the game profit obtained by entering the variable start entrance.

  According to such a gaming machine, a gaming profit (for example, a prize ball given when one gaming ball enters) that can be acquired by entering a gaming ball is more than the variable starting port. Increase the number of variable entrances. As described above, when the second special game occurs, in the first game state in which the variable start port is unlikely to be in the second state, the game ball that has flowed down can easily enter the second variable ball entrance on the downstream side. In the second game state in which the variable start port is likely to be in the second state, it is easy to enter the upstream variable start port. As a result, the player expects to enter the second variable entrance where the game profit that can be obtained is greater than the variable start entrance, and expects the second special game to occur in the first gaming state. , Enhance the entertainment interest. In addition, this makes it possible to differentiate the game profits that can be obtained when the same second special game is generated in the first game state and the second game state, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the game interest. It becomes.

The gaming machine of reference invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of reference invention 4-4.
The game state does not change based on the execution of the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state is not changed by execution of the second special game, that is, the game state before execution of the second special game and the game state after execution of the second special game are set to the same game state. As a result, if the second special game can be executed in the first gaming state, the first gaming state continues after the second special game is executed in the first gaming state. By generating a game, it becomes possible to acquire more game profits.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 4-6 is the gaming machine of reference invention 4-2 to reference invention 4-5.
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-6.
A first starting port through which a game ball can enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first start opening,
The first identification information and the identification information can be variably displayed in parallel.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information that is variably displayed based on the entrance to the first start opening and the identification information that is variably displayed based on the entrance to the variable start opening are concurrently provided. Fluctuation display is possible (at the same time). As a result, in the simultaneous variable gaming machine (simultaneous variable machine) that can display the first identification information and the identification information in parallel (simultaneously), the game can be diversified while providing smooth progress of the game. To do.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the gaming characteristics and improve the gaming interests while allowing the game to proceed smoothly.

(Reference invention 5)
Further, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), there are a plurality of gaming states as the gaming state, and when the big hit game is executed, the normal state is changed to a probability change state or a time-saving state advantageous to the player. It has become a transitional gaming machine. Further, in the advantageous state, if the next big hit game does not occur while the symbols are displayed in a predetermined number of times, the advantageous state is terminated and the normal state is restored. Such gaming machines have exhibited certain effects such as preventing the game from getting bored by the transition of the gaming state.

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 and the conventional gaming machine, the transition state of the gaming state and the gaming state after the transition are uniform, and the gaming interest has not been enhanced. The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that diversifies gaming characteristics and enhances gaming fun by giving a characteristic to a game state transition mode.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
A first starting port through which a game ball can enter,
A second start port that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state;
A first variable entrance that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first start opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which a game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port at a higher frequency than the first game state. Game state setting means that can be set;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready to enter. Game execution means;
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. A gaming machine,
The identification result has a first identification result,
When the first specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are changed. When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with the high probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state setting means capable of setting the first game state and the second game state, and the probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. Then, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, in the high probability and the second gaming state, the number of times of the variable display between the first identification information and the second identification information is When the specific number of times is reached, the gaming state changes from the high probability and the second gaming state to the high probability and the first gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and enhance the game entertainment.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 5-1,
The specific result has a second specific result,
When the second specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are changed. When the number of times of display reaches the specific number, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state,
A case where the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and a case where the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state. By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of the variable display becomes a specific number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. Further, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) between the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the high probability and the second gaming state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize whether the second game state has a predetermined probability and the second game state has a high probability. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and enhance the game entertainment. In addition, this allows the player to expect that the gaming state will change to the second gaming state with a high probability when the specific number of times has elapsed during execution of the common performance, and it is possible to enhance the gaming interest. .

The gaming machine of reference invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 5-1 or reference invention 5-2.
The high probability and the first gaming state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the higher probability and the first gaming state have a higher gaming probability that can be obtained than the high probability and the second gaming state. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability as the specific number of times elapses, and enhances the gaming interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 5-1 to reference invention 5-3.
Providing the second start opening upstream of the game area, providing the second variable entrance opening downstream of the second start opening,
In the second game state with a high probability, the second ball disposed at the downstream side of the second starting port is caused to enter the second starting port disposed at the upstream side of the gaming area. By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is set to the high probability and the second The first game state is higher in probability and higher than the game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second start opening is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second start opening. And since the 2nd starting port arrange | positioned in an upstream side will be in a 2nd state (open state), the entrance of the game ball to the 2nd variable entrance port arrange | positioned in the downstream is made difficult. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in a state in which it is possible to enter the ball (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are more likely than the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is high. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entering the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game, and enhance the game entertainment.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-4.
As the special game, there are a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game is capable of changing a gaming state after the first special game is finished,
The second special game shall not change the gaming state after the second special game ends,
The first variable entrance is in a state in which entry is possible in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state in which entry is possible in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is ready to enter can change the game state after the end of the first special game. In addition, it is assumed that the second special game in which the second variable entrance is ready to enter does not change the game state after the second special game ends. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game and the game state after the execution of the second special game are set to the same game state. As a result, when the first gaming state has a high probability, the first gaming state continues with a high probability after the execution of the second special game in the first gaming state with a high probability. By generating it, it becomes possible to acquire more game profits.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 5, it is possible to diversify the gaming characteristics and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference invention 6)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
A first starting port through which a game ball can enter,
A second start port that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state;
A first variable entrance that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first start opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which a game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port at a higher frequency than the first game state. Game state setting means that can be set;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready to enter. Game execution means;
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result;
A launcher that launches a game ball into a game area with a predetermined launch intensity,
The first start port is provided in a first game area where a game ball launched at a first launch intensity can enter,
The second start port is provided in a second game area in which a game ball launched at a second launch strength different from the first launch strength can enter,
The identification result has a first identification result,
When the first specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are changed. When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state,
As a result of the change display of the first identification information based on the ball entering the first starting port, the first identification result is not included,
The first identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the second identification information based on the ball entering the second starting port.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state setting means capable of setting the first game state and the second game state, and the probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. In addition, the first start opening is provided in a first game area where a ball can be entered with a first launch strength, and the second start opening is provided in a second game area where a ball can be entered with a second launch intensity. . When the first specific result is reached, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to a high probability and the second gaming state, in the high probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of times of the variable display becomes a specific number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and the second gaming state to the high probability and the first gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and enhance the game entertainment. Moreover, the first identification result is not included as a result of the variable display of the first identification information, and the first identification result is included as a result of the variable display of the second identification information. As a result, it is possible to provide different game characteristics when the game ball is inserted into the first start port and when the game ball is input into the second start port, diversify the game characteristics, It becomes possible to raise.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 6-1,
The specific result has a second specific result,
When the second specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are changed. When the number of times of display reaches the specific number, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state,
A case where the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and a case where the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state. By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state,
The second identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the second identification information based on the ball entering the second starting port.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second identification result is obtained as a result of the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the number of times of the variable display between the first identification information and the second identification information in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state is When the specific number of times is reached, the gaming state changes from the second gaming state with a predetermined probability to the first gaming state with a predetermined probability. Further, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) between the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the high probability and the second gaming state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize whether the second game state has a predetermined probability and the second game state has a high probability. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and enhance the game entertainment. This also enables the player to expect a gaming state to change to the first gaming state with a high probability when the specific number of times has elapsed during execution of a common performance, and it is possible to enhance the gaming interest. .

The gaming machine of reference invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 6-1 or reference invention 6-2.
As the specific result, it has a third specific result,
When the third specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the first probability with the high probability, and in the gaming state, the gaming state does not change until the next specific result is reached. And
The third identification result is provided as a result of the change display of the first identification information based on the ball entering the first starting port.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second identification result is obtained as a result of the variable display of the first identification information. If the gaming state after the end of the special game with the third specific result is set to the first gaming state with a high probability, the gaming state is maintained with the high probability and the first gaming state until the next specific result is reached. I am going to do it. Thereby, as a result of the variation display of the first identification information, there is no change from the second gaming state to the first gaming state with a high probability based on the variation display of the specific number of times, and the special game ends. From the later, until the next specific result is obtained, it has a high probability and guarantees the gaming state of the first gaming state. This also makes it possible to play a game with a sense of security in a game accompanied by a variable display of the first identification information, diversify the game, and enhance the gaming interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-3,
The high probability and the first gaming state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the higher probability and the first gaming state have a higher gaming probability that can be obtained than the high probability and the second gaming state. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability as the specific number of times elapses, and enhances the gaming interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-4,
Providing the second start opening upstream of the second game area, providing the second variable entrance opening downstream of the second start opening,
In the second game state with a high probability, the second ball disposed at the downstream side of the second starting port is caused to enter the second starting port disposed at the upstream side of the gaming area. By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is set to the high probability and the second The first game state is higher in probability and higher than the game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second start port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second start port. And since the 2nd starting port arrange | positioned in an upstream side will be in a 2nd state (open state), the entrance of the game ball to the 2nd variable entrance port arrange | positioned in the downstream is made difficult. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in a state in which it is possible to enter the ball (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are more likely than the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is high. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entering the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game, and enhance the game entertainment.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-5,
As the special game, there are a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game is capable of changing a gaming state after the first special game is finished,
The second special game shall not change the gaming state after the second special game ends,
The first variable entrance is in a state in which entry is possible in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state in which entry is possible in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is ready to enter can change the game state after the end of the first special game. In addition, it is assumed that the second special game in which the second variable entrance is ready to enter does not change the game state after the second special game ends. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game and the game state after the execution of the second special game are set to the same game state. As a result, when the first gaming state has a high probability, the first gaming state continues with a high probability after the execution of the second special game in the first gaming state with a high probability. By generating it, it becomes possible to acquire more game profits.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 6, it is possible to diversify the gaming characteristics and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference invention 7)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
A first starting port through which a game ball can enter,
A second start port that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state;
A first variable entrance that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first start opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which a game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port at a higher frequency than the first game state. Game state setting means that can be set;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready to enter. Game execution means;
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. A gaming machine,
As the specific result, it has a first specific result and a fourth specific result,
When the first specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are changed. When the number of times of display becomes the first number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state,
When the fourth specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are changed. When the number of times of display is the second number, the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with the high probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state setting means capable of setting the first game state and the second game state, and the probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. And when it becomes the 1st specific result and the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, in the high probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of times of the variable display becomes the first number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and the second gaming state to the high probability and the first gaming state. If the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state as the fourth specific result, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of the variable display becomes the second number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and the second gaming state to the high probability and the first gaming state. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the change timing of the gaming state and maintain the gaming interest for a long time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and enhance the gaming interest.

  In this aspect, when the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information is the first number or the second number, the gaming state is high probability and the second gaming state is high probability and the second number. It was assumed that it changed to 1 gaming state. As another aspect, when the number of times of the variable display of the second identification information becomes the first number or the second number regardless of the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information, the gaming state has a high probability and the second game state. It is good also as what changes to a 1st gaming state with high probability. As another aspect, when the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information becomes the first number or the second number regardless of the number of times of the variable display of the second identification information, the game state is highly probable and the second game It is good also as what changes from a state to a 1st gaming state with high probability.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 7-1,
As the specific result, it has a second specific result and a fifth specific result,
When the second specific result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are changed. When the number of times of display reaches the first number, the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with the predetermined probability,
When the fifth specified result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are changed. When the number of times of display reaches the second number, the gaming state is assumed to change to the first gaming state with the predetermined probability,
A case where the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and a case where the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state. By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, if the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state as the second specifying result, the first probability is set to the first gaming state. When the number of variable displays of the identification information and the second identification information is the first number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. In addition, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state as the fifth identification result, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of the variable display becomes the second number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. Further, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) between the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the high probability and the second gaming state, the player However, it is difficult to recognize whether the second game state has a predetermined probability and the second game state has a high probability. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the change timing of the gaming state and maintain the gaming interest for a long time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and enhance the gaming interest. This also allows the player to expect that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability when the first number of times and the second number of times have elapsed during execution of the common performance, It is possible to enhance the entertainment interest.

The gaming machine of reference invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 7-2.
The second number is greater than the first number;
It is more likely that the gaming state changes to the first probability and the gaming state when the gaming state changes at the second number of times than when the gaming state changes at the first number of times. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second number of times is greater than the first number of times, and the gaming state is higher at the second number of times than when the gaming state change timing is the first number of times. The probability and the possibility of changing to the first gaming state are high. Thus, when the player reaches the first number of times, the player plays the game with the expectation that the gaming state is maintained without change, and the game state reaches the second number of times while remaining in the second gaming state. At that time, the game is played with a high probability of changing to the first gaming state with a high probability. Thereby, in the 2nd game state, it has a point which raises a sense of expectation in multiple times. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and enhance the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of reference invention 7-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 7-2.
The second number is greater than the first number;
It is more likely that the gaming state changes to the first probability and the gaming state when the gaming state changes at the first number of times than when the gaming state changes at the second number of times. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second number is set to be higher than the first number, and the gaming state is higher at the first number than when the gaming state change timing is the second number. The probability and the possibility of changing to the first gaming state are high. This allows the player to play the game with the expectation that the gaming state will change when the first number of times is reached, and when the player reaches the second number of times while the gaming state remains in the second gaming state. Although the sex is lower than that at the first number of times, the game is played with a high probability and expecting to change to the first gaming state. Thereby, in the 2nd game state, it has a point which raises a sense of expectation in multiple times. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and enhance the gaming interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-4.
The high probability and the first gaming state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the higher probability and the first gaming state have a higher gaming probability that can be obtained than the high probability and the second gaming state. As a result, the player expects that the gaming state will change to the first gaming state with a high probability as the specific number of times elapses, and enhances the gaming interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-5,
Providing the second start opening upstream of the game area, providing the second variable entrance opening downstream of the second start opening,
In the second game state with a high probability, the second ball disposed at the downstream side of the second starting port is caused to enter the second starting port disposed at the upstream side of the gaming area. By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is set to the high probability and the second The first game state is higher in probability and higher than the game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second start opening is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second start opening. And since the 2nd starting port arrange | positioned in an upstream side will be in a 2nd state (open state), the entrance of the game ball to the 2nd variable entrance port arrange | positioned in the downstream is made difficult. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in a state in which it is possible to enter the ball (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are more likely than the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is high. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entering the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game, and enhance the game entertainment.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-4.
As the special game, there are a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game is capable of changing a gaming state after the first special game is finished,
The second special game shall not change the gaming state after the second special game ends,
The first variable entrance is in a state in which entry is possible in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state in which entry is possible in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is ready to enter can change the game state after the end of the first special game. In addition, it is assumed that the second special game in which the second variable entrance is ready to enter does not change the game state after the second special game ends. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game and the game state after the execution of the second special game are set to the same game state. As a result, when the first gaming state has a high probability, the first gaming state continues with a high probability after the execution of the second special game in the first gaming state with a high probability. By generating it, it becomes possible to acquire more game profits.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 7, it is possible to diversify the gaming characteristics and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 8)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is
A first starting port through which a game ball can enter,
A second start port that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state;
A first variable entrance that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first start opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which a game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port at a higher frequency than the first game state. Game state setting means that can be set;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready to enter. Game execution means;
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result;
A first condition state in which the time for the variable display of the second identification information is determined based on a first condition; a second condition state in which the time for the variable display of the second identification information is determined based on a second condition; A second identification information change time determining means capable of setting
The second condition state is shorter than the first condition state, and the average time of the variable display time of the second identification information determined is shorter.
As the gaming state, the predetermined probability and the first gaming state and the first condition state, the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability, the first gaming state and the first state It has two condition states, the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability, the first condition state and the first condition state 2nd identification information variation time determination means capable of setting a second condition state in which the average time of the variation display time of the two identification information is shorter than the first condition state. In addition, the gaming state includes a predetermined probability, the first gaming state and the first condition state, a predetermined probability, the second gaming state and the second condition state, a high probability, the first gaming state and the second condition state, and a high probability. And in the gaming state in which the first condition state is set, the variable identification time of the second identification information is set to a relatively long time, and the second condition is set to the second condition. In the gaming state in which the state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively short time. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming characteristics, and enhance the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machine of the reference invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of the reference invention 8-1,
The case where the result of the variable display of the second identification information is the specific result is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the case where the result of the variable display of the first identification information is the specific result. It is characterized by.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that there is a higher possibility that the player is more advantageous than the first identification information when the variation display result of the second identification information is the specific result. For example, it is possible to increase the gaming profit obtained by special games executed as specific results, increase the possibility of increase, or increase the possibility of becoming advantageous after the special game ends. is there. Thereby, the player expects that the state in which the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in a large amount, that is, the second condition state in which the time of the variable display of the second identification information is relatively short is set. Will play a game. Further, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of gaming states are set, so that the gaming state can be diversified, the gaming property can be diversified, and the gaming interest can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of reference invention 8-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 8-1 or reference invention 8-2.
It has a 3rd starting port where game balls can enter,
The second identification information is variably displayed based on the ball entering the third starting port.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that the third start port on which the second identification information is variably displayed based on the entry of the game ball is provided. As a result, the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner by entering either the variable second start port or the third start port, thereby enhancing the game fun.

The gaming machine of reference invention 8-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 8-1 or reference invention 8-2.
Equipped with a launching device for launching a game ball into the game area with a predetermined launch intensity;
The first start port is provided in a first game area where a game ball launched at a first launch intensity can enter,
The second start opening, the first variable entry opening, and the second variable entry opening are second games in which game balls launched at the second launch intensity different from the first launch intensity can enter. Provided in the area,
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability, the first gaming state, and the first condition state, a game ball is launched in the first gaming area, and the first identification information is variably displayed to play a game. ,
The gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second gaming state and the second In the two-condition state, a game ball is played by launching a game ball in the second game area so that the second identification information is variably displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first start opening is provided in the first game area where the first launch strength can be entered, and the second start opening, the first variable entrance, and the second variable entrance are , Provided in the second game area that can enter the ball with the second launch strength. When the game state is a predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, a game ball is launched in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. When the gaming state is a predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, a high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or a high probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, It is assumed that a game is played by firing a game ball in the second game area and variably displaying the second identification information. That is, in the first condition state, the game ball is fired in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. In the second condition state, the game ball is placed in the second game area. The game is performed by firing and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner.

  Thereby, it is possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming characteristics, and enhance the gaming interest. In addition, when the variation display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player, the game is played in the expectation that the second condition state in which the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner is set. Become. Further, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of gaming states are set, so that the gaming state can be diversified, the gaming property can be diversified, and the gaming interest can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the reference invention 8-5 is the gaming machine of the reference invention 8-3.
Equipped with a launching device for launching a game ball into the game area with a predetermined launch intensity;
The first start port is provided in a first game area where a game ball launched at a first launch intensity can enter,
The second starting port, the third starting port, the first variable entrance port, and the second variable entrance port are filled with game balls launched at a second launch intensity different from the first launch intensity. In a possible second gaming area,
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability, the first gaming state, and the first condition state, a game ball is launched in the first gaming area, and the first identification information is variably displayed to play a game. ,
The gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second gaming state and the second In the two-condition state, a game ball is played by launching a game ball in the second game area so that the second identification information is variably displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first start opening is provided in the first game area where the first launch strength can be entered, and the second start opening, the third start opening, the first variable entry opening, and the second The variable entrance is provided in the second game area where the entrance can be made with the second launch strength. When the game state is a predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, a game ball is launched in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. When the gaming state is a predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, a high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or a high probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, It is assumed that a game is played by firing a game ball in the second game area and variably displaying the second identification information. That is, in the first condition state, the game ball is fired in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. In the second condition state, the game ball is placed in the second game area. The game is performed by firing and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner.

  Thereby, it is possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming characteristics, and enhance the gaming interest. In addition, when the variation display of the second identification information is more advantageous to the player, the game is played in the expectation that the second condition state in which the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner is set. Become. Further, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of gaming states are set, so that the gaming state can be diversified, the gaming property can be diversified, and the gaming interest can be enhanced.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-5,
The high probability, the first gaming state, and the second condition state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state having a higher probability, the first game state, and the second condition state has higher game profits that can be obtained than the high probability, the second game state, and the second condition state. Yes. Thereby, the player progresses the game in anticipation that the gaming state is set to the first gaming state and the second condition state with high probability, and enhances the gaming interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-6,
Providing the second start opening upstream of the second game area, providing the second variable entrance opening downstream of the second start opening,
In the high probability, the second game state, and the second condition state, a game ball is made to enter the second start port disposed upstream of the second game area, and more than the second start port. By making it difficult to enter the second variable entry port disposed on the downstream side, it is possible to increase the probability of entering the game ball into the second variable entry port with the high probability. It is characterized in that the high probability, the first gaming state and the second condition state are higher than the state and the second condition state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second start port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second start port. And since the 2nd starting port arrange | positioned in an upstream side will be in a 2nd state (open state), the entrance of the game ball to the 2nd variable entrance port arrange | positioned in the downstream is made difficult. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in a state in which it is possible to enter the ball (open state) in the second special game, the first game state and the second condition state have a higher probability and the second condition. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is higher than in the game state and the second condition state. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entering the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game, and enhance the game entertainment.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 8, it is possible to diversify the gaming characteristics and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference invention 9)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is
A first starting port through which a game ball can enter,
A second start port that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state;
A first variable entrance that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first start opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which a game ball enters the variable start port at a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port at a higher frequency than the first game state. Game state setting means that can be set;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is ready to enter. Game execution means;
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variation display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. A gaming machine,
The gaming state includes the predetermined probability and the first gaming state, the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the high probability and the first gaming state, and the high probability and the second gaming state. And
The second variable entrance is characterized in that when the gaming state becomes the high probability and the first gaming state, the entering frequency of the gaming ball increases.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state setting means capable of setting the first game state and the second game state, and the probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. Further, the gaming state has a predetermined probability and a first gaming state, a predetermined probability and a second gaming state, a high probability and a first gaming state, and a high probability and a second gaming state, of which It is assumed that the frequency of entering the second variable entrance becomes high when the first gaming state has a high probability. Thereby, the player progresses the game with high probability and expecting the occurrence of the first gaming state. This also makes it possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming characteristics, and enhance the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of reference invention 9-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 9-1.
Equipped with a launching device for launching a game ball into the game area with a predetermined launch intensity;
The first start port is provided in a first game area where a game ball launched at a first launch intensity can enter,
The second starting area, the first variable entry opening, and the second variable entry opening are second game areas in which game balls launched with a second launch intensity different from the first launch intensity can enter. Provided in
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the first gaming state, a game ball is launched into the first gaming area, and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game.
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the high probability and the first gaming state, or the high probability and the second gaming state, a game ball is launched into the second gaming area. Thus, a gaming machine that performs a game by variably displaying the second identification information,
In a gaming state in which a game ball is displayed by variably displaying the second identification information by launching a game ball in the second game area,
The frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and the high probability and the first gaming state than the high probability and the second gaming state. Is characterized by being higher.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first start opening is provided in the first game area where the first launch strength can be entered, and the second start opening, the first variable entrance, and the second variable entrance are , Provided in the second game area that can enter the ball with the second launch strength. When the gaming state is the first gaming state with a predetermined probability, a game ball is launched in the first gaming area and the first identification information is displayed in a variably displayed manner. Further, when the gaming state is a predetermined probability and the second gaming state, a high probability and the first gaming state, or a high probability and the second gaming state, the game ball is launched into the second gaming area and the second identification information is obtained. It is assumed that the game is played in a variable display. In addition, in a gaming state in which a game ball is launched into the second gaming area to play a game, that is, in a second state with a predetermined probability, a second state with a high probability, a first state with a high probability, and a second state with a high probability, The gaming state with the highest frequency of entering the game ball into the variable entrance is the first game state with high probability.

  Thus, when the player enters a gaming state in which a game ball is launched into the second gaming area to play a game, the game proceeds with the expectation that the gaming state is the first gaming state with a high probability. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming characteristics, and enhance the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of reference invention 9-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 9-1 or reference invention 9-2.
Providing the second start opening upstream of the second game area, providing the second variable entrance opening downstream of the second start opening,
In the second game state with a high probability, the second ball disposed at the downstream side of the second starting port is caused to enter the second starting port disposed at the upstream side of the gaming area. By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is set to the high probability and the second The first game state is higher in probability and higher than the game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second start port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second start port. And since the 2nd starting port arrange | positioned in an upstream side will be in a 2nd state (open state), the entrance of the game ball to the 2nd variable entrance port arrange | positioned in the downstream is made difficult. As a result, when the second variable entrance is in a state in which it is possible to enter the ball (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are more likely than the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is high. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entering the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game, and enhance the game entertainment.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 9, it is possible to diversify the gaming characteristics and improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 10)
Conventionally, there is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that can give a predetermined benefit to a player when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. Widely known. In this type of gaming machine, the game entertainment is improved by performing various effects to increase the player's expectation during the variation display of the identification information. As such an effect, for example, information related to the fluctuation display of the identification information currently being executed, the fluctuation display of the identification information executed thereafter, etc. There is known an effect of displaying (notifying) a change (effect) until a result is derived (see, for example, JP-A-2002-239122).

  However, the effects performed during the variation display of the identification information as described above have already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the effect modes are also uniform. For this reason, it has become difficult to enhance the gaming interest. The present invention 10 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to realize an effect capable of attracting the player's interest as an effect performed during the variable display of identification information. The purpose is to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 for solving the above-described problems is
A variable display means capable of performing variable display of identification information;
A state control means capable of controlling the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information is performed;
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game that can be given a predetermined game profit based on the display result of the variation display of the identification information being a specific display result;
An information display effect executing means capable of executing an information display effect for displaying information about the game after the end of the variable display during the variable information identification display;
The information includes at least first information, second information, and third information,
The first information indicates that a special game is executed after the end of the change display,
The second information indicates that the current gaming state is continued even after the end of the change display,
The third information indicates that the gaming state becomes an unfavorable gaming state after the end of the variable display,
The information display effect executing means is capable of displaying at least two pieces of information among the first to third information at the start of the information display effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, when executing an information display effect that displays information related to the game after the end of the variation display during the variation display of the identification information, at the start of the information display effect, First information indicating that the special game is to be executed after the end, second information indicating that the current gaming state is continued even after the end of the variation display, and the gaming state after the end of the variation display It is possible to display at least two pieces of information among the third information indicating that the gaming state is disadvantageous. For this reason, when the information display effect is started during the variation display of the identification information, the player makes an alternative guess about the subsequent game development based on the type (content) of the information displayed at that time. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the information displayed at the start of the information display effect, and to improve the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of reference invention 10-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 10-1 described above.
The information display effect executing means may display the first information and the second information and may display the second information and the third information at the start of the information display effect. It is what.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the information display effect is started, there are a case where the first information and the second information are displayed and a case where the second information and the third information are displayed. For this reason, when the first information and the second information are displayed at the start of the information display effect, the player can estimate that there is no possibility that the subsequent game development will be disadvantageous. When the information and the third information are displayed, the possibility that the subsequent game development will be disadvantageous cannot be excluded. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that stirs the player's expectation and anxiety.

The gaming machine of reference invention 10-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 10-1 or reference invention 10-2 described above.
The special game has at least a first special game and a second special game,
The gaming state has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
The second special game is a special game that has more game profits than the first special game.
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The state control means controls the gaming state after the end of the first special game to the first gaming state and controls the gaming state after the end of the second special game to the second gaming state. ,
The information display effect execution means can execute the information display effect in the second gaming state,
The first information indicates that the second special game is executed after the end of the variable display,
The second information indicates that the current second gaming state is continued even after the end of the change display,
The third information indicates that the gaming state becomes the first gaming state after the change display ends.

  According to such a gaming machine, the special game has at least the first special game and the second special game, the game state has at least the first game state and the second game state, and the second special game. The game is a special game that has more game profits than the first special game, and the second game state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Further, the gaming state after the first special game is ended becomes the first gaming state, and the gaming state after the second special game is ended becomes the second gaming state. The information display effect can be executed in the second game state (advantageous state). Among the information displayed in the information display effect, the first information indicates that the second special game is executed. The information indicates that the current second gaming state is continued even after the end of the variable display, and the third information indicates that the gaming state is the first gaming state. For this reason, information (game development) related to the game after the game in the second game state (displaying variation of identification information) is displayed by the information display effect. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the gaming interest of the second gaming state.

The gaming machine of reference invention 10-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 10-3 described above.
Fluctuation effect execution means capable of executing a change effect during the change display of identification information
The variation effect execution means can execute the variation effect based on a predetermined variation effect pattern,
As the variation effect pattern, at least a first variation effect pattern, a second variation effect pattern, and a third variation effect pattern,
When the second special game can be executed because the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern can be executed during the variation display,
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the first special game can be executed, and the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern can be executed during the variation display.
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information is a non-specific display result, a variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern can be executed during the variation display,
The information display effect executing means is
When the variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern is executed and when the variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern is executed, the first information and the second information can be displayed.
When the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is executed, the second information and the third information can be displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the variation effect based on the predetermined variation effect pattern can be executed during the variation display of the identification information. As the variation effect pattern, at least the first variation effect pattern and the second variation effect are provided. A pattern and a third variation effect pattern. When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the second special game can be executed, and the variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern is displayed during the variation display. When the result becomes the specific display result, when the first special game can be executed, the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is displayed during the variation display, and the display result of the variation display of the identification information is the non-specific display result. In this case, it is possible to execute a variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern during the variation display. When the variation effect based on the first variation effect pattern is executed and the variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern is executed during the variation display of the identification information, the information display in the variation display is performed. It is possible to display the first information and the second information at the start of the effect, and when the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is executed, the first information and the second information are displayed at the start of the information display effect in the variation display. 2 information and 3rd information can be displayed. For this reason, when the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern is executed, the information display effect for displaying the first information and the second information is not performed. As a result, it is possible to match the information display effect executed during the variable display of the identification information with the variable effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 10-1 to Reference Invention 10-4 described above,
The information display effect executing means is capable of changing a display mode of information by the information display effect after the information display effect is started.

  According to such a gaming machine, after the information display effect is started during the variation display of the identification information, the information display mode by the information display effect can be changed. For this reason, when the information display effect is started during the variation display of the identification information, the player can recognize how the subsequent game development will be performed according to the display mode of the subsequent information. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the information display effect even after the start of the information display effect.

  According to the above reference invention 10, it is possible to realize an effect capable of attracting the player's interest as an effect performed during the variable display of the identification information, and to improve the game entertainment.

(Reference Invention 11)
Conventionally, a gaming machine that can display a variation of identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and can execute a special game that can give a predetermined gaming profit to a player when the display result of the variation display becomes a specific display result. Is widely known. In this type of gaming machine, it is common to perform various effects as the game progresses, such as the display of variation in identification information and special games. In such a gaming machine, there is one that performs an effect (a reach effect or the like) indicating whether or not the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes a specific display result as a character effect by a predetermined character (for example, JP (See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-154657).

  However, the configuration for performing character effects such as reach effects has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the execution mode is uniform. For this reason, it has become difficult to enhance the gaming interest. The present invention 11 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and the object of the invention is to give a character effect to the execution aspect of the character effect, and to improve the gaming interest of the gaming machine having the character effect. There is.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A variable display means capable of performing variable display of identification information;
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game that can be given a predetermined game profit based on the display result of the variation display of the identification information being a specific display result;
A game machine equipped with an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The production execution means
As the effect, a character effect by a character displayed on a predetermined display unit can be executed,
It is characterized in that there are a case where the character effect is executed along with the variation display of the identification information and a case where the character effect is executed along with the special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are a case where the character effect by the character displayed on the predetermined display unit is executed along with the variation display of the identification information and a case where it is executed along with the special game. As a result, it is possible to provide a relevance to the effect accompanying the change display of the identification information and the effect accompanying the special game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of reference invention 11-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 11-1 described above,
Provided with a state control means capable of controlling the gaming state,
The state control means can control the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information is performed to a specific gaming state,
When the specific gaming state is reached, a predetermined character is displayed on the predetermined display unit,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a character effect by a character displayed on the predetermined display unit in the specific gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the game state when the variation display of the identification information is performed becomes the specific game state, a predetermined character is displayed on the display unit, and the character effect by the character is displayed in the variation display of the identification information. There is a case where it is executed along with a special game and a case where it is executed along with a special game. As a result, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine of reference invention 11-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 11-1 or reference invention 11-2 described above.
As the specific display result, the first specific display result and the second specific display result,
As the special game, there are a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can be executed based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the first specific display result,
Based on the display result of the variation display of the identification information being the second specific display result, the second special game can be executed,
The first special game has more game profits that can be given than the second special game.
The production execution means
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result and the first special game can be executed, the character effect is executed along with the variation display,
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result and the second special game can be executed, a character effect is executed along with the second special game. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, and the first special game in which the gaming profit that can be given to the player is relatively large is executed. When possible, the character effect is executed in accordance with the variation display, and the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, and the game profit that can be given to the player is relatively small. When the assumed second special game can be executed, the character effect is executed along with the second special game. As a result, when the variable display of the identification information that causes the execution of the first special game (the display result of the variable display becomes the first specific display result) is performed, or when the second special game is performed, It becomes possible to raise.

The gaming machine of reference invention 11-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 11-3 described above,
A first variable entrance that can change between a state in which a game ball cannot enter and a state in which it can enter;
A second variable entrance that can change between a state in which a game ball cannot enter and a state in which it can enter,
In the first special game, it becomes possible to enter a game ball into the first variable entrance,
In the second special game, it is possible to enter a game ball into the second variable entrance,
In the specific game state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable ball entrance accompanying the second special game is higher than in game states other than the specific game state,
The production execution means
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result and the first special game can be executed in the specific game state, the character effect is executed along with the variation display,
When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result in the specific game state and the second special game can be executed, the character effect is executed along with the second special game. It is characterized by this.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the first special game that is executed when the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, the game ball enters the first variable entrance. In the second special game that is executed when the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second variable entrance, and In the specific game state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable entry port associated with the second special game is higher than in game states other than the specific game state. As a result, the second variable input associated with the second special game can be executed in a situation where the variable display of the identification information that can trigger the execution of the first special game (the display result of the variable display becomes the first specific display result) It is possible to attract the player's interest in entering the game ball into the ball opening and executing the character effect, thereby enhancing the game interest in the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 or Reference Invention 11-4 described above,
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a jackpot game, and the second special game is a jackpot game. Thereby, it becomes possible to enhance the gaming interest of the gaming machine having the big hit game and the small hit game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 11-3 to Reference Invention 11-5 described above.
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result,
The probability that the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result is higher than the high probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, as a probability that the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result (execution probability of the first special game), a predetermined probability, a high probability higher than the predetermined probability, The probability that the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result (the execution probability of the second special game) is higher than the high probability. For this reason, possibility that a 2nd special game will be performed becomes high, and the possibility that the character effect accompanying a 2nd special game will also become high in connection with this. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the case where the second special game is performed.

The gaming machine of reference invention 11-7 is the gaming machine of reference invention 11-6 described above.
In the specific gaming state, the probability that the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result is set to the high probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the specific gaming state, since the probability that the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result is high, the possibility of executing the character effect accompanying the second special game is possible. It is possible to attract the player's interest in the execution of the character effect accompanying the change display of the identification information under a high situation. As a result, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-8 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 11-1 to Reference Invention 11-7,
As a character displayed on the predetermined display unit, a first character and a second character are included,
As said character production, it has the 1st character production and the 2nd character production,
The first character effect is an effect including a first effect by the first character and the second character, and a second effect by the first character and the second character after the first effect,
The second character effect is an effect by the first character and the second character and does not include the second effect,
The production execution means
When performing a character effect with a variation display of the identification information, execute the first character effect,
When the character effect is executed in conjunction with the special game, the second character effect is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first character and the second character are displayed on the display unit, and the character effect by the first character and the second character is executed. The character effects include a first character effect and a second character effect. The first character effect is a first effect by the first character and the second character, and a first character and a second character after the first effect. The second character effect is an effect by the first character and the second character, but does not include the second effect. Then, the first character effect is executed when the character effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, and the second character effect is executed when the character effect is executed along with the special game. As a result, it is possible to execute the character effect in a manner suitable for the game situation, and to attract the player's interest in the character effect.

  According to the reference invention 11 described above, it is possible to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine having a character effect by giving a character to the execution mode of the character effect.

(Reference Invention 12)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 is
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
Production control means for controlling the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The production control means includes
Displaying a first effect image indicating a number in the first display area and counting down a number indicated by the first effect image;
A first suggestion effect suggesting that the special game may be executed in response to the end of the first countdown effect;
Displaying a second effect image indicating a number in the second display area, and counting down the number indicated by the second effect image;
In response to the end of the second countdown effect, a second suggestion effect suggesting that the special game may be executed can be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the first countdown effect and the second countdown effect are compared, the respective effect images are displayed in different display areas, and when the countdown effect ends, different suggested effects Can be executed. For this reason, compared with the case where the display area of the effect image related to the countdown effect is one or the case where there is one effect executed in response to the end of the countdown, the variation of the effect becomes abundant. It is possible to produce a highly interesting performance.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 12-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 12-1,
The display mode of the first effect image and the display mode of the second effect image are different from each other.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the display mode of the first effect image and the display mode of the second effect image are different from each other, for example, the first countdown effect and the second countdown effect are executed simultaneously. Even so, the player can clearly identify these countdown effects. For this reason, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of a problem that the interest of the effect is reduced due to the fact that the player cannot recognize that two types of countdown effects are being executed simultaneously.

The gaming machine of reference invention 12-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 12-1 or reference invention 12-2.
The production control means includes
The speed of counting down the number indicated by the first effect image and the speed of counting down the number indicated by the second effect image can be made different from each other.

  According to such a gaming machine, the speed at which the number indicated by the first effect image is counted down is different from the speed at which the number indicated by the second effect image is counted down. Becomes monotonous, and as a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the interest of the production is reduced.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-4 is the gaming machine of any of Reference Invention 12-1 to Reference Invention 12-3,
While the initial value of the number indicated by the second effect image is fixed, the initial value of the number indicated by the first effect image is variable.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the initial value of the number indicated by the first effect image is variable, the first countdown effect becomes monotonous by fixing this number, and as a result It is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a problem that interest is reduced.

(Reference Invention 13)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1 is
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
Production control means for controlling the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The production control means includes
A first specific effect suggesting that the possibility that the special game is executed is relatively high;
When displaying a possibility suggestion image of the first display mode as a possibility suggestion image indicating the possibility, the second display suggesting that the possibility is higher than that of the first display mode. There is a time to display an image suggesting the possibility of an aspect,
It is characterized in that the first specific effect is more easily executed when the possibility suggestion image of the second display mode is displayed than when the possibility suggestion image of the first display mode is displayed. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is easier to execute the first specific effect when the possibility suggestion image of the second display mode is displayed than when the possibility suggestion image of the first display mode is displayed. Therefore, the player can expect the possibility suggestion image to be displayed in the second display form instead of the first display form, and the synergistic effect of the effect of displaying the possibility suggestion image and the first specific effect Therefore, a high production effect can be obtained.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 13-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 13-1,
When the determination by the determination unit is performed, a symbol display control unit that stops and displays a symbol indicating the determination result of the determination unit after the symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined symbol display unit
The production control means includes
A plurality of second specific effects different from the first specific effect can be executed, suggesting that the possibility is relatively high,
If it is determined by the determination means that the special game is to be executed, both the first specific effect and the plurality of second specific effects can be executed during the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the determination. While
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is not to be executed, both the first specific effect and the plurality of second specific effects are executed during the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the determination. It is characterized by restricting.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first specific effect and the plurality of second specific effects are executed only when it is determined that the special game is to be executed. The player can expect a plurality of second specific effects to be performed in addition to the first specific effect, and obtain a higher effect by the synergistic effect of the first specific effect and the second specific effect. Is possible.

(Reference Invention 14)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 is
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
Production control means for controlling the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The production control means includes
A stage effect that changes a predetermined stage effect image in stages can be executed.
When executing the stage effect, the stage effect image is displayed in a predetermined first display area to start the stage effect, and after the stage effect starts, the stage effect image is displayed as the first display area. Are displayed in different second display areas and change the stage effect image.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the stage effect image is displayed in the first display area when the stage effect is started, the player gazing at the first display area does not notice the start of the stage effect. It is possible to effectively suppress such a problem. In addition, since the stage effect image is displayed in the second display area instead of the first display area after the start of the stage effect, the display changes in comparison with the case where the display area in which the stage effect image is displayed is fixed. It is possible to perform stage productions that are rich in fun and high interest. In addition, after the stage effect is started, the stage effect image is displayed in the second display area instead of the first display area. For example, it is possible to execute another effect using the first display area. Yes, it is possible to obtain a high production effect by a synergistic effect of the stage production and other productions.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 14-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 14-1,
The stage effect image displayed in the first display area is larger than the stage effect image displayed in the second display area.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the stage effect image displayed in the first display area is larger than the stage effect image displayed in the second display area, the sizes of these effect images are the same. In some cases, the player recognizes that the stage effect has started compared to the case where the stage effect image displayed in the second display area is larger than the step effect image displayed in the first display area. It is easy, and it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a problem that the stage effect original effect cannot be obtained due to the player not noticing that the stage effect has started.

The gaming machine of reference invention 14-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 14-1 or reference invention 14-2.
The stage effect is an effect that can be changed step by step up to a predetermined number of steps up to a predetermined number of steps,
The production control means includes
A suggestion effect suggesting that the special game may be executed is executed in response to the step effect changing to the predetermined number of steps.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the stage effect changes to a predetermined number of stages, the suggestion effect is executed, so the player expects the stage effect to change to the upper limit of the predetermined number of stages. A high stage effect can be obtained by the synergistic effect of the stage stage effect and the suggestion stage.

(Reference Invention 15)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-1 is
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
Notification effect executing means for executing a hit notification effect for notifying that it is determined that the special game is to be executed by the determination means, or a lose notification effect for notifying that the determination means is not to execute the special game. When,
Production control means for controlling the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The production control means includes
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests that the chance of performing the hit notification effect is relatively high,
Producing an effect in one of a plurality of effect modes including a second effect mode that suggests that there is a higher possibility that the hit notification effect is executed than the first effect mode and the first effect mode;
It is possible to notify that the suggestion effect is executed by the effect performed in the second effect mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second effect mode is an effect mode that suggests that there is a higher possibility that the hit notification effect is executed than in the first effect mode, and is performed in the second effect mode. There may be a notice that the suggestion effect is executed depending on the effect. For this reason, by performing the production in the second production mode, the player can be expected to perform the suggestion production and the hit notification production, and a high production effect can be obtained.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 15-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 15-1,
The production control means includes
As an effect performed in the second effect mode, it is possible to execute a stage effect that can be developed step by step up to a predetermined number of stages up to a predetermined number of stages,
If the suggestion effect is not executed, execute the stage effect that develops and ends up to a stage less than the predetermined number of stages,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the stage effect that is developed and ended up to the predetermined number of steps is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the suggestion effect is executed when a stage effect that is developed and ended up to a predetermined number of stages during the second effect mode is executed. For this reason, it is possible for the player who expects the suggestion effect to be executed, and the stage effect can be expected to develop up to a predetermined number of stages, which is high due to the synergistic effect of the stage effect and the suggestion effect. A production effect can be obtained.

(Reference Invention 16)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1 is
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
A symbol display control means for stopping and displaying a symbol indicating the determination result of the determining means after the symbols are variably displayed on the predetermined symbol display means;
Production control means for controlling the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The production control means includes
It is possible to display a variation suggestion image that suggests that the symbol variation display is in progress, and it is possible to perform a possibility suggesting effect that suggests that the special game may be executed,
As the possibility suggestion effect is executed during the display of the change suggestion image, the possibility that the special game is executed from the first display form is changed to the first display form. It is possible to change to the second display mode that suggests that it is higher than the above.

  According to such a gaming machine, the display mode of the variation suggestion image may change from the first display mode to the second display mode as the possibility suggesting effect is executed. For this reason, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation that the special game will be executed by the synergistic effect of the possibility suggestion effect and the change of the display mode of the change suggestion image, and as a result A high production effect can be obtained.

The gaming machine of reference invention 16-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 16-1,
As the possibility suggestion effect is executed during the display of the variation suggestion image, the display mode of the variation suggestion image changes from the first display mode to the second display mode. There is a second case,
In the first case, the probability that the special game is executed is higher than that in the second case.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is special when the display mode of the change suggestion image is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode as the possibility suggestion effect is executed, compared to the case where the change display mode is not changed. The game is easy to be executed. For this reason, by executing the possibility suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change suggestion image, compared with the case where the display mode of the change suggestion image is changed regardless of the possibility suggestion effect, A higher production effect can be obtained.

The gaming machine of reference invention 16-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 16-1 or reference invention 16-2.
The possibility suggesting effect is a moving effect in which a plurality of characters move on the display screen,
The movement effects include a movement effect of a first effect pattern in which a specific character is not included in the plurality of characters, and a movement effect of a second effect pattern in which the specific character is included in the plurality of characters,
The production control means includes
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is to be executed, both the movement effect of the first effect pattern and the movement effect of the second effect pattern can be executed,
When the determination means determines that the special game is not to be executed, the movement effect of the first effect pattern can be executed, while the execution of the movement effect of the second effect pattern is restricted. To do.

  According to such a gaming machine, while the movement effect of the first effect pattern can be executed both when it is determined to execute the special game and when it is determined not to execute, the second effect is performed. The pattern movement effect is characterized in that it is not executed when it is determined that the special game is not executed, but is executed when it is determined that the special game is executed. For this reason, it is possible to make the player expect the movement effect of the second effect pattern to be performed rather than the movement effect of the first effect pattern, and only the first effect pattern is prepared as the effect pattern of the movement effect. Compared to the case where it is not done, it is possible to execute a movement effect that is rich in production variations and more interesting.

(Reference Invention 17)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-1 is
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
A symbol display control means for stopping and displaying a symbol indicating the determination result of the determining means after the symbols are variably displayed on the predetermined symbol display means;
Production control means for controlling the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The production control means includes
It is possible to display a variation suggestion image that suggests that the symbol variation display is in progress,
While displaying the variation suggestion image, it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the variation suggestion image to an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation means.
A predetermined operation-corresponding effect is executed in response to an operation of the operation means during the display of the operation promotion image.

  According to such a gaming machine, there may be a change effect in which the change suggestion image changes to the operation promotion image. For this reason, the variation suggestion image has both the function of suggesting that the symbol variation is being displayed and the function of changing to the operation promotion image, effectively improving the interest of the production using the variation suggestion image. It is possible to make it.

The gaming machine of reference invention 17-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 17-1,
The reach effect executed during the symbol variation display includes a first reach effect and a second reach effect that can be performed after the first reach effect.
The production control means includes
The change effect can be executed during the second reach effect, while the change effect is restricted from being executed during the first reach effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the change effect is not executed unless it develops to the second reach effect, compared to the case where the change effect is not executed during the second reach effect, it corresponds to the development to the second reach effect. It is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation.

The gaming machine of reference invention 17-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 17-2.
A holding unit capable of holding the right of determination by the determination unit up to a predetermined number;
The production control means includes
If the right to judge is held, display a hold image to that effect,
Before the start of the second reach effect during the change display of the symbol, both the change suggestion image and the hold image are displayed, while the hold image is not displayed during the second reach effect. A suggestion image is displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, during the second reach effect, a change suggestion image is displayed without displaying the hold image, and a change effect in which the change suggestion image is changed to an operation promotion image is performed. For this reason, compared with the case where the hold image is displayed during the second reach production, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change suggestion image, for example, that the player is paying attention to the hold image. It is possible to easily suppress the problem of overlooking the change effect due to the cause.

(Reference Invention 18)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-1 is
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
A symbol display control means for stopping and displaying a symbol indicating the determination result of the determining means after the symbols are variably displayed on the predetermined symbol display means;
Production control means for controlling the production based on the determination result of the determination means,
The production control means includes
The possibility suggesting image suggesting that the special game may be executed is displayed during the display of the variation of the symbol, and the possibility suggesting image suggests according to the operation of the operation means. The possibility suggestion image is changed so as to increase the performance.

  According to such a gaming machine, the possibility suggestion image changes so that the possibility suggestion image suggests (special game is executed) increases in accordance with the operation of the operation means. It is possible to make the player feel that the possibility of executing a special game is increased by himself, and it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the performance using the operation means.

The gaming machine of reference invention 18-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 18-1,
The production control means includes
There is a case where the possibility suggestion image is changed according to a first change pattern and a case where the possibility suggestion image is changed according to a second change pattern.
The probability that the special game is executed is different between the case where the possibility suggestion image is changed according to the first change pattern and the case where the possibility suggestion image is changed according to the second change pattern.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the possibility that the special game is executed differs depending on the change pattern of the possibility suggestion image, it is possible to make the player pay attention to how the possibility suggestion image changes. It is possible, and it is possible to execute a more effective presentation by changing the possibility suggestion image.

The gaming machine of reference invention 18-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 18-1 or reference invention 18-2.
The production control means includes
A hit notification effect for notifying that the special game is executed or a notification notification effect for notifying that the special game is not executed according to the operation of the operation means after changing the possibility suggestion image. It is characterized by executing.

  According to such a gaming machine, the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed according to the operation of the operation means after the possibility suggestion image is changed. For this reason, the player can operate the operation means while observing the possibility suggestion image after the change and estimating how much the special game is likely to be executed.

(Reference Invention 19)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 19-1 is
A light emitting means;
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, the symbol display control means for displaying the symbol indicating the result of the determination after the symbols are variably displayed on the predetermined symbol display means,
Production control means for controlling the execution of the production,
The production control means includes
During the variation display of the symbol, it is possible to execute a first reach effect and a second reach effect that can be performed after the first reach effect,
When the second reach effect is executed during the change display of the symbol, it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a specific color corresponding to the second reach effect before the start of the second reach effect. It is characterized by being.

  According to such a gaming machine, the light emitting means may emit light in a specific color, and the player can recognize in advance that the second reach effect is executed. For this reason, it is possible to make the player expect the second reach effect to be executed before the second reach effect is started, and the second reach effect and the light emitting means emit light in a specific color. A high production effect can be obtained by a synergistic effect with the production to be performed.

Further, the gaming machine of the reference invention 19-2 is the gaming machine of the reference invention 19-1,
A holding means capable of holding the right of determination up to a predetermined number;
The production control means includes
The light emitting means can emit light in the specific color before the determination is made for the right.

  According to such a gaming machine, the light emitting means may emit light in a specific color before the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect is executed is started. For this reason, compared with the case where the light emitting means emits light in a specific color between the time when the symbol variation display is started and the time when the second reach effect is started, the player can obtain the second reach effect at an earlier stage. Can be recognized, and it is possible to obtain a higher performance effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 19-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 19-1 or Reference Invention 19-2.
The light emitting means is disposed close to a speaker that outputs a production sound,
The production control means includes
A specific effect sound is output from the speaker as the light emitting means emits light in the specific color.

  According to such a gaming machine, a specific effect sound is output from the speaker as the light emitting means emits light in a specific color, so that the player can see that the light emitting means emits light in the specific color. It is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a problem that the player cannot recognize in advance that the second reach effect is executed due to an oversight.

(Reference Invention 20)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 20-1 is
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, special symbol display control means for displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination after the special symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined symbol display means, and
Production control means for controlling the execution of the production,
The production control means includes
In a predetermined image display means, the effect symbol is variably displayed along with the special symbol variation display, and the effect symbol indicating the result of the determination is stopped and displayed along with the special symbol stop display,
A suggestion effect that suggests that the special game may be executed during the variation display of the special symbol, and a first display control that variably displays the effect symbol in the first display area of the image display means; And second display control for variably displaying the effect symbol in a second display area different from the first display area of the image display means,
When executing the second display control, a notice effect for notifying that the suggestive effect is executed can be executed using a third display area different from the second display area of the image display means. It is characterized by being.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the effect design is variably displayed in the second display area of the image display means, the third display area (different from the second display area) of the image display means is used. A notice effect for notifying that the suggestion effect is executed (indicating that a special game may be executed) is executed. For this reason, it is possible to execute a notice effect without causing any hindrance to the change display of the effect symbol, and to execute a highly interesting effect by a synergistic effect of the effect that causes the effect symbol to be displayed variably and the notice effect. Is possible.

Further, the gaming machine of the reference invention 20-2 is the gaming machine of the reference invention 20-1,
A holding means capable of holding the right of determination up to a predetermined number;
The production control means includes
The notice effect is executed over a period in which the special symbol is variably displayed in a state where the right of determination is suspended and a period in which the special symbol is variably displayed in response to the determination. It is characterized by doing.

  According to such a gaming machine, the period during which the special symbol is variably displayed in a state where the right of determination is suspended and the period during which the special symbol is variably displayed according to the determination being made. The notice effect is executed. For this reason, compared with the case where the notice effect is executed using only the latter period, the notice effect is less likely to be restricted in terms of time, and it is possible to execute various notice effects that have a longer effect execution time.

(Reference Invention 21)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 21-1 is
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, special symbol display control means for displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination after the special symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined symbol display means, and
Production control means for controlling the execution of the production,
The production control means includes
In a predetermined image display means, the effect symbol is variably displayed along with the special symbol variation display, and the effect symbol indicating the result of the determination is stopped and displayed along with the special symbol stop display,
The effect symbol is configured to include identification information that can distinguish the effect symbol from other effect symbols,
The production control means includes
Before the effect design indicating the result of the determination is stopped and displayed, it is possible to display the effect design in a pseudo-stop manner,
When pseudo-stop-displaying the effect symbol, the identification information constituting the effect symbol can be changed in a first direction different from the changing direction in which the effect symbol was changed. Is.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the effect symbol is displayed in a pseudo stop state, the identification information constituting the effect symbol changes in the first direction different from the change direction. It is possible for a person to easily recognize, and, for example, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect using the effect symbol as compared with the case where the effect symbol is stopped by simply swinging the effect symbol.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 21-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 21-1,
The effect design is configured to include the identification information and a decoration image,
The production control means includes
When the effect design is displayed in a pseudo stop state, the identification information is changed in the first direction, and the decoration image is changed in a second direction different from the change direction and different from the first direction. It is what.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the effect symbol is displayed in a false stop, the identification information constituting the effect symbol and the decorative image change in different directions, so compared to the case where these change in the same direction. Thus, it is possible to improve the interest of the production using the production design.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine, 7b Production design display area (production design display part), 8 production design, 20 1st start opening, 21 2nd start opening, 30 1st big prize opening, 35 2nd big prize opening, 39 specific area 41a First special symbol display (first special symbol display unit), 41b Second special symbol display (second special symbol display unit), 80 Main control board (main control unit), 90 Sub control board (sub control) Part), 100 image control board (image control unit), 103a third effect hold indicator, 103b fourth effect hold indicator.

Claims (2)

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, special symbol display control means for displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination after the special symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined symbol display means, and
Production control means for controlling the execution of the production,
The production control means includes
In a predetermined image display means, the effect symbol is variably displayed along with the special symbol variation display, and the effect symbol indicating the result of the determination is stopped and displayed along with the special symbol stop display,
The effect symbol is configured to include identification information that can distinguish the effect symbol from other effect symbols,
The production control means includes
Before the effect design indicating the result of the determination is stopped and displayed, it is possible to display the effect design in a pseudo-stop manner,
When pseudo-stop-displaying the effect symbol, the identification information constituting the effect symbol can be changed in a first direction different from the changing direction in which the effect symbol was changed. Gaming machine. The effect design is configured to include the identification information and a decoration image,
The production control means includes
When the effect design is displayed in a pseudo stop state, the identification information is changed in the first direction, and the decoration image is changed in a second direction different from the change direction and different from the first direction. The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images